CN116728973A

CN116728973A - Printing apparatus

Info

Publication number: CN116728973A
Application number: CN202310214073.XA
Authority: CN
Inventors: 大卫·普拉塔马·贾亚普特拉; 弗洛兰特·苏马利诺格·高; 林英兴; 林清乾; 翁家邦; 苏德祥
Original assignee: Hand Held Products Inc
Current assignee: Hand Held Products Inc
Priority date: 2022-03-08
Filing date: 2023-03-08
Publication date: 2023-09-12

Abstract

Examples of the present disclosure relate generally to printing devices and, more particularly, relate to devices, systems, and methods for printing with a laser printhead and a reaction medium.

Description

Printing apparatus

Cross Reference to Related Applications

The present application claims priority and benefit from U.S. provisional patent application No. 63/269,003 filed on 3/8 of 2022, the contents of which provisional patent application is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. The present application is also a continuation of the application in the section of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 17/646,631, filed on even date 12/30 of 2021, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. U.S. patent application Ser. No. 17/646,631 claims priority from U.S. application Ser. No. 63/133,685 filed on 1-month 4 of 2021, U.S. application Ser. No. 63/145,865 filed on 2-month 4 of 2021, U.S. application Ser. No. 63/201,659 filed on 5-month 7 of 2021, and Indian application Ser. No. 202111046460 filed on 10-month 12 of 2021, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

Technical Field

Exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure relate generally to printing devices and, more particularly, relate to devices, systems, and methods for printing with a laser printhead and a reaction medium.

Background

A typical printing apparatus may include a printhead that may be configured to print content on a print medium. In some examples, the printing device may be configured to print the content using one or more known techniques (such as laser printing, thermal printing, etc.).

Disclosure of Invention

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a method is provided. The method may include: actuating, by a processor, a first roller and a second roller to traverse the print medium in a first direction, wherein the first roller is positioned upstream of the second roller in the first direction; stopping, by the processor, rotation of the first roller at a first time; and stopping, by the processor, rotation of the second roller at a second time, wherein the second time is later in time than the first time.

In some examples, the method may include causing the printhead to print content on the print medium in response to the second roller stopping rotating.

In some examples, the first roller is positioned upstream of the printhead and the second roller is positioned downstream of the printhead.

In some examples, the method further includes traversing the first roller and the second roller in a second direction, wherein traversing the first roller and the second roller in the second direction spaces the first roller and the second roller from the print medium.

In some examples, the method further includes determining a time period between the first time and the second time based on one or more print media characteristics, wherein the one or more print media characteristics include at least one of a type of print media or a thickness of the print media.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus is provided. The printing apparatus may include: a printhead assembly including at least a bottom chassis portion configured to receive a print medium; and a frame movably positioned above the bottom chassis portion along a vertical axis of the printing device, wherein the frame is movable between a first position and a second position, wherein the frame is spaced apart from the bottom chassis portion in the first position, and wherein the frame presses the print medium against the bottom chassis portion in the second position.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus is provided. In some examples, the printing apparatus may include: a first roller; a second roller positioned downstream of the first roller in the first direction, wherein the first roller and the second roller facilitate traversal of the print media in the first direction; a processor communicatively coupled to the first roller and the second roller; wherein the processor is configured to: actuating the first roller and the second roller to traverse the print medium in a first direction, stopping rotation of the first roller at a first time; and stopping the rotation of the second roller at a second time, wherein the second time is later in time than the first time.

In some examples, each of the first roller and the second roller includes a biasing member and a roller, wherein the biasing member is coupled to the roller, wherein the biasing member is configured to apply a biasing force on the roller in the second direction such that the roller abuts the print medium.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a computer-implemented method is provided. The computer-implemented method may include: triggering emission of Ultraviolet (UV) light from a UV light source onto a print medium associated with the printing device; detecting reflected light from the print medium; generating an indication of light intensity based on the reflected light; whether the printing device supports the print medium is determined based on whether the light intensity indication satisfies a light intensity threshold.

In some examples, the computer-implemented method further comprises: determining that the light intensity indication meets a light intensity threshold; and determining that the printing device supports the print medium in response to determining that the light intensity indication meets the light intensity threshold.

In some examples, the computer-implemented method further comprises: determining that the light intensity indication does not satisfy the light intensity threshold; and determining that the printing device does not support the print medium in response to determining that the light intensity indication does not satisfy the light intensity threshold.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus is provided. In some examples, the printing apparatus may include: a laser print head; and at least a first laser source and a second laser source in electronic communication with the laser printhead.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a print medium is provided. In some examples, the print medium may include: a laser markable coating defining a top layer of the print medium; and a reflective layer defining an intermediate layer of the print medium.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a computer-implemented method is provided. The computer-implemented method may include: receiving, by a controller of a printhead of a printing apparatus, print data indicative of at least a first power level; receiving, by a controller, a darkness setting input; adjusting, by the controller, the first power level to a second power level based at least in part on the darkness setting input; receiving, by a controller, a contrast setting input; adjusting, by the controller, the second power level to a third power level based at least in part on the contrast setting input; and a laser power control system that provides a third power level to the printhead by the controller.

In some examples, the first power level is associated with a first point to be printed on the print medium by the printhead.

In some examples, the laser power control system of the printhead is configured to cause the laser subsystem of the printhead to print the first dot at the third power level.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a computer-implemented method is provided. The computer-implemented method may include: determining, by a controller of a printhead of the printing apparatus, print data; determining, by the controller and based at least in part on the print data, a target print speed; a target media temperature is determined by the controller and based at least in part on the target print speed.

In some examples, the target print speed is determined based at least in part on a lookup table.

In some examples, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to determining, by the controller, that the current media temperature is within a predetermined range of the target media temperature, a control indication is provided by the controller to cause at least one laser of the printing device to perform a power compensation operation.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus is provided. In some examples, the printing apparatus may include: a laser print head; and at least a first laser source in electronic communication with the laser print head, wherein the laser print head is configured to generate at least one laser control signal to generate the pre-emphasis drive signal in a time period less than a total dot time at the beginning of at least one print dot.

The foregoing exemplary summary, as well as other exemplary objects and/or advantages of the present disclosure, and the manner in which the same are accomplished, is further explained in the following detailed description and the accompanying drawings thereof.

Drawings

The description of the exemplary embodiments may be read in connection with the accompanying drawings. It will be appreciated that for simplicity and clarity of illustration, elements shown in the figures have not necessarily been drawn to scale. For example, the dimensions of some of the elements are exaggerated relative to other elements. Embodiments incorporating teachings of the present disclosure are shown and described with respect to the drawings presented herein, wherein:

FIG. 1 illustrates a perspective view of a printing device according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 2 illustrates a perspective view of a portion of a printing device, depicting a printhead engine, according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 3A illustrates an exploded view of a printhead engine according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 3B illustrates another exploded view of a portion of a printing device according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 3C illustrates an exemplary diagram of a portion of a printing device according to one or more embodiments described herein;

Fig. 4A and 4B illustrate side views of a second roller according to one or more embodiments described herein, respectively;

FIG. 5 illustrates a cross-sectional view of a second roller according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 6 illustrates another perspective view of a portion of a printing device according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 7 illustrates a right front view of a portion of a printing device according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 8 illustrates a perspective view of a third roller assembly according to one or more embodiments described herein;

fig. 9A and 9B illustrate side and cross-sectional views of a second roller according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIGS. 10A and 10B are cross-sectional views of a printing device according to one or more embodiments described herein, illustrating traversal of a third roller assembly and a fourth roller assembly, respectively;

FIG. 11 illustrates a cross-sectional view of a printing device according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 12 illustrates an exploded view of a printhead engine according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 13 illustrates a perspective view of a frame according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 14 illustrates a cross-sectional view of a top chassis portion according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 15 illustrates a perspective view of another implementation of a frame according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 16 illustrates a bottom perspective view of a bottom chassis portion according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 17 illustrates another perspective view of a portion of a bottom chassis portion according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 18 illustrates a perspective view of a modular platform according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIGS. 19A and 19B illustrate perspective views of a modular platform sliding on a bottom chassis portion and a bottom chassis portion having the modular platform according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 20 shows a schematic diagram of a printhead according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 21 shows a schematic diagram of a laser subsystem according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 22 shows a schematic diagram of a SOL detector in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 23 shows a schematic diagram of a laser power control system according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 24 shows a schematic diagram of a printhead having a heat dissipating unit according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIGS. 25A and 25B illustrate compositions of print media and chemical processes associated therewith according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram illustrating printing of content on a print medium according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 27 shows a block diagram of a control unit according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 28 illustrates a flow diagram of a method for operating a printing device, according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 29 shows a functional block diagram of a portion of a printing device according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 30 illustrates a flow diagram of a method for operating a printing device, according to one or more embodiments described herein;

31A and 31B illustrate positioning of a frame relative to a print medium according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 32 illustrates a flow diagram of a method for printing content in a print medium according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 33 illustrates another method for printing content on a print medium according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 34 is a flow chart illustrating another method for printing content on a print medium according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 35 illustrates a flow diagram of a method for determining a measure of skew that may be introduced in printed content, according to one or more embodiments described herein;

36A, 36B, and 36C are diagrams illustrating an exemplary relationship between a count of a write laser beam and a measure of deflection according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 37 shows a flow diagram of a method for modifying content prior to printing according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 38A illustrates an image of modified content to be printed using a single writing laser beam in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 38B illustrates an image of modified content to be printed by multiple writing laser beams in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 39 shows a cross-sectional view of a printhead engine according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 40 illustrates an exemplary flow diagram according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 41 illustrates an exemplary flow diagram according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 42 illustrates an exemplary flow diagram according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 43 illustrates an exemplary timing diagram according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 44 illustrates an exemplary flow diagram according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 45 shows an exemplary schematic diagram in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 46 is an exemplary timing diagram according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 47 shows an exemplary flow diagram in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 48 illustrates an exemplary diagram of a portion of an exemplary printing device, according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 49 illustrates an example block diagram of some example components of an example printing apparatus according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 50 is an exemplary flow chart illustrating an exemplary method associated with determining whether a printing device supports print media in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 51 illustrates an exemplary chart showing an exemplary light intensity indication in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 52 is an exemplary flow diagram illustrating an exemplary method associated with determining whether a printing device supports print media in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 53 illustrates an exemplary chart showing an exemplary light intensity indication according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 54 is an exemplary flow diagram illustrating an exemplary method associated with determining print media characteristics according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 55 illustrates an exemplary chart showing an exemplary light intensity indication according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 56 is an exemplary flow chart illustrating an exemplary method associated with determining print media characteristics according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 57 shows an exemplary chart illustrating an exemplary light intensity indication in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 58 shows an exemplary chart illustrating an exemplary light intensity indication in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 59A illustrates an example top view of a portion of an example printing device according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 59B illustrates an example side view of a portion of an example printing device according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 60 is an exemplary flow diagram illustrating an exemplary method according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 61A illustrates an exemplary perspective view of a portion of an exemplary printing device according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 61B illustrates an exemplary cross-sectional view of a portion of an exemplary printing device according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 61C illustrates an example zoomed view of a portion of an example printing device according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 62A illustrates an example top view of a portion of an example bottom chassis portion according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 62B illustrates an example perspective view of a portion of an example bottom chassis portion according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 63A illustrates an example cross-sectional view of a portion of an example printing device according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 63B illustrates a zoomed view of a portion of an exemplary printing device according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 64 illustrates an exemplary laser printhead controller according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 65 shows an exemplary schematic diagram depicting laser beams generated by two laser sources according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 66 illustrates a flowchart showing exemplary operations according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 67 illustrates a flowchart showing exemplary operations according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 68 illustrates a flowchart showing exemplary operations according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 69 shows an exemplary schematic diagram depicting an optical assembly according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 70 illustrates an exemplary cross-sectional view of a collimating component in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 71 shows an exemplary schematic diagram depicting a cross-sectional view of a collimating component in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 72 illustrates an exemplary schematic diagram depicting a side view of at least a portion of a collimating component in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 73 shows an exemplary schematic diagram depicting a side view of at least a portion of collimation in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 74 shows an exemplary schematic diagram depicting a top cross-sectional view of an optical assembly, in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 75 shows an exemplary schematic drawing depicting a top cross-sectional view of an optical assembly in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 76 shows an exemplary schematic diagram depicting a top cross-sectional view of an optical assembly in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 77 shows an exemplary schematic diagram depicting a perspective view of a beam steering component in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 78 shows an exemplary schematic diagram depicting a perspective view of a beam steering component in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 79 shows an exemplary schematic drawing depicting a side cross-sectional view of a print medium in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 80 shows an exemplary schematic diagram depicting a side cross-sectional view of a print medium, in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 81 is an exemplary flowchart illustrating an exemplary method according to examples of the present disclosure;

FIG. 82 illustrates an exemplary power level relationship graph according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 83 illustrates an exemplary power level relationship graph according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 84 illustrates an exemplary print medium according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 85 illustrates an exemplary print medium according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 86 illustrates an exemplary print medium according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 87 illustrates an exemplary power level relationship graph according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 88 illustrates an exemplary power level relationship graph according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 89 illustrates an exemplary power level relationship graph according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 90 illustrates an exemplary print medium according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 91 illustrates an exemplary print medium according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 92 illustrates an exemplary print medium according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 93 is an exemplary flowchart illustrating an exemplary method according to examples of the present disclosure;

FIG. 94 is an exemplary chart illustrating exemplary duty cycles according to examples of the present disclosure;

FIG. 95 is an exemplary chart illustrating exemplary duty cycles according to examples of the present disclosure;

FIG. 96 is an exemplary chart illustrating exemplary duty cycles according to examples of the present disclosure;

FIG. 97 is an exemplary flowchart illustrating an exemplary method according to examples of the present disclosure;

FIG. 98 is an exemplary flowchart illustrating an exemplary method according to examples of the present disclosure;

FIG. 99 is an exemplary graph according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 100A is an exemplary graph according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 100B is an exemplary graph according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 100C is an exemplary graph according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 100D is an exemplary graph according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 101 illustrates an exemplary graph according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 102 illustrates a functional block diagram of a portion of a printing device according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 103 illustrates a functional block diagram of a portion of a printing device according to one or more embodiments described herein;

FIG. 104 shows an exemplary graph according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 105 is an exemplary flowchart illustrating an exemplary method according to examples of the present disclosure;

FIG. 106 is a schematic diagram depicting an exemplary portion of a printing apparatus according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 107 is a schematic diagram depicting an exemplary portion of a printing apparatus according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 108 is a schematic diagram depicting an exemplary portion of a printing apparatus according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 109 is a schematic diagram depicting an exemplary portion of a printing apparatus according to examples of the present disclosure;

FIG. 110 shows an exemplary graph according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 111 is a schematic diagram depicting an exemplary portion of a printing apparatus according to examples of the present disclosure;

FIG. 112 is an exemplary flowchart illustrating an exemplary method according to examples of the present disclosure;

FIG. 113 is a schematic diagram depicting an exemplary portion of a printing device according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 114 is a schematic diagram depicting an exemplary portion of a printing apparatus according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 115 is a schematic diagram depicting an exemplary portion of a printing apparatus according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram depicting an exemplary portion of a printing apparatus according to an example of the present disclosure;

FIG. 117 is a schematic diagram depicting an exemplary portion of a printing apparatus according to an example of the present disclosure; and is also provided with

Fig. 118 is an exemplary flowchart illustrating an exemplary method according to examples of the present disclosure.

Detailed Description

Some embodiments of the present disclosure will be described more fully hereinafter with reference to the accompanying drawings, in which some, but not all embodiments of the disclosure are shown. Indeed, these disclosures may be embodied in many different forms and should not be construed as limited to the embodiments set forth herein; rather, these embodiments are provided so that this disclosure will satisfy applicable legal requirements. Like numbers refer to like elements throughout.

Throughout this specification and the claims which follow, unless the context requires otherwise, the word "comprise" and variations such as "comprises" and "comprising" will be interpreted in an open sense, i.e. as "including but not limited to".

Reference throughout this specification to "one embodiment" or "an embodiment" means that a particular feature, structure, or characteristic described in connection with the embodiment is included in at least one embodiment. Thus, the appearances of the phrase "in one embodiment" or "in an embodiment" in various places throughout this specification are not necessarily all referring to the same embodiment. Furthermore, the particular feature, structure, or characteristic may be combined in any suitable manner in one or more other embodiments from one or more embodiments.

The word "exemplary" or "exemplary" is used herein to mean "serving as an example, instance, or illustration. Any implementation described herein as "exemplary" is not necessarily to be construed as preferred or advantageous over other implementations.

If the specification states a component or feature "may", "could", "should", "would", "preferably", "could", "would", "could", "for example", "could" or "could" (or other such language) be included or has a characteristic, the particular component or feature need not be included or provided with this feature. Such components or features may optionally be included in some embodiments, or may be excluded.

The terms "electronically coupled (electronically coupled)", "electronically coupled (electronically coupling)", "electronically coupled (electronically couple)", "in communication with …", "in electronic communication with …", or "connected" in this disclosure mean that two or more components are connected (directly or indirectly) by wired means (e.g., without limitation, a system bus, wired ethernet), and/or wireless means (e.g., without limitation, wi-Fi, bluetooth, zigBee) such that data and/or information may be transmitted to and/or received from the components.

The term "print medium" refers to a tangible, substantially durable physical material upon which text, graphics, images, etc. may be embossed and which persists over time. For example, the print media may typically take the form of derivatives of one or more of wood pulp or polymers, and may include conventional office paper, clear or colored acetic acid media, newsprint, envelopes, mailing labels, product labels, and other types of labels. Thicker materials, such as cardboard or cardboard, may also be included. In the exemplary embodiments discussed herein, specific mention may be made of "paper" or "label"; however, the operations, system elements, and methods of such exemplary applications may be applicable to media other than or in addition to the specifically mentioned "paper" or "label. Physical print media can be used for personal communications, business communications, etc. to convey thesaurus expressions (including news, editorial, product data, academic works, memos, and many other types of communications), data, advertisements, novels, entertainment content, and artwork and pictures.

The terms "printer" and "printing apparatus" refer to devices that can imprint text, images, shapes, symbols, graphics, etc. onto a print medium to form a durable, human-viewable representation of the corresponding text, images, shapes, symbols, graphics, etc. The printer may comprise, for example, a laser printer.

Further, various embodiments disclosed herein will describe a printing apparatus capable of printing content using a laser beam. More specifically, the disclosed embodiments disclose a printing apparatus capable of directly writing content on a printing medium using a laser. Further, such printing apparatus is capable of printing more than 7000 labels in a day. Further, the printing apparatus disclosed herein is capable of printing content at a variety of resolutions (varying from 200dpi to 600 dpi) and at a variety of speeds (6 IPS to 12 IPS). By removing reliance on thermal tape and thermal printheads, the overall operating cost of the printing device is reduced.

Furthermore, the printing device is capable of printing content on a medium having a predefined chemical composition using one or more laser beams. In some examples, a printing device may include a laser printhead having one or more laser sources configured to facilitate printing content directly on a print medium using one or more laser beams emitted from the one or more laser sources. Further and in some examples, the print medium may have a predefined chemical composition that facilitates the print medium to change color if exposed to or otherwise contacted by energy from one or more laser beams. Printing content directly on a print medium allows for rapid printing of the content compared to conventional printers.

Exemplary Printer device architecture

Fig. 1 illustrates a perspective view of a printing device 100 according to one or more embodiments described herein. Although not shown in fig. 1, the printing apparatus 100 may include a power source.

The printing apparatus 100 may include a media supply roll 102. The media supply roll 102 may include print media 104 wound on a media supply spool 106. In the example shown in fig. 1, the printing apparatus 100 may include a media supply spindle 108, and the media supply spool 106 may be configured to be disposed on the media supply spindle 108. In some examples, the media supply spindle 108 may include a media sensor (not shown) that may facilitate determining whether the media supply spool 106 is loaded on the media supply spindle 108. Some examples of media sensors may include, but are not limited to, encoder wheels, photon sensors, and the like. In some examples, the printing device 100 may support print media 104 of different widths and sizes.

In some examples, printing device 100 may include a media guidance spindle 110 that may be positioned to guide print media 104 from media supply roll 102 to travel in a print direction along a print path within printing device 100. In some examples, the print path may correspond to a path between the media supply spindle 108 along which the print medium 104 travels to the exit slot 112. Further, in some examples, the print direction may correspond to a direction along which the print medium 104 travels for a print operation. For example, in the print direction, the print medium 104 travels from the media supply spool 106 toward the outlet slit 112. Further, the direction opposite the printing direction (e.g., from the outlet slit 112 to the media supply spool 106) is referred to as the retraction direction. In some examples, after text, graphics, images, etc. (as applicable) are imprinted on the print medium 104, the print medium 104 may exit the printing device 100 from the exit slot 112.

In some examples, the printing device 100 may include a first actuation unit 119 that may facilitate rotating the media supply spool 106 and the media guidance spindle 110 in a counter-clockwise rotational direction to advance the print media 104 along the print path in the print direction. Additionally or alternatively, the first actuation unit 119 may facilitate rotating the media supply spool 106 and/or the media guidance spindle 110 in a clockwise rotational direction, thereby advancing the print media 104 in a retraction direction. In an exemplary embodiment, the first actuation unit 119 may include one or more of motors, which may be directly or indirectly coupled to the media supply spool 106 and the media guidance spindle 110. The one or more motors may facilitate rotating the media supply spool 106 and the media guidance spindle 110.

In some examples, media supply spindle 108 and/or media guide spindle 110 may be eliminated and print medium 104 may be fed into printing device 100 through an open slot (not shown) and may exit printing device 100 through an exit slot 112.

Additionally or alternatively, the printing device 100 may include a back ridge section 114. In some examples, the aft ridge section 114 may be made of a material having rigid properties (such as an aluminum alloy, stainless steel, etc.). In some examples, the aft ridge section 114 may include a first surface 115. The first surface 115 may be disposed perpendicular to the printer base 118.

In some examples, the print head engine 122 may be coupled to the spine segment 114 of the printing device 100. In an exemplary embodiment, the printhead engine includes a top chassis portion 126 and a bottom chassis portion. In some examples, the bottom chassis portion 128 may be secured to the first surface 115 of the aft spine section 114. In some examples, the bottom chassis portion 128 may be positioned below the top chassis portion 126 along the vertical axis 128 and may be configured to receive the print media 104 from the media supply roll 102.

In some examples, top chassis portion 126 includes printheads configured to print content on print medium 104. It may be desirable to keep the printhead fixed in the printing apparatus 100. To this end, in some scenarios, it may be desirable to load the print medium 104 in the printing device 100 such that the print medium 104 traverses between the top chassis portion 126 and the bottom chassis portion 128. To smoothly load the print medium 104, the bottom housing portion 128 is movable relative to the top housing portion 126. For example, the complete bottom chassis portion 128 is pivotally movable relative to the top chassis portion 126. Additionally or alternatively, a portion of the bottom chassis portion 128 may be movable relative to the top chassis portion 126, rather than the entire bottom chassis portion 128 being movable relative to the top chassis portion 126. Additionally or alternatively, a portion of the top chassis portion 126 may be movable relative to the bottom chassis portion 128. Such modular movement of the top and bottom housing portions 126, 128 relative to each other allows loading of the print medium 104 in the printing apparatus. Furthermore, such an arrangement allows for clearing of media jams. In alternative embodiments, the top chassis portion 126 may be movable relative to the bottom chassis portion 128. For example, the top chassis portion 126 may be pivotally coupled to the bottom chassis portion 128. For example, a first end portion 146 of the top chassis portion 126 (defined adjacent the media supply spool 106) is pivotally coupled to a first end portion 148 of the bottom chassis portion 128 (defined adjacent the media supply spool 106). To this end, the top chassis portion 126 may be configured to rotate about the first end portion 148 of the bottom chassis portion 128. In some examples, when no external force is applied to the top chassis portion 126, the top chassis portion 126 may be biased to rotate in a clockwise direction about the first end portion 148 of the bottom chassis portion 128. To this end, the top chassis portion 126 may be in an open state when no external force is applied to the top chassis portion 126.

In some examples, when an external force is applied to the top chassis portion 126, the top chassis portion 126 may rotate in a counter-clockwise direction about the first end portion 148 of the bottom chassis portion 128. In such implementations, the top chassis portion 126 may travel toward the bottom chassis portion 128 (i.e., by rotating in a counterclockwise direction about the first end portion 148 of the bottom chassis portion 128). In some examples, the top chassis portion 126 may travel toward the bottom chassis portion 128 until the top chassis portion 126 is additionally coupled to the bottom chassis portion 128 by a latch 130.

In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to top chassis portion 126 being pivotally coupled to bottom chassis portion 128 at first end portion 148 of bottom chassis portion 128. In an exemplary embodiment, the top chassis portion 126 is pivotably coupled to a second end portion 150 (defined remote from the media supply spool 106) coupled to the bottom chassis portion 128. For example, the second end portion 152 of the top chassis portion 126 is pivotably coupled to the second end portion 150 of the bottom chassis portion 128. To this end, the top chassis portion 126 may be configured to rotate about the second end portion 150 of the bottom chassis portion 128. In some examples, when no external force is applied to the top chassis portion 126, the top chassis portion 126 may be biased to rotate in a counter-clockwise direction about the first end portion 148 of the bottom chassis portion 128. To this end, the top chassis portion 126 may be in an open state when no external force is applied to the top chassis portion 126.

In some examples, when an external force is applied to the top chassis portion 126, the top chassis portion 126 may rotate in a clockwise direction about the second end portion 150 of the bottom chassis portion 128. In such implementations, the top chassis portion 126 may travel toward the bottom chassis portion 128 (i.e., by rotating in a clockwise direction about the second end portion 150 of the bottom chassis portion 128). In some examples, the top chassis portion 126 may travel toward the bottom chassis portion 128 until the top chassis portion 126 is additionally coupled to the bottom chassis portion 128 by a latch 130.

In some examples, latch 130 is pivotably coupled to bottom chassis portion 128. For example, latch 130 may be coupled to bottom chassis portion 128 by a biasing member (not shown). Some examples of biasing members may include springs, cams, or other structures configured to apply a constant biasing force.

More specifically, the latch 130 may be coupled adjacent the second end portion 150 of the bottom chassis portion 128 and away from the first end portion 148 of the bottom chassis portion 128. Latch 130 may have a U-shape that may include a recessed portion 166 and one or more raised portions 168a and 168b. In addition, the recessed portion 166 and raised portions 168a and 168b face the second end portion 150 of the bottom chassis portion 128. Raised portion 168a is coupled to bottom chassis portion 128, while raised portion 168b is positioned away from raised portion 168 a. In some examples, the recessed portion 166 is positioned between the raised portion 168a and the raised portion 168b.

To lock the top chassis portion 126 with the bottom chassis portion 128, the top chassis portion 126 may define a protrusion 170 that is received within the recess 166 of the latch 130. To decouple the top chassis portion 126 from the bottom chassis portion 128, the latch 130 is rotated to disengage the protrusion 170 from the recess 166. The top chassis portion 126 may then be rotated in a clockwise direction to be in an open state. In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to coupling latch 130 to bottom chassis portion 128. In an exemplary embodiment, the latch 130 may be coupled to the top chassis portion 126.

Alternatively or additionally, the top chassis portion 126 may be fixed to the spine section 114 while the bottom chassis portion 128 is pivotally coupled to the top chassis portion 126. In such embodiments, the bottom chassis portion 128 may be configured to rotate between an open state and a closed state. In the open state, the bottom chassis portion 128 may be tilted in a downward direction (along the vertical axis 128) relative to the top chassis portion 126. In the closed state, the bottom chassis portion 128 may be configured to be coupled to the top chassis portion 126 by a latch 130. Further, in such embodiments, the latch 130 may be coupled to the top chassis portion 126. In another embodiment, the latch may be coupled to the bottom chassis portion 128 without departing from the scope of the present disclosure. One such configuration of printhead engine 122 is further described in connection with fig. 39.

Fig. 39 illustrates a cross-sectional view 3900 of the printhead engine 122 according to one or more embodiments described herein.

As discussed, the printhead engine 122 includes a top chassis portion 126 and a bottom chassis portion 128. In an exemplary embodiment, the top chassis portion 126 may include a first top chassis module 3902 and a second top chassis module 3904. Similarly, the bottom chassis portion 128 may include a first bottom chassis module 3906 and a second bottom chassis module 3908.

In an exemplary embodiment, the first top chassis module 3902 may be configured to receive the printheads 302. Further, the first top chassis module 3902 may be fixedly coupled to the spine segment 114 of the printing device 100. In an exemplary embodiment, the shape of the first top chassis module 3902 may correspond to a polygon having one or more sides 308a, 308b, and 308 d. As discussed, sides 308b and 308d are spaced apart from one another along transverse axis 212. Side 308d may be configured to receive another latch 3910. Further, as discussed, side 308a may be configured to receive latch 130 (not shown in fig. 39).

In an exemplary embodiment, the second top chassis module 3904 is pivotably coupled to the bottom chassis portion 128 of the printhead engine 122 to allow for media loading in some examples. More specifically, second top chassis module 3904 is pivotably coupled to second bottom chassis module 3908. In an exemplary embodiment, the second top chassis module 3904 may have an outer surface 3912 that may define a first end portion 3914 and a second end portion 3916. In an exemplary embodiment, the second end portion 3916 may be spaced apart from the first end portion 3914 along the lateral axis 212 of the printhead engine 122. Further, a second end portion 3916 of the second top chassis module 3904 is pivotably coupled to the bottom chassis portion 128. Additionally or alternatively, the outer surface 3912 may define a bottom end portion 3918 and a top end portion 3920. In some examples, the bottom end portion 3918 of the second top chassis module 3904 may be configured to receive a roller assembly (described further below) and a media sensor 3922. In some examples, media sensor 3922 may be configured to detect the presence of print media 104 between top chassis portion 126 and bottom chassis portion 128.

In an exemplary embodiment, the second top chassis module 3904 may be configured to traverse between a first position and a second position relative to the bottom chassis portion 128 of the printhead engine 122. More specifically, the second top chassis module 3904 may be configured to pivotally traverse between a first position and a second position. In the first position, the first end portion 3914 of the second top chassis module 3904 may be positioned away from the bottom chassis portion 128. In the second position, the first end portion 3914 of the second top chassis module 3904 may be coupled to the first top chassis module 3902 by a latch 3910. In some examples, the second top chassis module 3904 may be biased to be in the second position. Thus, when no external force is applied to the second top chassis module 3904 and the second top chassis module 3904 is not coupled to the latch 3910, the second top chassis module 3904 may traverse to the second position.

In some examples, the second bottom chassis module 3908 may be fixedly coupled to the spine segment 114 of the printing device 100. In some examples, the second bottom chassis module 3908 may have an outer surface 3924 that may define a first end portion 3926 and a second end portion 3928. The first end portion 3926 may be spaced apart from the second end portion 3928 along the lateral axis 212 of the printhead engine 122. Additionally, an outer surface 3924 of the second bottom chassis module 3908 may define a top end portion 3930 and a bottom end portion 3932. The top end portion 3930 may be spaced apart from the bottom end portion 3932 along the vertical axis 128. The top end portion 3930 of the second bottom chassis module 3908 may define an edge with the second end portion 3928 of the second bottom chassis module 3908. In some examples, second top chassis module 3904 may be pivotally coupled with an edge between second end portion 3928 and second bottom chassis module 3908. Further, the bottom end portion 3932 of the second bottom chassis module 3908 may define an edge with the first end portion 3926 of the second bottom chassis module 3908. In some examples, the second top chassis module 3904 may be pivotally coupled with an edge between the first end portion 3926 of the first bottom chassis module 3906 and the bottom end portion 3932 of the second bottom chassis module 3908.

In an exemplary embodiment, the first bottom chassis module 3906 is pivotably coupled to the second bottom chassis module 3908. In some examples, first bottom chassis module 3906 may traverse between a first position and a second position. In the first position, the first bottom chassis module 3906 may be located remotely from the top chassis portion 126. In the second position, the first bottom chassis module 3906 may be coupled to the top chassis portion 126 by latches 130. In an exemplary embodiment, the first bottom chassis module 3906 may be biased in the first position. For example, when no external force is exerted on first bottom chassis module 3906 and when first bottom chassis module 3906 is uncoupled from top chassis portion 126, first bottom chassis module 3906 may traverse to the first position.

To load print media 104, second top chassis module 3904 traverses to a first position relative to bottom chassis portion 128. In addition, the first bottom chassis module 3906 traverses to the first position. Once in the first position, the second top chassis module 3904 and the first bottom chassis module 3906 are positioned away from the bottom chassis portion 128 and the top chassis portion 126, respectively, creating sufficient space in the print head engine 122 to allow an operator of the printing device 100 to load the print medium 104 in the printing device 100.

In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to top chassis portion 126 being pivotally coupled to bottom chassis portion 128. In alternative or additional embodiments, the top chassis portion 126 may be completely uncoupled from the bottom chassis portion 128 in some embodiments. For example, the top chassis portion 126 may be configured to travel along a vertical axis 128 relative to the bottom chassis portion 128. In such embodiments, in some examples, at least one linear guide may be disposed on a surface of an exemplary back ridge section of an exemplary printer body. In some examples, each of the at least one linear guide may include a corresponding linear guide rail and a corresponding linear block. In some examples, the corresponding linear guide rail may be secured to the first surface of the aft spine segment by, for example, bolts, screws, or the like. In some examples, the corresponding linear block may be coupled to the corresponding linear rail by, for example, ball bearings, rollers, or the like, such that the corresponding linear block may move and/or slide along the corresponding linear rail. Exemplary linear guides may include, but are not limited to, rolling element linear motion bearing guides, sliding contact linear motion bearing guides, and the like.

For example, in fig. 1, a first linear guide 120A and a second linear guide 120B may be disposed on the first surface 115. The first linear guide 120A may, for example, comprise a linear rail secured to the first surface 115 of the aft spine segment 114; and a corresponding linear block (not shown) coupled to the linear guide and movable along the linear guide. Additionally or alternatively, the second linear guide 120B may include a linear rail disposed on the first surface 115 of the aft spine segment 114; and corresponding linear blocks. In an exemplary embodiment, the first linear guide 120A and the second linear guide 120B are positioned parallel to each other and may be positioned along a vertical axis 128 of the printing device 100.

In some examples, the print head engine 122 of the printing device 100 can be coupled to the first linear guide 120A and the second linear guide 120B by corresponding linear blocks of the first linear guide 120A and the second linear guide 120B, respectively. In the exemplary embodiment, printhead engine 122 includes a top chassis portion 126 and a bottom chassis portion 128. In some examples, the top chassis portion 126 of the printhead engine 122 can be coupled to the first linear guide 120A and the second linear guide 120B, respectively. Further, in some examples, the top chassis portion 126 may be movable along a linear rail of the first linear guide 120A and/or the second linear guide 120B along a vertical axis 128 of the printing device 100.

In some examples, the bottom chassis portion 128 may be secured to the first surface 115 of the aft spine section 114. In some examples, the bottom chassis portion 128 may be positioned below the top chassis portion 126 along the vertical axis 128 and may be configured to receive the print media 104 from the media supply roll 102.

In some examples, as the top chassis portion 126 is movable along its corresponding travel path along the vertical axis 128, the top chassis portion 126 may reach and/or be positioned at a bottom point of the travel path along the vertical axis 128. When the top chassis portion 126 is positioned at the bottom point, the top chassis portion 126 may be removably coupled to the bottom chassis portion 128 by a latch 130.

Additionally or alternatively, the printing device 100 includes a first roller 132 and a second roller 134. In an exemplary embodiment, the first roller 132 may be positioned upstream (in the print direction) of the printhead engine 122 and the second roller 134 may be positioned downstream (in the print direction) of the printhead engine 122. The first roller 132 and the second roller 134 may facilitate traversal of the print medium 104 along the print path. Some examples of the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 may include, but are not limited to, platen rollers, pinch rollers, idle rollers, and the like. As depicted in fig. 1, the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 may correspond to a single roller that may be rotatably coupled to the back ridge section 114 of the printing device 100. However, in some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to first roller 132 and second roller 134 being a single roller coupled to back ridge section 114 of printing device 100. In an exemplary embodiment, the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 may be part of a roller assembly, as further described in fig. 2-10A-10B.

In an exemplary embodiment, the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 are communicatively coupled to the first actuation unit 119. The first and second rollers 132 and 134 may be rotated in a clockwise direction or in a counterclockwise direction by the first actuation unit 119 to facilitate traversing of the print medium in a printing direction or in a retracting direction, respectively. Since the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 are coupled to the first actuation unit 119 and the first actuation unit 119 is coupled to the media supply spool 106, in some examples, the media supply spool 106, the first roller 132, and the second roller 134 may operate synchronously. In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the media supply spool 106, the first roller 132, and the second roller 134 operating synchronously. In an exemplary embodiment, the media supply spool 106, the first roller 132, and the second roller 134 may operate asynchronously. To this end, the first actuating unit 119 may start rotation and/or stop rotation of the media supply spool 106, the first roller 132, and the second roller 134 at different times. In such examples, the media supply spool 106, the first roller 132, and the second roller 134 may be coupled to the first actuation unit 119 by different gear assemblies (not shown) that may enable the media supply spool 106, the first roller 132, and the second roller 134 to operate asynchronously. Alternatively or additionally, the printing device 100 may include a separate actuation unit for each of the media supply spool 106, the first roller 132, and the second roller 134 to enable asynchronous operation between the media supply spool 106, the first roller 132, and the second roller 134. For example, the first roller 132 and the media supply spool 106 may be coupled to a first actuation unit 119, while the second roller 134 may be coupled to a second actuation unit 136. In an exemplary embodiment, the second actuating unit 136 may be similar to the first actuating unit 119. All embodiments and/or alternatives applicable to the first actuation unit 119 are also applicable to the second actuation unit 136.

For purposes of the ongoing description, the media supply spool 106, the first roller 132, and the second roller 134 are considered to operate asynchronously.

In an exemplary embodiment, the printing apparatus 100 can further include a control unit 138 communicatively coupled to the first and second actuation units 119, 136. In some examples, the control unit 138 may be configured to control the operation of the printing device 100 to cause the printing device 100 to print content on the print medium 104. As another example, the control unit 138 may be configured to traverse the print medium in the print direction. The structure and operation of the control unit 138 is further described in connection with fig. 12.

In some examples, printing device 100 may include a User Interface (UI) 140 for enabling communication between a user and printing device 100. UI 140 may be communicatively coupled to other components of printing device 100 for displaying visual and/or audible information and/or for receiving information (e.g., typing, touching, voice, etc.) from a user.

In the example shown in fig. 1, the printing apparatus 100 may include a UI 140 having, for example, a display 142 and a keypad 144. The display 142 may be configured to display various information associated with the printing apparatus 100. The keypad 144 may include function buttons that may be configured to perform various typical printing functions (e.g., cancel print jobs, print media advance, etc.) or programmable macros for executing preset print parameters that contain a particular type of print media. In some examples, UI 140 may be electronically coupled to a controller (such as control unit 138) for controlling the operation of printing apparatus 100, among other functions. UI 140 may be supplemented or replaced by data input or other forms of printer control, such as separate data input and control modules that are connected wirelessly or through data cables operatively coupled to computers, routers, etc.

In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to UI 140 including display 142 and keypad 144. In an exemplary embodiment, UI 140 may include a touch screen that may enable an operator of the printing device to enter commands and/or to examine notifications/alarms generated by printing device 100.

Although fig. 1 shows an exemplary UI 140, it should be noted that the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the exemplary UI 140 as shown in fig. 1. In some implementations, the user interface may be different from the user interface depicted in fig. 1. In some implementations, no user interface may be present.

In some examples, various components of the printing device 100 described in connection with fig. 1 are enclosed within the housing 154. For example, the media supply spindle 108, printhead engine, etc. are enclosed and positioned within the housing 154. In an exemplary embodiment, the housing 154 may include a fixed portion 156 and a cover portion 158 that may be movably coupled to the fixed portion 156 by one or more hinges (not shown). In some examples, the one or more hinges allow the lid portion 158 to rotate about the one or more hinges. Thus, the cover portion 158 may rotate relative to the fixed portion 156. To this end, in some examples, the cover portion 158 may be configured to be in a closed state and an open state. In the closed state, the cover portion 158, in combination with the securing portion 156, may enclose one or more components of the printing device 100 (as described in fig. 1). In the open state, the cover portion 158 may expose the one or more components of the printing device 100 (as described in fig. 1), thereby allowing an operator of the printing device 100 to access the one or more components of the printing device 100.

In some examples, the cover portion 158 may have an inner surface 160 that may be configured to receive a magneto-sensitive element 162. In an exemplary embodiment, a magneto-sensitive element 162 (such as a hall effect sensor) may be configured to facilitate detecting whether the cover portion 158 of the housing 154 is in a closed state or an open state. In some examples, the magneto-sensitive element 162 may be aligned with a first sensor 164 positioned on the one or more components of the printing device 100 when the cover portion 158 of the housing 154 is in the closed state. For example, the first sensor 164 may be positioned on the bottom chassis portion 128 of the printhead engine 122. When the magneto-sensitive element 162 is aligned with the first sensor 164, the first sensor 164 may generate a first signal that may indicate that the cover portion 158 is in the closed state.

In an exemplary embodiment, the printing apparatus 100 can include more than one first sensor 164 positionable at one or more locations in the printing apparatus 100. For example, the first sensor 164 may be positioned at the back ridge section 114 of the printing device 100. Correspondingly, when the cover portion 158 is in the closed state, the cover portion 158 may receive the magneto-sensitive element 162 at a location where the magneto-sensitive element 162 may be aligned with the first sensor 164 (positioned on the back ridge section 114).

In some examples, the printing device 100 may further include one or more components, such as a validator, stripper, rewinder, cutter, or any other component. In an exemplary embodiment, the validator may correspond to an image capture device that may be configured to capture an image of the print content. The verifier may then be configured to verify the print content based on the captured image. In some examples, the validator may be located as an integral component of the printing device 100. As another example, the validator may be located external to the printing device 100. In an exemplary embodiment, the validator may include an imaging module communicatively coupled to the printer and may be disposed in the validator. The validator may be attached to the printing apparatus 100 or may be a separate device where the user brings the printed mark for validation. In either case, the validator is communicatively coupled to the printer.

In an exemplary embodiment, the imaging module in the validator may be configured to capture an image of the print content. The image of the print is compared to one or more known quality criteria. Then, based on the comparison result, the validator may be configured to determine the print quality. The validator may instruct the printing device to reprint the content if the print quality is below a predetermined threshold. In another embodiment, the validator may instruct the printing device to print "blank" or "cancel" on the print content.

Structure of printhead engine-vector mode

Fig. 2 illustrates a perspective view of a portion of a printing device 100, depicting a printhead engine 122, according to one or more embodiments described herein.

Referring to fig. 2, a printhead engine 122 is depicted in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein. In the exemplary embodiment, printhead engine 122 includes a top chassis portion 126, a bottom chassis portion 128, and a top chassis cover 201.

In an exemplary embodiment, the top chassis portion 126 has an outer surface 204 that may define a top end portion 206 and a bottom end portion 208 that does not include the top chassis cover 201. The top end portion 206 and the bottom end portion 208 of the top chassis portion 126 are spaced apart from one another along the vertical axis 128 of the printing device 100. Further, in some examples, when the top chassis portion 126 is coupled to the bottom chassis portion 128, the bottom end portion 208 may be defined adjacent to the bottom chassis portion 128 and the top end portion 206 may be defined remote from the bottom chassis portion 128.

In some examples, top chassis portion 126 may have a polygonal shape, such as a rectangular shape with one or more sides 210a, 210b, 210c, and 210 d. Side 210a and side 210c may be defined as opposing each other along longitudinal axis 210 of printhead engine 122. Similarly, side 210b and side 210d may be defined as opposing each other along a lateral axis 212 of printhead engine 122. In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to top chassis portion 126 having a rectangular shape. In an exemplary embodiment, the shape of the top chassis portion 126 may correspond to other polygons without departing from the scope of this disclosure.

In the exemplary embodiment, outer surface 204 of top chassis portion 126 defines a first wing portion 216 that protrudes from side 210b of top chassis portion 126 along a lateral axis 212 of printhead engine 122. In addition, the first wing portion 216 extends from the side 210a to the side 210c along the longitudinal axis 210 of the printhead engine 122. In some examples, the length of the first wing portion 216 (along the longitudinal axis 210) may be the same as the length of the top chassis portion 126 (along the longitudinal axis 210). In addition, the height of the first wing portion 216 is less than the height of the top chassis portion 126. Thus, along the vertical axis 128 of the printing device 100, the first wing portion 216 can define a step 218 with the side 210 b.

In the exemplary embodiment, similar to first wing portion 216, outer surface 204 of top chassis portion 126 defines a second wing portion 220 that protrudes from side 210d of top chassis portion 126 along a lateral axis 212 of printhead engine 122. In addition, the second wing portion 220 extends from the side 210a to the side 210c along the longitudinal axis 210 of the printhead engine 122. In some examples, the length of the second wing portion 220 (along the longitudinal axis 210) may be the same as the length of the top chassis portion 126 (along the longitudinal axis 210). In addition, the height of the second wing portion 220 is less than the height of the top chassis portion 126. Thus, along the vertical axis 128 of the printing device 100, the second wing portion 220 can define a step 222 with the side 210 d.

In an exemplary embodiment, side 210a is further configured to receive a latch 130 that facilitates removable coupling of top chassis portion 126 with bottom chassis portion 128.

In an exemplary embodiment, the bottom chassis portion 128 has an outer surface 224. In some examples, the outer surface 224 of the bottom chassis portion 128 defines a top end portion 226 of the bottom chassis portion 128 and a bottom end portion 228 of the bottom chassis portion 128. The bottom end portion 228 of the bottom chassis portion 128 is spaced apart from the top end portion 226 of the bottom chassis portion 128 along the vertical axis 128 of the printhead engine 122. In addition, the top end portion 226 of the bottom chassis portion 128 is adjacent to the bottom end portion 208 of the top chassis portion 126, while the bottom end portion 228 of the bottom chassis portion 128 is distal from the bottom end portion 208 of the top chassis portion 126.

In an exemplary embodiment, the outer surface 224 of the bottom chassis portion 128 defines at least two sides 230a and 230b of the bottom chassis portion 128. In an exemplary embodiment, side 230a may be spaced apart from side 230b along longitudinal axis 210 of printhead engine 122. In an exemplary embodiment, side 230a has a first edge 232 and a second edge 234. In some examples, the first edge 232 is spaced apart from the second edge 234 along the lateral axis 212 of the printhead engine 122. Similar to side 230a, side 230b has a third edge 252 and a fourth edge 254 (see fig. 3A). In some examples, the third edge 252 is spaced apart from a fourth edge 254 (see fig. 3A) along the lateral axis 212 of the printhead engine 122.

In an exemplary embodiment, the outer surface 224 of the bottom chassis portion 128 may define a first circular recess 236 and a second circular recess 238 on the side 230 a. Further, a first circular recess 236 and a second circular recess 238 (defined by the outer surface 224 of the bottom chassis portion 128) are defined at the top end portion 226 of the bottom chassis portion 128. In addition, the outer surface 224 of the bottom chassis portion 128 defines a first circular recess 236 adjacent the first edge 232 of the side 230a and a second circular recess 238 adjacent the second edge 234 of the side 230 a. Similarly, the outer surface 224 of the bottom chassis portion 128 may define a third rounded notch 240 (see fig. 3A) and a fourth rounded notch 242 (see fig. 3A) on a side 230b at the top end portion 226 of the bottom chassis portion 128. In addition, the outer surface 224 defines a third rounded notch 240 adjacent a third edge 252 of the side 230b and a fourth rounded notch 242 adjacent a fourth edge 254 of the side 230 b. In some examples, the first circular recess 236 and the third circular recess 240 may have a coincident central axis 244 (see fig. 3A) extending along the longitudinal axis 210 of the printhead engine 122. Similarly, the second and fourth circular recesses 238, 242 may have coincident central axes 246 (see fig. 3A) extending along the longitudinal axis 210 of the print head engine 122. The third circular recess 240, the fourth circular recess 242, the coincidence central axis 244, and the coincidence central axis 246 are further illustrated with respect to fig. 3A.

In the exemplary embodiment, first circular recess 236 and third circular recess 240 are configured to receive first shaft 248 such that first shaft 248 is rotatable within first circular recess 236 and third circular recess 240. In addition, the third and fourth circular recesses 240, 242 are configured to receive the second shaft 250 such that the second shaft 250 is rotatable in the second and fourth circular recesses 238, 242. In some examples, the first and second shafts 248, 250 may correspond to rollers that may assist the print medium 104 in traveling along the print path.

Fig. 3A illustrates an exploded view 300A of the printhead engine 122 according to one or more embodiments described herein.

In an exemplary embodiment, the top chassis portion 126 may be configured to receive a printhead, such as the printhead shown in fig. 3B. In an exemplary embodiment, the top chassis portion 126 may be configured to couple with the bottom chassis portion 128 via a latch 130.

In the exemplary embodiment, bottom chassis portion 128 has an outer surface 204, a top surface 319, and a bottom surface 321. In some examples, the outer surface 224 and the top surface 319 define a top end portion 226 of the bottom chassis portion 128. Further, in some examples, the outer surface 224 and the bottom surface 321 define a bottom end portion 228 of the bottom chassis portion 128. In some examples, the top surface 319 of the bottom chassis portion 128 defines a platform 322, which may correspond to an area on which the print medium 104 is received for a printing operation. Further, the platform 322 extends along the length (defined along the longitudinal axis 210 of the printhead engine 122) and width (defined along the lateral axis 212 of the printhead engine 122) of the bottom chassis portion 128.

In some examples, the platform 322 extends between the central axis 244 and the central axis 246. As discussed, the central axis 244 passes through the first circular recess 236 and the third circular recess 240. The first shaft 248 is rotatably coupled to the first circular recess 236 and the third circular recess 240. Similarly, as discussed, the central axis 246 passes through the second and third circular recesses 238, 240. The second shaft 250 is rotatably coupled to the first circular recess 236 and the third circular recess 240.

Media path within a printhead engine

In some examples, various preconditions may be required or otherwise determined prior to or during printing of the content on the print medium, such as, but not limited to, an orientation of the print medium relative to the print head, a focus of a position of the laser light source relative to the print medium, and the like. For example, in the event that the orientation of the print medium is skewed or otherwise misaligned during a printing operation, the print may be blurred, out of focus, or may have scaling problems. Thus, in some examples, it may be paramount to orient the print medium relative to the printhead prior to a printing operation. Alternatively or additionally, it may be advantageous to planarize the print medium prior to the printing operation.

The apparatus, systems, and methods described herein disclose a printing device capable of leveling a print medium prior to a printing operation. In an exemplary embodiment, the printing operation may correspond to an operation of printing content on a printing medium. The printing apparatus includes a printhead engine positionable downstream of a media supply spool. The media supply spool may be configured to supply print media to the printhead engine. The direction in which the print medium traverses from the media supply spool to the printhead engine is referred to as the print direction.

In an exemplary embodiment, the printing apparatus may include a first roller and a second roller. The first roller may be positioned upstream of the printhead engine in a print direction traversed by the print medium and the second roller may be positioned downstream of the printhead in the print direction traversed by the print medium.

To initiate a traverse of the print medium in the print direction, the first roller and the second roller are actuated, thereby rotating the first roller and the second roller. Rotation of the first roller and the second roller facilitates traversal of the print media in the print direction. To stop the print media traversal, the first roller is stopped at a first time and the second roller is stopped at a second time. In some examples, the second time is later in time than the first time. Thus, the second roller may continue to rotate after the first roller has stopped rotating. In such implementations, the second roller continues to pull the print media, which results in stretching and flattening of the print media. After the second roller stops rotating, the print head engine may print the content on the print medium.

Fig. 3B illustrates another exploded view 300B of a portion of a printing device 100 according to one or more embodiments described herein. The exploded view 300B shows the printhead engine 122 with the top chassis portion 126 of the printhead engine 122 removed. Accordingly, exploded view 300B illustrates printhead 302, first roller assembly 314, and second roller assembly 316 according to one or more embodiments described herein.

In some examples, printhead 302 may have one or more sides 308a, 308b, 308c, and 308d. Sides 308a and 308c may be defined as opposing each other along longitudinal axis 210 of printhead engine 122. Similarly, side 308b and side 308d may be defined as opposing each other along lateral axis 212 of printhead engine 122.

In an exemplary embodiment, side 308b and side 308d may be configured to receive second roller assembly 316 and first roller assembly 314, respectively. In an exemplary embodiment, the structure of the second roller assembly 316 is the same as the structure of the second roller assembly 316. For simplicity, the structure of the second roller assembly 316 is described herein. In an exemplary embodiment, when the top chassis portion 126 is received on top of the printhead 302, the first roller assembly 314, and the second roller assembly 316, the first roller assembly 314 and the second roller assembly 316 are configured to be received within the top chassis portion 126. More specifically, first roller assembly 314 and second roller assembly 316 may be received within first wing portion 216 and second wing portion 220.

In an exemplary embodiment, the second roller assembly 316 may include a frame 318 that may extend along the longitudinal axis 210 of the printhead engine 122. In some examples, frame 318 may extend along longitudinal axis 210 of printhead engine 122 between sides 308 a-308 c. In an exemplary embodiment, the frame 318 may have a cube shape with a top end portion 320, a bottom end portion 323, one or more sides 324a, 324b, 324c, and 324d. In an exemplary embodiment, the top end portion 320 of the frame 318 is positioned adjacent to the top end portion 206 of the top chassis portion 126. In addition, a bottom end portion 323 of the frame 318 is positioned adjacent to the bottom end portion 208 of the top chassis portion 126. Thus, the top end portion 320 of the frame 318 is spaced apart from the bottom end portion 323 of the frame 318 along the vertical axis 128 of the printhead engine 122.

In some examples, side 324a of frame 318 and side 324c of frame 318 may be spaced apart from one another along longitudinal axis 210 of printhead engine 122. Further, side 324b and side 324d may be spaced apart from one another along lateral axis 212 of printhead engine 122. In an exemplary embodiment, side 324d may be coupled to side 308b of printhead engine 122. In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to side 324d being coupled to side 308b of top chassis portion 126. In an exemplary embodiment, frame 318 may not be coupled to printhead engine 122. In such embodiments, the frame 318 may be coupled to the back spine segment 114 of the printing device 100.

In an exemplary embodiment, the surface 326 of the side 324d of the frame 318 may define one or more grooves 328a, 328b, and 328c. In some examples, each of the one or more grooves 328a, 328b, and 328c may extend inwardly from the surface 326 of the side 324d toward the side 324b along the lateral axis 212 of the printhead engine 122. Additionally or alternatively, each of the one or more grooves 328a, 328b, and 328c may extend between the top end portion 320 of the frame 318 and the bottom end portion 323 of the frame 318. Further, each of the one or more grooves 328a, 328b, and 328c may be spaced apart from one another along the longitudinal axis 210 of the printhead engine 122. In some examples, each of the one or more grooves 328a, 328b, and 328c may be configured to receive the second roller 134. The structure of the roller, and in particular the structure of the second roller 134, is further described in connection with fig. 4A, 4B and 5.

Fig. 4A and 4B illustrate side views 400A and 400B, respectively, of second roller 134 according to one or more embodiments described herein.

The second roller 134 includes a housing 402, a telescoping arm 404, and a first wheel 406. The housing 402 includes a first end 408 and a second end 410. When the second roller 134 is received within a groove (e.g., groove 328 a) of the one or more grooves 328a, 328b, and 328c, the first end 408 of the housing is spaced apart from the second end 410 of the housing 402 along the vertical axis 128 of the printing device 100. The second end 410 of the housing 402 is configured to movably receive the telescoping arm 404 such that, in one embodiment, a portion 412 of the telescoping arm 404 may extend from the second end 410 of the housing 402 (hereinafter referred to as an extended state). In another embodiment, portion 412 of telescoping arm 404 may retract within housing 402 (hereinafter referred to as the retracted state).

In an exemplary embodiment, the telescoping arm 404 may include an end portion 414 that may be positioned outside the housing 402 regardless of the configuration state (e.g., an extended state or a retracted state) of the telescoping arm 404. The end portion 414 of the telescoping arm 404 may be configured to receive the first wheel 406. Further description of the second roller 134 is described in connection with fig. 5.

Fig. 5 illustrates a cross-sectional view 500 of the second roller 134 according to one or more embodiments described herein. The cross-sectional view 500 depicts the second roller 134 including a first biasing member 502 and a third actuation unit 504.

In an exemplary embodiment, the housing 402 may be configured to receive a third actuation unit 504 that is communicatively coupled to the telescoping arm 404. In an exemplary embodiment, the third actuation unit 504 may exert an external force on the telescoping arm 404, thereby placing the telescoping arm 404 in an extended state and/or a retracted state. Some examples of the third actuation unit 504 may include, but are not limited to, an electromagnet, a stepper motor, and the like. For the purposes of the ongoing description, the third actuation unit 504 is considered an electromagnet. To this end, the external force applied by the third actuation unit 504 may correspond to an attractive force and/or a repulsive force.

In addition, the housing 402 is configured to receive a first biasing member 502. In some examples, the first biasing member 502 may be coupled to the telescoping arm 404 and to an inner surface 506 of the housing 402 at a first end 408 of the housing 402. When the third actuation unit 504 is not activated, the first biasing member 502 may exert a biasing force on the telescoping arm 404 to place the telescoping arm 404 in an extended state. In such embodiments, when third actuation unit 504 is activated, third actuation unit 504 may exert an external force on telescoping arm 404, thereby retracting portion 412 of telescoping arm 404 within housing 402 (i.e., telescoping arm 404 is in a retracted state).

In some examples, when the third actuation unit 504 is deactivated, the first biasing member 502 may exert a biasing force on the telescoping arm 404 to place the telescoping arm 404 in a retracted state. In such embodiments, when the third actuation unit 504 is activated, the third actuation unit 504 may exert an external force on the telescoping arm 404, thereby extending a portion 412 of the telescoping arm 404 from the housing 402 (i.e., the telescoping arm 404 is in an extended state).

Additionally or alternatively, the third actuation unit 504 may be communicatively coupled to the first wheel 406, which may rotate the first wheel 406. In another exemplary embodiment, the first wheel 406 may be a free roller. In such embodiments, the third actuation unit 504 may not rotate the first wheel 406. The first wheel 406 may rotate based on interaction with another component of the printing apparatus 100. For example, the first wheel 406 may rotate during traversal of the print medium based on interaction with the print medium 104.

In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the third actuation unit 504 actuating the first wheel 406 (rotating the first wheel 406). The first wheel 406 may be coupled to the second actuation unit 136, wherein the second actuation unit 136 may rotate the first wheel 406. In yet another embodiment, the first wheel 406 may be coupled to the first actuation unit 119, wherein the second actuation unit 136 may rotate the first wheel 406.

Referring back to fig. 4A and 4B, because the first wheel 406 is coupled to the telescoping arm 404 and because the third actuation unit 504 may place the telescoping arm 404 in a particular configuration state, such as in a retracted state or in an extended state, the third actuation unit 504 may traverse the first wheel 406 between the first position and the second position based on the configuration state of the telescoping arm 404. For example, when the telescoping arm is in the retracted state, the first wheel 406 is in the first position. Further, in the first position, the first wheel 406 is positioned adjacent the second end 410 of the housing 402 compared to the scenario when the first wheel 406 is positioned in the second position. Further, when the telescoping arm 404 is in the extended state, the first wheel 406 is in the second position. In addition, in the second position, the first wheel 406 is positioned away from the second end 410 of the housing 402 compared to the scenario when the first wheel 406 is positioned in the first position. Fig. 4A depicts the first wheel 406 in a first position, and fig. 4B depicts the first wheel 406 in a second position.

In operation and as shown with respect to fig. 5, when the third actuation unit 504 is activated (e.g., an electromagnet is activated), the third actuation unit 504 may generate an attractive force that pulls the telescoping arm 404, thereby bringing the telescoping arm 404 into a retracted state. Thus, the first wheel 406 is in the first position. When the third actuation unit 504 is deactivated, a biasing force from the first biasing member 502 acts on the telescoping arm 404, which causes a portion of the telescoping arm 404 to extend from the housing 402. Thus, the first wheel 406 is in the second position.

In an alternative embodiment, when third actuation unit 504 is activated (e.g., an electromagnet is activated), third actuation unit 504 may generate a repulsive force that causes telescoping arm 404 to be in an extended state. Thus, the first wheel 406 is in the second position. When the third actuation unit 504 is deactivated, a biasing force from the first biasing member 502 acts on the telescoping arm 404, which retracts a portion of the telescoping arm 404. Thus, the first wheel 406 is in the first position.

In some examples, the second roller 134 may be devoid of the first biasing member 502. In such implementations, the third actuation unit 504 may traverse the first wheel 406 between the first position and the second position. For example, the third actuation unit 504 may generate a repulsive force to traverse the first wheel 406 to the second position. Further, the third actuation unit 504 may generate an attractive force to traverse the first wheel 406 to the first position.

Referring back to fig. 3B, the structure of the first roller assembly 314 is similar to the structure of the second roller assembly 316. For example, similar to the second roller assembly 316, the first roller assembly 314 includes a frame 318 that may define one or more grooves 328d, 328e, and 328 f. Each of the one or more grooves 328d, 328e, and 328f (defined in the first roller assembly 314) is configured to receive the first roller 132. In some examples, the structure of the first roller 132 is similar to the structure of the second roller 134.

In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to first roller assembly 314 and second roller assembly 316 including three first rollers 132 and three second rollers 134. In an exemplary embodiment, the count of the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 may vary based on one or more implementations of the printing device 100. For example, in the printing apparatus 100 supporting a printing medium having a narrower width than the printing medium 104, the count of the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 may be reduced. Similarly, in the printing apparatus 100 supporting a printing medium having a wider width than the printing medium 104, the count of the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 may be increased.

In an exemplary embodiment, in the second position, the first roller 132 (in the first roller assembly 314) and the second roller 134 (in the second roller assembly 316) may abut the platform 322. Thus, when the platform 322 receives the print medium 104, the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 may abut the print medium 104. On the other hand, in the first position, the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 may be positioned away from the print medium 104.

In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 abutting the platform 322. Referring to fig. 3C, as discussed above, the bottom chassis portion 128 includes a first axis 248 and a second axis 250. In some examples, the first shaft 248 and the second shaft 250 may correspond to idle rollers. The first shaft 248 may be positioned upstream of the printhead engine 122 in the print direction and the second shaft 250 may be positioned downstream of the printhead engine 122 in the print direction. Further, in such embodiments, the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 may abut the first shaft 248 and the second shaft 250, respectively (when the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 are in the second position).

In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the first wheel 406 in the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 traversing between the first position and the second position. In an exemplary embodiment, an operator of the printing device 100 may manually facilitate traversal of the complete first and second rollers 132, 134 between the third and fourth positions. The structure of such a roller assembly that may facilitate traversal of the complete first roller 132 and second roller 134 is further described in connection with fig. 6.

Fig. 6 illustrates another perspective view 600 of a portion of a printing device 100 according to one or more embodiments described herein. Referring to perspective view 600, printing apparatus 100 includes printhead engine 122, third roller assembly 602, fourth roller assembly 604, and front plate 606.

In an exemplary embodiment, the front plate 606 may be positioned adjacent to a side 308a of the top chassis portion 126 such that the front plate 606 completely covers the printhead engine 122 when the printhead engine 122 is viewed along the longitudinal axis 210 of the printhead engine 122. The front plate 606 has an outer surface 608 and an inner surface 610. In some examples, an inner surface 610 of front plate 606 faces side 308a of top chassis portion 126 of printhead engine 122.

In an exemplary embodiment, the inner surface 610 of the front plate 606 may define a first through hole (not shown) and a second through hole (not shown) that may extend from the inner surface 610 of the front plate 606 to the outer surface 608 of the front plate 606. In an exemplary embodiment, a first through-hole (not shown) may be defined downstream of the printhead engine 122 in the printing direction, and a second through-hole (not shown) may be defined upstream of the printhead engine 122 in the printing direction. In an exemplary embodiment, first and second through holes (not shown) may facilitate coupling third and fourth roller assemblies 602, 604 with front plate 606 and aft spine segment 114, respectively. Additionally, a third roller assembly 602 and a fourth roller assembly 604 may be movably coupled with the aft spine segment 114 as further described in connection with fig. 8. In addition, the structure of the third roller assembly 602 and the fourth roller assembly 604 is further described in conjunction with fig. 9A to 9B, 10A, and 10B.

Referring back to the front plate 606, additionally or alternatively, the front plate 606 may be configured to receive a first cam roller 612 and a second cam roller 614 at an outer surface 608 of the front plate 606. The first cam roller 612 may be coupled with the third roller assembly 602 and the second cam roller 614 may be coupled with the fourth roller assembly 604. In some examples, as further described in connection with fig. 10A and 10B, the first and second cam rollers 612, 614 may be configured to allow an operator of the printing device 100 to traverse the third and fourth roller assemblies 602, 604, respectively.

Fig. 7 illustrates a relative view 700 of fig. 1 in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein. The opposite view 700 of the printing apparatus 100 depicts the back ridge section 114 of the printing apparatus 100. The back ridge section 114 of the printing apparatus 100 has a first surface 115 and a second surface 702. The second surface 702 of the aft spine section 114 may define a third through hole (not shown) and a fourth through hole (not shown) extending from the second surface 702 of the aft spine section 114 to the first surface 115 of the aft spine section 114. A third through-hole (not shown) is defined downstream of the print head engine 122 in the printing direction, and a fourth through-hole (not shown) is defined upstream of the print head engine 122 in the printing direction. In an exemplary embodiment, third and fourth through-holes (not shown) may facilitate coupling third and fourth roller assemblies 602, 604, respectively, with aft spine segment 114. In addition, the printing device 100 includes a first pulley 706 and a second pulley 708 coupled to the third roller assembly 602 and the fourth roller assembly 604, respectively. In an exemplary embodiment, the first pulley 706 and the second pulley 708 may be received on the second surface 702 of the aft spine segment 114.

In some examples, each of the first pulley 706 and the second pulley 708 is coupled to the first actuation unit 119. For example, the first pulley 706 and the second pulley 708 are coupled to the first actuation unit 119 by a belt 710. In some examples, the first actuation unit 119 can facilitate automatic traversal of the third roller assembly 602 and the fourth roller assembly 604. In some examples, an operator of the printing device 100 manually traverses the third roller assembly 602 and the fourth roller assembly 604, as further described in connection with fig. 10A and 10B.

Fig. 8 illustrates a perspective view 800 of a third roller assembly 602 according to one or more embodiments described herein. In some examples, the third roller assembly 602 includes a first shaft 802 and at least one second roller 134.

In an exemplary embodiment, when the third roller assembly 602 is movably coupled to the front plate 606 and the rear spine segment 114, the first shaft 802 may correspond to a rod that may extend along the longitudinal axis 210 of the printhead engine 122. More specifically, first shaft 802 may include a first end 803 and a second end 805 configured to be coupled to front plate 606 and aft spine segment 114, respectively. The first shaft 802 may have a U-shaped cross-section. However, in some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the first shaft 802 having a U-shaped cross-section. In embodiments, the shaft may have a circular cross-section. In another embodiment, the first shaft 802 may have a rectangular cross-section. In yet another embodiment, the first shaft 802 may have a cross-section of any other geometric shape without departing from the scope of the present disclosure. In an exemplary embodiment, the first shaft 802 may be configured to be fixedly coupled to the at least one second roller 134 such that the at least one second roller 134 may extend from the first shaft 802 along the vertical axis 128 of the printing device 100 (when the first roller assembly 314 is coupled to the front plate 606 and the rear spine segment 114). For example, the first shaft 802 is configured to receive three second rollers 134. To this end, the three second rollers 134 are spaced apart from one another along the longitudinal axis 210 of the print head engine 122 by a predetermined distance. In some examples, the spacing member 804 may facilitate maintaining a predetermined distance between the three second rollers 134. The structure of the second roller 134 is further described in conjunction with fig. 10A and 10B. In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to having three second rollers 134 in the third roller assembly 602. The third roller assembly 602 may have any number of second rollers 134 without departing from the scope of the present disclosure. For example, the number of second rollers 134 in the third roller assembly 602 may vary based on the width of the print medium 104 installed in the printing apparatus 100.

In an exemplary embodiment, the first shaft 802 facilitates rotation of the at least one second roller 134 about the first shaft 802. For example, the first shaft 802 may enable the at least one second roller 134 to rotate about the first shaft 802 between the third position and the fourth position. The rotation of the at least one second roller 134 between the third position and the fourth position is further described in connection with fig. 10A and 10B.

Fig. 9A and 9B illustrate side view 900A and cross-sectional view 900B of second roller 134 according to one or more embodiments described herein.

The second roller 134 may include a housing 902, a second shaft 904, and a second wheel 906. In an exemplary embodiment, the housing 902 can have an outer surface 908 that can define a first end portion 910 and a second end portion 912. The first end portion 910 of the housing 902 may be spaced apart from the second end portion 912 of the housing 902 along the vertical axis 128 of the printing device 100. In an exemplary embodiment, the housing 902 may have an elliptical shape. However, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the housing 902 having an oval shape. In exemplary embodiments, the housing 902 may have any other geometry without departing from the scope of the present disclosure. For example, the housing 902 may have a cube shape. In some examples, housing 902 may have one or more sides 903a, 903b, 903c, and 903d. Side 903a may be spaced apart from side 903c along longitudinal axis 210 of printhead engine 122. Further, side 903a may be parallel to side 903 c. Similarly, side 903b may be spaced apart from side 903d along the lateral axis 212 of the printhead engine 122. In addition, side 903b may be parallel to side 903d.

In an exemplary embodiment, the outer surface 908 of the housing 902 may define a first shaft throughbore 914 that may extend from the side 903a to the side 903 c. In some examples, the outer surface 908 may define a first shaft throughbore 914 adjacent the first end portion 910 of the housing 902 and distal the second end portion 912 of the housing 902. Further, the first shaft throughbore 914 may be configured to receive the first shaft 802. Additionally or alternatively, the outer surface 908 of the housing 902 may be configured to define a second shaft through bore 916 that may extend from the side 903a to the side 903 c. Additionally or alternatively, the outer surface 908 may define a second shaft through hole 916 in a manner such that the second shaft through hole 916 may extend along the vertical axis 128 of the printing device 100. The second shaft through hole 916 may be configured to receive the second shaft 904. Since the second shaft through hole 916 extends along the vertical axis 128 of the printing apparatus 100, the second shaft 904 is movable within the second shaft through hole 916 along the vertical axis 128 of the printing apparatus 100. Additionally or alternatively, the second shaft 904 may be rotatable within the second shaft through bore 916.

In an exemplary embodiment, the housing 902 of the second roller 134 is further configured to receive the second wheel 906 at the second end portion 912. More specifically, referring to fig. 9B, the second shaft 904 is configured to receive the second wheel 906 such that the second wheel 906 is rotatable about the second shaft 904. Since the second shaft 904 is movable along the vertical axis 128 of the printing apparatus 100 (within the second shaft through hole 916), the second wheel 906 is also movable along the vertical axis 128 of the printing apparatus 100. Thus, the second wheel 906 is capable of both rotating about the second shaft 904 and traversing within the second shaft through bore 916 along the vertical axis 128 of the printing apparatus 100. In an exemplary embodiment, the second shaft 904 is additionally coupled to a retainer 918. In an exemplary embodiment, the retainer 918 includes a first end 920 and a second end 922. The first end 920 of the retainer 918 is spaced apart from the second end 922 of the retainer along the vertical axis 128 of the printing device 100. In an exemplary embodiment, the first end 920 of the retainer 918 abuts the second shaft 904.

In an exemplary embodiment, at the second end 922, the retainer 918 defines a protrusion 924 that may extend from the second end 922 of the retainer 918 along the vertical axis 128 of the printing device 100. The protrusion 924 may be configured to receive a second biasing member 926, such as a spring and/or leaf spring. The second biasing member 926 may additionally be coupled to the first shaft 802 when the first shaft 802 is received within the first shaft throughbore 914. In an exemplary embodiment, the second biasing member 926 may be configured to exert a biasing force on the holder 918 along the vertical axis 128 of the printing device 100. More specifically, the biasing force may urge the retainer 918 toward the second end portion 912 of the housing 902, which moves the second shaft 904 toward the second end portion 912 of the housing 902. Thus, movement of the second shaft 904 toward the second end portion 912 of the housing 902 causes a portion of the second wheel 906 to extend from the second end portion 912 of the housing 902.

Referring back to fig. 6, the structure of the fourth roller assembly 604 may be similar to the structure of the third roller assembly 602. For example, the third roller assembly 602 may include a first shaft 802 that may receive at least one first roller 132. In an exemplary embodiment, the structure of at least one first roller 132 is similar to the structure of the second roller 134.

Fig. 10A and 10B are cross-sectional views 1000A and 1000B of a printing device 100 according to one or more embodiments described herein, illustrating traversal of a third roller assembly 602 and a fourth roller assembly 604, respectively.

As depicted in cross-sectional view 1000A, first roller 132 and one or more second rollers 134 abut platform 322 of bottom chassis portion 128. In an exemplary embodiment, where the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 abut the platform 322, the position of the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 is referred to as a third position. In an exemplary embodiment, the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 may be proximate to the platform 322 because the second biasing member 926 may exert a biasing force on the second wheel 906. To this end, the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 may abut the print medium 104 when the platform 322 receives the print medium 104. In some examples, in the third position, the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 may facilitate leveling the print medium 104 (positioned between the third roller assembly 602 and the fourth roller assembly 604) of the first portion of the print medium 104. Because the print head engine 122 is positioned between the third roller assembly 602 (including the at least one second roller 134) and the fourth roller assembly 604 (including the at least one first roller 132), the first portion of the print medium 104 positioned within the print head engine 122 is planar. More specifically, the first portion of the print medium 104 on the platform 322 is planar.

In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 abutting the platform 322. In an exemplary embodiment, as discussed in fig. 3A, the width of the platform 322 may be the same as the width of the top chassis portion 126. In such embodiments, the platform 322 may not extend beyond the perimeter of the top chassis portion 126. To this end, the printing device 100 can include a first shaft 248 and a second shaft 250. The first shaft 248 may be positioned upstream of the printhead engine 122 in the print direction and the second shaft 250 may be positioned downstream of the printhead engine 122 in the print direction. Further, in such embodiments, the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 may abut the first shaft 248 and the second shaft 250, respectively (when the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 are in the third position).

In an exemplary embodiment, as discussed in fig. 7, 8, 9A, and 9B, the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 are rotatable about a first axis 802. Referring to fig. 10B, an operator of the printing device 100 can rotate the first cam roller 612 and the second cam roller 614 to rotate the first shaft 802, which in turn rotates the first roller 132 and the second roller 134. Such rotation traverses the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 to a fourth position. In some examples, in the fourth position, the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 may be directed toward a top end portion 206 of the top chassis portion 126 (of the print head engine 122). Thus, in the fourth position, the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 are spaced apart from the print medium 104 (depicted by 1002). Such orientation of the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 allows an operator to adjust the print medium 104 relative to the print head engine 122. For example, the print medium 104 may be adjusted to clear a blocked condition. In an exemplary embodiment, the blocked condition may correspond to a condition in which the print medium 104 cannot traverse in the printing direction or in the retraction direction due to some obstruction in the print path.

In some examples, third roller assembly 602 and fourth roller assembly 604 may be coupled to printhead engine 122 by coupling shaft 1004. For example, the print head engine 122 may be coupled to a first roller 132 and a second roller 134. Thus, as the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 rotate (as the operator of the printing device 100 rotates the first cam roller 612 and the second cam roller 614), the coupling shaft 1004 may traverse the top chassis portion 126 of the printhead engine 122 on the first linear guide 120A and the second linear guide 120B. For example, as the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 rotate about the first axis 802 to the fourth position, the top chassis portion 126 may traverse to the fifth position. In an exemplary embodiment, in the fifth position, the top chassis portion 126 is spaced apart from the bottom chassis portion 128, creating a space 1006 between the top chassis portion 126 and the bottom chassis portion 128. In some examples, the top chassis portion 126 may traverse to the sixth position when the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 rotate about the first axis 802 to the third position. In an exemplary embodiment, in the sixth position, the top chassis portion 126 may be removably coupled with the bottom chassis portion 128.

In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to manually rotating first roller 612 and second roller 614 by rotating first cam roller 132 and second cam roller 134. In an exemplary embodiment, the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 may be rotated based on actuation of the first actuating unit 119. As discussed in fig. 7, the third roller assembly 602 and the fourth roller assembly 604 are coupled to the first actuation unit 119 by a belt 710. Thus, the first actuating unit 119 may rotate the third roller assembly 602 and the fourth roller assembly 604.

In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to first roller 132 and second roller 134 being part of third roller assembly 602 and fourth roller assembly 604. In an exemplary embodiment, the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 may be separate from the third roller assembly 602 and the fourth roller assembly 604. In such embodiments, the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 may be coupled to the back ridge section 114 of the printing device 100, as shown in fig. 1. In addition, the printing device 100 may include a third roller assembly 602 and a fourth roller assembly 604, as described above in fig. 6. To this end, the third roller assembly 602 and the fourth roller assembly 604 may include a fifth roller and a sixth roller, respectively. The fifth roller and the sixth roller may have a structure similar to the second roller 134 as described in fig. 7, 8, and 9A and 9B.

In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to using a roller assembly to planarize print medium 104. In an exemplary embodiment, the printing apparatus 100 may include one or more media guidance components that may be configured to planarize the print medium 104, as further shown in fig. 11.

Fig. 11 illustrates a cross-sectional view 1100 of a printing device 100 according to one or more embodiments described herein. Printing apparatus 100 includes a media guidance assembly 1102 positioned upstream of printhead engine 122. Further, the printing device 100 includes a second roller assembly 316 positioned downstream of the print head engine 122. In an exemplary embodiment, the media guidance assembly 1102 further includes an arm section 1104 and a slot section 1106.

In an exemplary embodiment, the arm section 1104 is fixedly coupled to the spine section 114 of the printing device 100. Further, arm section 1104 extends along lateral axis 212 of printhead engine 122. Further, the arm section 1104 has a first end 1107 and a second end 1108. The first end 1107 of the arm section 1104 is defined adjacent the printhead engine 122 and the second end 1108 is defined remote from the printhead engine 122. In addition, arm section 1104 includes a top surface 1110 and a bottom surface 1112. The top surface 1110 is defined away from the bottom chassis portion 128 of the printhead engine 122, while the bottom surface 1112 is defined adjacent to the bottom chassis portion 128.

In an exemplary embodiment, the bottom surface 1112 is configured to define the channel section 1106 such that the channel section 1106 protrudes from the bottom surface 1112 toward the bottom chassis portion 128 of the printhead engine 122. In some examples, the distance between the bottom chassis portion 128 and the channel section 1106 is in the range of 0.4mm to 0.6 mm. Further, as the print medium 104 is received on the bottom chassis portion 128, the print medium 104 is flattened by the channel section 1106 and the second roller assembly 316. To this end, print medium 104 is flattened between second roller assembly 316 and medium guide assembly 1102.

In some examples, the groove section 1106 may include a chamfer section 1114 and a valley section 1116. The ramp section 1114 may face the second end 1108 of the arm section 1104 and may have a predetermined slope. Further, the valley section 1116 may face the first end 1107 of the arm section 1104. In some examples, the slope of the ramp section 1114 may facilitate smooth traversal of the print medium 104 along the print path. Thus, the ramp section 1114 may reduce the likelihood of media blockage. In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to trench section 1106 having the aforementioned shape. In exemplary embodiments, the trench section 1106 may have any other shape without departing from the scope of this disclosure.

In some examples, the distance between the channel section 1106 and the bottom chassis portion 128 may be adjustable. In such embodiments, the channel section 1106 may be coupled to the arm section 1104 by a coupling device (such as a screw). An operator of the printing device 100 can rotate the screw clockwise and/or counter-clockwise to adjust the distance between the channel section 1106 and the bottom chassis portion 128. In such embodiments, the distance between the trench section 1106 and the bottom chassis portion 128 may be adjusted from 0.4mm to 0.6mm depending on media thickness and flatness requirements,

in some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to a particular coupling device or screw. In an exemplary embodiment, the coupling device may further include a push-type mechanism. In such embodiments, an operator of the printing device 100 may adjust the distance between the channel section 1106 and the bottom chassis portion 128 by pressing a plunger coupled to the channel section 1106.

In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to having one media guidance assembly 1102 in printing device 100 to level print medium 104. In an exemplary embodiment, printing apparatus 100 may include another media guidance assembly positioned downstream of printhead engine 122. Further, in such embodiments, the printing device 100 may be devoid of the second roller assembly 316.

In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to printing device 100 including media guidance assembly 1102. In an exemplary embodiment, the top chassis portion 126 of the printhead engine 122 can define a channel section 1106 in the top chassis portion 126 of the printhead engine 122. More specifically, the printhead engine 122 may define a channel section at a bottom surface of the top chassis portion 126 (adjacent to the bottom chassis portion 128 of the printhead engine 122).

In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to printhead engine 122 including a first roller 132 and one or more second rollers 134. Additionally or alternatively, the printing device 100 may include a frame to planarize the print medium 104, as described in connection with fig. 12-19.

The example apparatus, systems, and methods described herein include a printing apparatus capable of leveling or substantially leveling print media prior to a printing operation. In some examples and in embodiments configured to planarize a print medium, a printing apparatus includes a platform capable of receiving a print medium for a printing operation. In some examples, the printing device may include a vacuum generating unit configured to generate a negative pressure on the platen so as to adhere or otherwise detachably attach the print medium to the platen. In some examples, the edge of the print medium may curl during application of negative pressure on the platen. To decurl the edge of the print medium, the printing apparatus further includes a frame that may be configured to press against the edge of the print medium. To this end, in some examples, a combination of the vacuum generating unit and the frame facilitates leveling the print medium.

Fig. 12 shows an exploded view of a printhead engine 122 according to one or more embodiments described herein.

In an exemplary embodiment, the top chassis portion 126 may be configured to receive a printhead (not shown). In some examples, the top chassis portion 126 may define one or more features that allow the top chassis portion 126 to receive a printhead, such as a cavity (not shown), a substrate (not shown), one or more first biasing members (not shown), and so forth. Additionally or alternatively, the bottom end portion 208 of the top chassis portion 126 may be configured to receive the frame 1216. For example, the frame 1216 may be coupled to the bottom end portion 208 of the top chassis portion 126, as further described in fig. 14. In alternative embodiments, the frame 1216 may be movably positioned adjacent to the bottom end portion 208 of the top chassis portion 126. The structure of the frame 1216 is further described in connection with fig. 13 and 15.

In an exemplary embodiment, the top chassis portion 126 may be configured to couple with the bottom chassis portion 128 via a latch 130. When the top chassis portion 126 is coupled with the bottom chassis portion 128, the frame 1216 may be movably positioned between the top chassis portion 126 and the bottom chassis portion 128. For example, the frame 1216 may traverse between a first position and a second position within a space between the bottom end portion 208 of the top chassis portion 126 and the top end portion 226 of the bottom chassis portion 128.

In the exemplary embodiment, bottom chassis portion 128 has an outer surface 224, a top surface 1218, and a bottom surface 1220. In some examples, the outer surface 224 and the top surface 1218 define a top end portion 226 of the bottom chassis portion 128. Further, in some examples, the outer surface 224 and the bottom surface 1220 define a bottom end portion 228 of the bottom chassis portion 128. In some examples, the top surface 1218 of the bottom chassis portion 128 defines a platform 1222 that may correspond to an area on which the print medium 104 is received for a printing operation. In addition, the platform 1222 extends along the length (defined along the longitudinal axis 210 of the printhead engine 122) and width (defined along the lateral axis 212 of the printhead engine 122) of the bottom chassis portion 128.

In an exemplary embodiment, top surface 1218 of bottom chassis portion 128 further divides platform 1222 into a print area 1224 and a perimeter area 1226. The size of print area 1224 may be defined to be proportional to the maximum size of print medium 104 supported by printing device 100. In an exemplary embodiment, the peripheral region 1226 may be defined adjacent to the first circular recess 236, the second circular recess 238, the third circular recess 240, and the fourth circular recess 242. In some examples, peripheral area 1226 surrounds print area 1224.

In an exemplary embodiment, the top surface 1218 of the bottom chassis portion 128 defines a plurality of apertures 1228a, 1228b, …, 1228n extending from the top surface 1218 of the bottom chassis portion 128 to the bottom surface 1220 of the bottom chassis portion 128. At the bottom surface 1220, the bottom chassis portion 128 is configured to receive a vacuum generating unit, as further shown in fig. 16.

In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the platform 1222 being fixedly defined by the top surface 1218 of the bottom chassis portion 128. In some examples, the platform 1222 may be a modular component that may be removably coupled to the bottom chassis portion 128 without departing from the scope of this disclosure. The structure of the bottom chassis portion 128 that allows coupling with the modular platform is further described in connection with fig. 17. The structure of the modular platform is described in connection with fig. 18.

Fig. 13 illustrates a perspective view of a frame 1216 in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein. The frame 1216 includes a media planar portion 1302 and first support members 1304a, 1304b, 1304c, and 1304d.

In an exemplary embodiment, media planar portion 1302 may have a rectangular shape with one or more sides 1308a, 1308b, 1308c, and 1308d. Side 1308a may be spaced apart from side 1308c along longitudinal axis 210 of printhead engine 122. Further, side 1308a may be parallel to side 1308 c. Similarly, side 1308b may be spaced apart from side 1308d along a lateral axis 212 of printhead engine 122. Further, side 1308b may be parallel to side 1308d. In addition, media planarizing portion 1302 can have a top surface 1328 and a bottom surface 1330. In an exemplary embodiment, the top surface 1328 of the media planar portion 1302 may define a top end portion 1324 of the media planar portion 1302. In addition, bottom surface 1330 of media planar portion 1302 may define a bottom end portion 1326 of media planar portion 1302.

In some examples, the bottom surface 1330 of the media planar portion 1302 may define a void 1310 extending from the bottom surface 1330 to the top surface 1328 of the media planar portion 1302. In an exemplary embodiment, the shape of void 1310 is defined by inner edge 1312 of media planar portion 1302. In some examples, void 1310 may have a rectangular shape. In such a scenario, the shape of media planar portion 1302 may correspond to concentric rectangles. Further, to this end, one or more dimensions of media planar portion 1302 may include an outer length (depicted by 1314), an outer width (depicted by 1316), an inner length (depicted by 1318), and an inner width (depicted by 1320). In some examples, an outer length (depicted by 1314) and an inner length (depicted by 1318) of media flattening portion 1302 are defined along longitudinal axis 210 of printhead engine 122. Further, in some examples, an outer width (depicted by 1316) and an inner width (depicted by 1320) of media planar portion 1302 are defined along transverse axis 212 of printhead engine 122.

In some examples, media leveling portion 1302 may be configured to couple to first support members 1304a, 1304b, 1304c, and 1304d. In an exemplary embodiment, media leveling portion 1302 is configured to be movably coupled to top chassis portion 126 by first support members 1304a, 1304b, 1304c, and 1304d. In some examples, the dimensions of the inner length (depicted by 1318) and inner width (depicted by 1320) of the media planar portion 1302 may be equal to the dimensions of the printhead. To this end, the printhead is visible through the gap 1310 when the frame 1216 is received at the bottom end portion 208 of the top chassis portion 126. The coupling of the frame 1216 to the top chassis portion 126 is further described in fig. 14.

Fig. 14 illustrates a cross-sectional view of a top chassis portion 126 according to one or more embodiments described herein. As shown in fig. 14, the bottom end portion 208 defines a first channel 1420, a second channel 1422, a third channel (not shown), and a fourth channel (not shown) extending from the bottom end portion 208 of the top chassis portion 126 toward the top end portion 206 of the top chassis portion 126. The first channel 1420 and the second channel 1422 may be configured to receive at least one biasing member 1402. Similarly, although not shown in fig. 14, the third and fourth channels may also receive the biasing member 1402. Additionally, as shown, each of the first channel 1420 and the second channel 1422 may be configured to receive the first support members 1304a and 1304b, respectively. Similarly, (although not shown in fig. 14) the third and fourth channels may receive the first support members 1304c and 1304d, respectively.

In some examples, the plurality of first support members 1304a, 1304b, 1304c, and 1304d can be coupled to at least one biasing member 1402 in each of the first channel 1420, the second channel 1422, the third channel, and the fourth channel, respectively. For example, a first end 1406 of the first support member 1304a is coupled to at least one biasing member 1402. In an exemplary embodiment, when no external force is applied to the plurality of first support members 1304a, 1304b, 1304c, and 1304d, the at least one biasing member 1402 applies a biasing force (depicted by 1410) on each of the plurality of first support members 1304a, 1304b, 1304c, and 1304d to pull the first end 1406 of each of the plurality of first support members 1304a, 1304b, 1304c, and 1304d toward the top end portion 206 of the top chassis portion 126. In an alternative embodiment, when no external force is applied to the plurality of first support members 1304a, 1304b, 1304c, and 1304d, the at least one biasing member 1402 applies a biasing force (depicted by 1410) on each of the plurality of first support members 1304a, 1304b, 1304c, and 1304d to urge the first end 1406 of the plurality of first support members 1304a, 1304b, 1304c, and 1304d toward the bottom chassis portion 128.

As discussed above, the biasing member 1402 exerts a biasing force (depicted by 1410) on the first support members 1304a, 1304b, 1304c, and 1304 d. Thus, a biasing force (depicted by 1410) is exerted on media planar portion 1302, causing media planar portion 1302 to travel toward bottom end portion 208 of top chassis portion 126. In some examples, to traverse the media leveling portion 1302 to a position adjacent to the bottom chassis portion 128, an external force may be applied to the frame 1216. In some examples, fifth actuation unit 1412 may be configured to apply an external force to frame 1216. Some examples of fifth actuation unit 1412 may include a hydraulic system. In such embodiments, the biasing force on the frame 1216 may be applied by a hydraulic system. To this end, each of the first channel 1420, the second channel 1422, the third channel, and the fourth channel may be devoid of at least one biasing member 1402. Further, each of the first, second, third, and fourth passages 1420, 1422, 1414 may be fluidly coupled to a hydraulic pump. In some examples, hydraulic pump 1414 may be configured to pump fluid into/out of each of first channel 1420, second channel 1422, third channel, and fourth channel (via one or more conduits, such as conduit 1416 and conduit 1418) to exert an external force on frame 1216. For example, when fluid is pumped into each of the first channel 1420, the second channel 1422, the third channel, and the fourth channel, the fluid may exert an external force on the frame 1216. As another example, as fluid is pumped from each of the first channel 1420, the second channel 1422, the third channel, and the fourth channel, negative pressure (generated as a result of pumping the fluid) exerts a biasing force (depicted by 1410) on the frame 1216. Further, in such embodiments, the first support members 1304a, 1304b, 1304c, and 1304d may not be coupled to the biasing member 1402 in the first channel 1420, the second channel 1422, the third channel, and the fourth channel. To this end, the first support members 1304a, 1304b, 1304c, and 1304d may be received directly within the first channel 1420, the second channel 1422, the third channel, and the fourth channel, respectively.

In yet another embodiment, fifth actuation unit 1412 may correspond to an electromagnet that may be mounted in bottom chassis portion 128, as further described in connection with fig. 16. In such embodiments, activation of the electromagnet may result in the generation of a magnetic field that may exert a magnetic force on the frame 1216. The magnetic force exerted on the frame 1216 may correspond to an external force that may cause the frame 1216 to traverse.

Fig. 15 illustrates a perspective view 1500 of another implementation of a frame 1216 in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein.

In an exemplary embodiment, the frame 1216 includes a media planar portion 1502, a second support member portion 1504, and a linear block 1506. In some examples, media planar portion 1502 may have a structure similar to media planar portion 1302. For example, the shape of the media planar portion 1502 may correspond to concentric rectangles. In addition, the media planarizing portion 1502 includes one or more sides 1508a, 1508b, 1508c, and 1508d. Side 1508a may be spaced from side 1508c along longitudinal axis 210 of printhead engine 122. Further, side 1508a may be parallel to side 1508 c. Similarly, side 1508b may be spaced from side 1508d along lateral axis 212 of printhead engine 122. Further, side 1508b may be parallel to side 1508d.

In an exemplary embodiment, the media leveling portion 1502 is coupled to the linear block 1506 through the second support member portion 1504. In some examples, a side 1508c of the media planar portion 1502 is coupled to the linear block 1506 through the second support member portion 1504. In some examples, the second support member portion 1504 may correspond to a support member capable of bearing the weight of the media planar portion 1502.

In an exemplary embodiment, the linear block 1506 is further movably coupled to the first linear guide 120A and the second linear guide 120B. Further, the length of the second support member portion 1504 is such that when the linear blocks 1506 are movably coupled to the first and second linear guides 120A, 120B, the void 1510 of the media planar portion 1502 is positioned below the printhead (mounted in the top chassis portion 126) along the vertical axis 128. More specifically, the printhead is visible through the void 1510. For example, in a scenario where the printhead corresponds to a laser printhead, void 1510 may allow laser light from the printhead to pass therethrough.

Further, the linear block 1506 may be coupled to an actuation unit (e.g., hydraulic pump, electromagnet, and rail, as shown in fig. 14-16), which may facilitate traversal of the frame 1216. For example, one or more motors of printing device 100 may be coupled to linear block 1506. Actuation of the one or more motors may traverse the frame 1216.

Fig. 16 illustrates a bottom perspective view 1600 of the bottom chassis portion 128 according to one or more embodiments described herein.

As discussed in fig. 12 and in some examples, at bottom surface 1220, bottom chassis portion 128 is configured to receive a vacuum generating unit. For example, at bottom surface 1220, bottom chassis portion 128 is configured to receive vacuum generating unit 1602. In an exemplary embodiment, the vacuum generating unit 1602 may be configured to generate a negative pressure at the top surface 1218 of the bottom chassis portion 128 through a plurality of apertures 1228a, 1228b, …, 1228 n. In some examples, the negative pressure causes the print medium 104 (received on the platform 1222) to adhere to the platform 1222. Thus, when the vacuum generating unit 1602 is activated, the print medium 104 can lie flat on the platform 1222. Some examples of the vacuum generating unit 1602 may include a fan or a vacuum pump.

In some examples, bottom surface 1220 of bottom chassis portion 128 may be further configured to receive fifth actuation unit 1412. For example, bottom surface 1220 of bottom chassis portion 128 may be configured to receive electromagnet 1604.

Fig. 17 illustrates another perspective view of a portion of the bottom chassis portion 128 according to one or more embodiments described herein.

In an exemplary embodiment, the top surface 1218 of the bottom chassis portion 128 defines a recess 1702 at the top end portion 226 of the bottom chassis portion 128. Further, the recess 1702 extends along the length (defined along the longitudinal axis 210 of the printhead engine 122) and the width (defined along the lateral axis 212 of the printhead engine 122) of the bottom chassis portion 128. In some examples, defining the cavity 1702 results in forming the platform receiving surface 1704. The platform receiving surface 1704 may have a rectangular shape surrounded by wall surfaces 1706a, 1706b and 1706c on three sides. In some examples, wall surfaces 1706a, 1706b, and 1706c may extend along a vertical axis 128 of printhead engine 122 from platform receiving surface 1704 to top end portion 226 of bottom chassis portion 128. In an exemplary embodiment, the wall surfaces 1706a and 1706c may extend along the longitudinal axis 210 of the printhead engine 122 and may be parallel to one another. Further, the wall surface 1706b may extend along the lateral axis 212 of the printhead engine 122 and may be defined adjacent to the rear spine segment 114 of the printing device 100. In an exemplary embodiment, the platform receiving surface 1704 may not be surrounded by a wall surface on the fourth side to define an opening 1708. In some examples, opening 1708 may allow for receiving a modular component 1716, such as a modular platform (further described in fig. 18).

In an exemplary embodiment, each of the wall surfaces 1706a, 1706b and 1706c can define a protruding groove 1710 adjacent the top end portion 226. The protruding groove 1710 may extend along the length of each wall surface 1706a, 1706b, and 1706 c. For example, protruding channels 1710 defined on wall surfaces 1706a and 1706c may extend along longitudinal axis 210 of printhead engine 122. Further, protruding channels 1710 defined on the wall surface 1706b may extend along the lateral axis 212 of the printhead engine 122. In some examples, an area 1712 on each wall surface 1706a and 1706c between the respective protruding groove 1710 and the platform receiving surface 1704 may define a path for slidably receiving a modular component 1716, such as a modular platform (described in connection with fig. 18). Additionally or alternatively, the region 1712 and protruding groove 1710 defined on the wall surface 1706b may lock the modular platform and thus may impede movement of the modular platform. For example, the region 1712 and protruding groove 1710 defined on the wall surface 1706b may impede movement of the modular component along the vertical axis 128 of the printing apparatus 100.

In an exemplary embodiment, a gasket layer 1718 may be disposed on the region 1712 on each wall surface 1706a, 1706b, and 1706 c. In some examples, the spacer layer 1718 may prevent air from passing through the interface between the modular component 1716 (which may be received on the platform receiving surface 1704) and the region 1712.

In an exemplary embodiment, the bottom surface 1220 of the bottom chassis portion 128 defines a cavity 1714 extending from the bottom surface 1220 of the bottom chassis portion 128 to the platform receiving surface 1704. In the scenario where modular component 1716 is received on platform receiving surface 1704, modular component 1716 causes modular component 1716 to cover cavity 1714 from top end portion 226 of bottom chassis portion 128. As discussed above, the vacuum generating unit 1602 is received at the bottom end portion 228 of the bottom chassis portion 128 to generate a negative pressure through the cavity 1714.

Fig. 18 illustrates a perspective view of a modular platform 1800 according to one or more embodiments described herein.

The modular platform 1800 has an outer surface 1802 that can define a top end portion 1804 and a bottom end portion 1806 of the modular platform 1800. In some examples, when the modular platform 1800 is received on the platform receiving surface 1704 (defined on the bottom chassis portion 128), the top end portion 1804 of the modular platform 1800 may be configured to be positioned adjacent to the top end portion 226 of the bottom chassis portion 128. Further, when modular platform 1800 is received on platform receiving surface 1704, bottom end portion 1806 of modular platform 1800 may face cavity 1714. In some examples, the width of modular platform 1800 (along vertical axis 128 of printhead engine 122) may be equal to the width of region 1712 (defined between respective protruding groove 1710 and platform receiving surface 1704).

In an exemplary embodiment, the outer surface 1802 can define a plurality of apertures 1808a, 1808b, …, 1808n that can extend from a bottom end portion 1806 of the modular platform 1800 to a top end portion 1804 of the modular platform 1800. In an exemplary embodiment, the plurality of apertures 1808a, 1808b, …, 1808N may be arranged in a (N x M) matrix, where N corresponds to the count of rows of the plurality of apertures 1808a, 1808b, …, 1808N, and where M corresponds to the count of columns of the plurality of apertures 1808a, 1808b, …, 1808N. In an exemplary embodiment, the rows of the plurality of orifices are defined to extend along a lateral axis 212 of the printhead engine 122. Further, a plurality of columns of orifices are defined to extend along a longitudinal axis 210 of the print head engine 122.

In an exemplary embodiment, the count of the rows of the plurality of apertures 1808a, 1808b, …, 1808n may be proportional to the width of the print medium 104 used in the printing device 100. For example, the count of the rows of the plurality of apertures 1808a, 1808b, …, 1808n may vary based on the width of the print medium 104. In this example, another modular platform with fewer counts of rows of the plurality of apertures 1808a, 1808b, …, 1808n may be mounted on the bottom chassis portion 128 to create better suction on print media having smaller widths. To this end, modular platform 1800 may be removed by sliding modular platform 1800 out of bottom chassis portion 128. In addition, another modular platform (which supports another print medium) slides into the bottom chassis portion 128.

Fig. 19A and 19B illustrate a modular platform 1800 sliding on a bottom chassis portion 128 and a perspective view of the bottom chassis portion 128 with the modular platform 1800, according to one or more embodiments described herein.

Referring to fig. 19A, modular platform 1800 is received on platform receiving surface 1704 by sliding modular platform 1800 from opening 1708 between channel 1710 and platform receiving surface 1704. Referring to fig. 19B, modular platform 1800 is positioned at top end portion 226 on bottom chassis portion 128.

In some examples, the foregoing structure of the print head engine 122 may be used for vector mode printing. However, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to printhead engine 122 having the aforementioned structure. In an exemplary embodiment, the print head engine 122 may have a structure that may facilitate printing of the printing device 100 in raster mode. Such a structure of the printhead engine 122 is described herein.

Printhead structure-raster pattern

In some examples, to facilitate printing of content using a laser beam by printing apparatus 100, the printhead may include a laser subsystem. The laser subsystem may further include one or more laser sources and optical components. The one or more laser sources may be configured to generate one or more laser beams that are directed through the optical assembly to focus energy on the print medium for printing the content.

Fig. 20 shows a schematic diagram of a printhead 302 according to one or more embodiments described herein. The printhead 302 includes a laser subsystem 2002, a start of line (SOL) detector 2004, a laser power control system 2006, a controller 2008, a memory device 2010, an input/output (I/O) interface unit 2012, a laser subsystem control unit 2014, and a synchronization unit 2016.

The controller 2008 may be implemented as an apparatus comprising one or more microcontrollers with one or more accompanying digital signal controllers, one or more controllers without an accompanying digital signal controller, one or more multi-core controllers, one or more controllers, processing circuits, one or more computers, various other processing elements, including integrated circuits, such as an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) or a Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA), or some combination thereof. Thus, although shown as a single controller in fig. 20, in one embodiment, the controller 2008 may include multiple controllers and signal processing modules. The multiple controllers may be embodied on a single electronic device or may be distributed across multiple electronic devices that are commonly configured to function as circuitry for printhead 302. The plurality of controllers may be in operative communication with each other and may be collectively configured to perform one or more functions of the circuitry of printhead 302, as described herein. In an exemplary embodiment, controller 2008 may be configured to execute instructions stored in memory device 2010 or otherwise accessible to controller 2008. When executed by controller 2008, the instructions may cause circuitry of printing device 100 to perform one or more functions as described herein.

Whether the controller 2008 is configured by a hardware method, by a firmware/software method, or by a combination thereof, the controller may include an entity capable of performing the operations according to embodiments of the present disclosure while the corresponding configuration is performed. Thus, for example, when controller 2008 is embodied as an ASIC, FPGA, or the like, controller 2008 may include specially configured hardware for performing one or more of the operations described herein. Alternatively, as another example, when controller 2008 is embodied as a runner of instructions (such as may be stored in memory device 2704), the instructions may specifically configure controller 2008 to perform one or more algorithms and operations described herein.

Accordingly, as used herein, controller 2008 may refer to a programmable microcontroller, microcomputer, or multiple controller chip or chips that can be configured by software instructions (applications) to perform a variety of functions, including the functions of the various embodiments described above. In some devices, multiple controllers dedicated to wireless communication functions and one controller dedicated to running other applications may be provided. The software application may be stored in an internal memory before being accessed and loaded into the controller. The controller may include internal memory sufficient to store the application software instructions. In many devices, the internal memory may be volatile or non-volatile memory such as flash memory or a mix of both. The memory may also be located within another computing resource (e.g., to enable computer readable instructions to be downloaded over the internet or another wired or wireless connection).

The memory device 2010 may comprise suitable logic, circuitry, and/or an interface that may be adapted to store a set of instructions that may be executed by the controller 2008 to perform predetermined operations. Some of the commonly known memory implementations include, but are not limited to, hard disks, random access memories, cache memories, read-only memories (ROMs), erasable programmable read-only memories (EPROMs) and electrically erasable programmable read-only memories (EEPROMs), flash memories, magnetic cassettes, magnetic tape, magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage devices, compact disk read-only memories (CD-ROMs), digital versatile disk read-only memories (DVD-ROMs), optical disks, circuitry configured to store information, or some combination thereof. In an exemplary embodiment, the memory device 2010 may be integrated with the controller 2008 on a single chip without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.

In some examples, memory device 2010 may include a buffer space and one or more configuration registers. In an exemplary embodiment, the buffer space may be configured to store data to be printed on the print medium 104. In some examples, the one or more configuration registers are configured to hold configuration values. The configuration values in the one or more configuration registers determine one or more configurations and one or more states of the printhead 302. The following table shows examples of one or more configuration tables:

Table 1: one or more configuration registers

The one or more configuration registers are further described in connection with fig. 40.

The I/O device interface unit 2012 may comprise suitable logic and/or circuitry that may be configured to communicate in accordance with one or more device communication protocols such as, but not limited to, an I2C communication protocol, a Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) communication protocol, a serial communication protocol, a Control Area Network (CAN) communication protocol, andthe communication protocol communicates with one or more components of the printing apparatus 100. Some examples of the I/O device interface unit 2012 may include, but are not limited to, a Data Acquisition (DAQ) card, an electrical driver circuit, and the like.

In an exemplary embodiment, the I/O device interface unit 2012 includes a printhead interface. In some examples, the printhead interface facilitates coupling between the printhead 302 and the control unit 138 of the printing apparatus. In an exemplary embodiment, the printhead interface allows one or more signals to be communicated between the printhead 302 and the control unit 138 of the printing apparatus 100. In an exemplary embodiment, the one or more signals may facilitate synchronization between the printhead 302 and the control unit 138, as described in fig. 41-47. Additionally or alternatively, the printhead interface may include one or more electrical connectors through which the one or more signals are shared between the printhead 302 and the control unit 138. The following table shows the pin leads of the printhead interface:

Table 2: pin lead of printhead interface

The purpose of the one or more signals and other pin leads in the printhead interface is further described in connection with fig. 41-47. In an exemplary embodiment, laser subsystem 2002 may comprise suitable logic and/or circuitry that may enable printhead 302 to direct laser light onto print medium 104 positioned on platform 322. The laser subsystem 2002 may include one or more optical components and a laser source operable in combination to facilitate directing laser light onto the print medium 104. The structure and operation of laser subsystem 2002 is further described in connection with fig. 21.

Laser optical device

Fig. 21 shows a schematic diagram of a laser subsystem 2002 according to one or more embodiments described herein. The laser subsystem 2002 includes one or more laser sources 2102 and an optical assembly 2104.

In an exemplary embodiment, the one or more laser sources comprise suitable logic and/or circuitry that may enable the one or more laser sources 2102 to generate one or more laser beams. In some examples, one or more laser sources 2102 can generate one or more laser beams of different wavelengths. For example, the one or more laser sources can generate one or more laser beams having a wavelength in the range of 600nm to 800 nm. Some examples of the one or more laser sources may include, but are not limited to, gas laser sources, chemical laser sources, excimer laser sources, solid state laser sources, fiber laser sources, photonic crystal laser sources, semiconductor-based laser sources, dye laser sources, free electron laser sources, and the like. In some examples, one or more laser sources 2102 may be configured to generate a writing laser beam and a preheating laser beam. The writing laser beam has a wavelength of 600 nm. The pre-heated laser beam has a wavelength of 800 nm.

The optical assembly 2104 is positioned relative to the one or more laser sources and is configured to direct a writing laser beam and a preheating laser beam onto the print medium 104. In an exemplary embodiment, the optical assembly 2104 includes a polygonal mirror 2106 that can be coupled to a fourth actuation unit 2108. The fourth actuation unit 2108 can comprise suitable logic and/or circuitry that can facilitate rotation of the polygonal mirror 2106 at a predetermined speed. In an exemplary embodiment, the polygonal mirror 2106 can have one or more reflective surfaces 2110, wherein the count of the one or more reflective surfaces 2110 depends on the shape of the polygonal mirror defining the one or more reflective surfaces 2110. For example, if the shape of the polygonal mirror corresponds to an octagon, the count of one or more reflective surfaces 2110 is eight. Polygonal mirror 2106 is positioned relative to one or more laser sources 2102 such that polygonal mirror 2106 reflects the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam in a predetermined direction. More specifically, the one or more reflective surfaces 2110 may reflect the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam in a predetermined direction based on an incident angle between the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam and a reflective surface of the one or more reflective surfaces 2110. In an exemplary embodiment, as the polygon mirror 2106 rotates, the angle of incidence between the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam and the reflective surface 2110 may vary, whereby the direction in which the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam are reflected varies. To this end, the write laser beam and the preheat laser beam may be swept along a longitudinal axis 210 of the printhead engine 122.

The optical assembly 2104 may further reflect a plurality of lenses 2112 through which the light beam passes. In an exemplary embodiment, the plurality of lenses may be configured to converge the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam, respectively. The optical assembly 2104 further includes one or more folding mirrors 2114a, 2114b, 2114c, and 2114d positioned downstream of the plurality of lenses 2112. In some examples, the plurality of folding mirrors 2114a, 2114b, 2114c, and 2114d may be configured to modify the direction of the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam. More specifically, one or more folding mirrors 2114a, 2114b, 2114c, and 2114d may direct the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam onto the print medium 104 positioned on the platform 322 on the bottom chassis portion 128.

Because the write and preheat laser beams are swept due to rotation of the polygon mirror 2106, the write and preheat laser beams may be swept across the width of the print medium 104. When laser light is irradiated on the printing medium 104, the color of the printing medium is modified. The modification of the color of the print medium 104 corresponds to the print content. The print medium 104 that changes color upon irradiation of the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam is described later with reference to fig. 25A.

In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to one or more laser sources 2102 generating a writing laser beam and a preheating laser beam, wherein the writing laser beam is configured to write content on the print medium 104 and the preheating laser beam is configured to preheat the print medium 104. In an exemplary embodiment, one or more laser sources 2102 may be configured to generate more than one writing laser beam. For example, one or more laser sources 2102 may be configured to generate three writing laser beams such that the three writing laser beams are configured to write content on print medium 104. To this end, three writing laser beams are configured to be directed onto the print medium 104 by the optical assembly 2104. To this end, three writing laser beams may be directed onto the print medium 104 to be adjacent to each other along the print path. In some examples, the first three laser beams may be configured to print three adjacent rows of print medium 104 simultaneously. In such embodiments, the first three laser beams may be configured to print different data. In some examples, a set of three writing laser beams may be disabled during a printing operation. In yet another example, three writing laser beams may be configured to print the same data. In an exemplary embodiment, three writing laser beams may be configured according to one or more configuration settings of the printing apparatus 100. In some examples, the one or more configuration settings may include, but are not limited to, a resolution to be used to print the content, a speed at which the print medium 104 traverses along the print path, and the like.

SOL detector

In some examples, the printhead 302 may be calibrated before or during the process of printing content. In some examples, calibration may be activated to immediately determine the position of one or more optical devices (e.g., polygonal mirrors) at any given moment. In some examples, calibration of the optics provides an indication of where the content is to be printed, such as via a start of line (SOL) detector. The SOL detector may correspond to a light detector that receives the laser beam reflected from each face of the polygonal mirror 2102 as the polygonal mirror 2102 rotates, or it may take the form of another detection mechanism configured to detect reflections from one or more optics, such as a light sensor, a heat sensor, or the like. In some examples, such detectors allow for detection of the speed of the optics (such as the facets of the polygonal mirror onto which the one or more laser sources direct the laser beam) and one or more characteristics of the optics.

Referring back to fig. 20, sol detector 2004 may include suitable logic and circuitry that may facilitate printing device 100 in determining the current position of polygonal mirror 2106. Determining the current position allows the printing apparatus 100 to calibrate the polygon mirror 2106. For example, calibration allows the printing apparatus 100 to adjust a start of line (SOL) from where to begin printing content on the print medium 104 by positioning the polygon mirror 2106. The structure of SOL detector 2004 is further described in connection with fig. 22.

Fig. 22 shows a schematic diagram of SOL detector 2004 in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein. SOL detector 2004 includes a second laser source 2202 and a photodetector 2204.

In an exemplary embodiment, the second laser source 2202 may be similar in structure and function to one or more laser sources. In some examples, the second laser source 2202 may be positioned relative to the polygonal mirror 2106 such that the collimated laser beam generated by the second laser source 2202 is reflected from one or more reflective surfaces 2110 of the polygonal mirror 2106.

In an exemplary embodiment, the light detector 2204 may correspond to a sensor that may be configured to receive the laser beam reflected from the polygonal mirror 2106. For example, the light detector 2204 may be configured to receive a reflected collimated laser beam. Thus, the photodetector 2204 generates a SOL signal that may indicate the position of the polygon mirror 2106. In an exemplary embodiment, the printing apparatus 100 may determine the position of the polygon mirror 2106 based on the SOL signal. The position of the polygon mirror 2106 may facilitate determining SOL.

Laser power control system

In some examples, the printhead may include a control system. In some examples, the control system is configured to control various functions of the printhead, including the laser source and optics enclosed therein. For example, the control system may be configured to control the speed of the polygon mirror in order to achieve print resolution and various print speeds. Further, the control system may be configured to control the power level of the laser source during operation.

Referring back to fig. 20, the laser power control system 2006 may include suitable logic circuitry that may enable the printing device 100 to control the power of the write laser beam and the preheat laser beam. For example, the laser power control system 2006 is configured to control the power of the one or more laser sources based on an operating mode of the printing apparatus 100. In some examples, the operating mode of the printing device 100 may determine at least a resolution to be used to print content on the print medium 104. Some examples of resolutions may include, but are not limited to, 200DPI, 400DPI, and 600DPI. The structure of the laser power control system 2006 is further described in connection with fig. 23.

Fig. 23 shows a schematic diagram of a laser power control system 2006 in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein. The laser power control system 2006 includes one or more photodetector elements 2302. The plurality of light detector elements 2302 may include light detectors 2304 and optical elements 2306.

In an exemplary embodiment, optical assembly 2306 is configured to receive a portion of the writing laser beam and the preheat laser beam through optical assembly 2104. In an exemplary embodiment, the optical assembly 2306 may be configured to collimate the write laser beam and the preheat laser beam. The optical assembly 2306 may then be configured to direct a portion of the write laser beam and the preheat laser beam onto one or more photodetectors 2304. In an exemplary embodiment, the one or more photodetectors 2304 may be configured to generate a third signal that may be indicative of the power of the write laser beam and the preheat laser beam. The third signal may be transmitted to a control system of the printing apparatus 100. In an exemplary embodiment, the control system of the printing apparatus 100 may be configured to determine the current power of the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam based on the third signal. The control system may then be configured to compare the current power of the write laser beam and the preheat laser beam with the required power of the write laser beam and the preheat laser beam. Then, based on the comparison result, the control system may be configured to modify the power of the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam.

Referring to fig. 20, a laser subsystem control unit 2014 may comprise suitable logic and/or circuitry that may enable the printhead 302 to control the operation of the laser subsystem 2002. For example, the laser subsystem control unit 2014 may be configured to control the rotational speed of the polygon mirror 2106, as further described in fig. 47. As another example, the laser subsystem control unit 2014 may be configured to control the power of one or more laser sources, as described above in fig. 23. In such embodiments, the functions of the laser subsystem control unit 2014 may include the laser power control system 2006. In some examples, the laser subsystem control 2014 may be implemented as an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) or a Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA). The synchronization unit 2016 may comprise suitable logic and/or circuitry that may enable the printhead 302 to receive the one or more signals from the control unit 138. For example, the synchronization unit 2016 may be configured to receive a clock signal from the control unit 138. Based on the one or more signals, the synchronization unit 2016 may be configured to instruct the laser subsystem control unit 2014 to control the operation of the printhead 302, as described in fig. 41-47. In some examples, the synchronization unit 2016 may be implemented as an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) or a Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA).

Preheating medium

In some examples, the print medium 104 may be preheated in order to save power and/or provide efficient printing of content. In an exemplary embodiment, the one or more laser sources may be directed toward the print medium 104 to preheat the print medium. In other embodiments, the heat of the printhead itself may be used to preheat the media, such as by having the media adjacent to the printhead or a heat sink unit attached to or in communication with the printhead. In other examples, other internal systems (such as fans or other internal components adjacent to the controller) may be used to preheat the print medium. To this end and in accordance with the preheating, a low power write laser beam may be used to print content on the print medium 104 as compared to a higher power write laser beam used in response to the medium not being preheated.

Referring back to fig. 20, in operation, the printhead 302 may direct a pre-heat laser beam onto the print medium 104, which heats the print medium 104. The printhead 302 may then direct a write laser beam onto the print medium 104 to print content on the print medium 104. The structure of the print medium 104 is further described in connection with fig. 25A.

Thermal management

In some examples, the use of a laser may heat the printhead 302. Thus, in some examples, the printhead 302 may include a heat dissipating unit, which is further described in fig. 24. Fig. 24 shows a schematic diagram of a printhead 302 with a heat dissipation unit 2402. The heat dissipation unit 2402 may be coupled to a top surface 2408 of the top chassis portion 126 of the printhead 302. In some examples, the heat dissipation unit 2402 may include a heat sink section 2404 and a wind sector section 2406. The heat sink section 2404 may be coupled to the top surface and the fan section 2406 may be coupled to the heat sink. When the heat dissipation unit 2402 is actuated, the heat dissipation unit 2402 may be configured to transfer heat from the printhead 302 into the environment surrounding the printhead 302. In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to heat dissipation unit 2402 including fan section 2406. In an exemplary embodiment, the heat dissipation unit 2402 may be a liquid cooling unit. In such embodiments, the heat dissipation unit 2402 may include a pump (not shown) and a tank configured to store a fluid. The pump may be configured to pump the liquid through the printhead 302 and through a heat sink, wherein the heat sink may be configured to dissipate heat from the liquid into an environment of the printhead 302.

Printing medium

In some examples and to facilitate printing content on print medium 104 when the print medium is exposed to the writing laser beam, print medium 104 may be composed of a chemical composition configured to react to one or more wavelengths generated by one or more laser beams emitted from the one or more laser sources. In some examples, and with the writing laser beam directed onto the print medium 104, exposure of the medium to the writing laser beam prints the medium causing a chemical reaction that facilitates a color change. Further, the print medium 104 may have a protective layer that allows the printing apparatus 100 to authenticate the print medium 104 before printing the content on the print medium 104.

In some examples, the color of the print medium 104 may change when the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam impinge on the print medium 104. The changed color corresponds to the print content. In some examples, the composition of the print medium 104 may effect such color changes (when the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam impinge on the print medium 104). The composition of the print medium 104 is further described in connection with fig. 25A.

Fig. 25A illustrates a composition of print medium 104 according to one or more embodiments described herein. In an exemplary embodiment, print medium 104 includes a substrate 2502, a reactive layer 2504, and a protective layer 2506. In an exemplary embodiment, the substrate 2502 may correspond to a paper layer on which content is printed. The term "substrate" refers to a fibrous web that may be formed, produced, manufactured, etc. from a mixture or the like, including paper fibers, internal papermaking sizing agents, etc. plus any other optional papermaking additives such as fillers, wet strength agents, optical brighteners (or optical brighteners), etc. The substrate may be in the form of a continuous web, discrete sheets, or the like. In some examples, ink or other content writing material may be disposed on the substrate 2502 to print content on the substrate 2502.

In some examples, the reactive layer 2504 may be disposed on the substrate 2502. In some examples, the reactive layer 2504 may have a chemical composition that allows the reactive layer 2504 to change color when the reactive layer 2504 is exposed to a writing laser beam of a first predetermined wavelength. For example, when the reactive layer 2504 is exposed to a writing laser beam having a predetermined wavelength of 500nm, the reactive layer 2504 may change color. In an exemplary embodiment, the changed color corresponds to print content. In some examples, the chemical composition of the reactive layer 2504 may be selected from the group consisting of leuco dye, diacetylene, and ammonium octamolybdate. However, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the reaction layer 2504 having the foregoing chemical composition. In an exemplary embodiment, the reactive layer 2504 may have other chemical compositions that may enable the reactive layer 2504 to change color when exposed to a writing laser beam of a first predetermined wavelength.

In some examples, a protective layer 2506 may be disposed on the reactive layer 2504. In some examples, the protective layer 2506 may correspond to a photochromic layer that may be opaque to a writing laser beam having a first predetermined wavelength. Further, when the protective layer 2506 is exposed to a preheating laser beam of a second predetermined wavelength, the protective layer 2506 may allow a writing laser beam having a first predetermined wavelength to pass through. Exposing the protective layer 2506 to a pre-heated laser beam of a second predetermined wavelength subjects the protective layer 2506 to a photochromic process. Such a photochromic process allows the protective layer to pass a writing laser beam of a first predetermined wavelength. For this purpose, the reactive layer 2504 is exposed to a writing laser beam, thereby causing the reactive layer 2504 to change color. In some examples, the second predetermined wavelength may vary in a range between 200nm and 400 nm.

In some examples, when the protective layer 2506 is not exposed to a pre-heating laser beam of a second predetermined wavelength, the protective layer 2506 may be opaque to a writing laser beam having a first predetermined wavelength. In some examples, the protective layer 2506 may undergo a reverse photochromic process when the protective layer 2506 is not exposed to a preheating laser beam of a second predetermined wavelength. For example, in response to the protective layer 2506 not being exposed to a pre-heated laser beam of a second predetermined wavelength, the protective layer 2506 may undergo a reverse photochromic process. Such a process causes the protective layer 2506 to block the writing laser beam having the first predetermined wavelength. In some examples, the protective layer 2506 does not require additional exposure to subject the protective layer 2506 to a reverse photochromic process.

Some examples of protective layer 2506 may have a chemical composition selected from the group consisting of: enaminones with li+ in acetonitrile, a bi-photochromic molecule consisting of two rapidly negative photochromic phenoxy-imidazolyl radicals. For the purposes of the ongoing description, the protective layer 2506 is considered to be composed of two rapidly negative photochromic phenoxy-imidazolyl radicals. The following chemical equations illustrate an exemplary photochromic process (when the protective layer 2506 is exposed to a pre-heating laser beam) and an exemplary inverse photochromic process (when the protective layer 2506 is not exposed to a pre-heating laser beam):

Referring now to fig. 25B, an equation 2500 depicting a chemical process (i.e., equation 1) in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein is provided. As shown in fig. 25B, binaphthyl-bridged phenoxy-imidazolyl radical complex (BN-PIC) exhibits a reverse photochromic phenomenon in which the most thermally stable colored form (C) is photochemically isomerized to a metastable colorless form (CL) via a short-lived di-radical species upon irradiation with a pre-heated laser beam. When the preheat laser beam exposure is removed, the CL form exhibits a rapid thermal reverse reaction, returning to the original C form.

Additionally or alternatively, as depicted in fig. 25A, the protective layer 2506 may include an Ultraviolet (UV) dye. The UV dye may be configured to verify the authenticity of the print medium 104. For example, when the print medium is irradiated with UV radiation, light may be reflected from the surface of the print medium 104. The reflected light may be detected by a light detector that may generate a fifth signal. Based on the fifth signal, the print medium 104 may be authenticated.

In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to print medium 104 having three layers. In some examples, print medium 104 may include an adhesive layer. The adhesive layer may correspond to an adhesive layer that may be configured to bond the substrate 2502 with the reactive layer 2504 and the protective layer 2506.

A process of printing content on the print medium 104 is further illustrated in fig. 26. Fig. 26 is a schematic diagram 2600 illustrating printing content on print medium 104 according to one or more embodiments described herein.

Schematic 2600 illustrates print medium 104 that can traverse along a print path (depicted by 2602). Schematic 2600 further illustrates one or more laser sources 2102. Laser source 2102a is configured to generate a writing laser beam (depicted by 2604), while laser source 2102b is configured to generate a preheat laser beam (2606). In some examples, preheat laser beam 2606 is configured to illuminate a portion of print medium 104 (as depicted by 2608). Irradiating a portion of the print medium 104 causes the protective layer 2506 (within a portion 2608 of the print medium 104) to undergo a photochromic process, thereby allowing a write laser beam 2604 of a first predetermined wavelength to pass. Thus, when a writing laser beam (depicted by 2604) of a first predetermined wavelength is directed onto print medium 104, the writing laser beam (depicted by 2604) passes through protective layer 2506 onto reactive layer 2504. A writing laser beam (depicted by 2604) causes reactive layer 2504 to change color. As the print medium 104 traverses along the print path (depicted by 2604), a portion of the print medium 104 (depicted by 2608) moves along the print path (depicted by 2602). Thus, a portion (depicted by 2608) of print medium 104 is not exposed to preheat laser beam 2606. This subjects the protective layer 2506 to a reverse photochromic process. Thus, the protective layer 2506 blocks the writing laser beam 2604.

Printer system

Fig. 27 shows a block diagram of a control unit 138 according to one or more embodiments described herein. In an exemplary embodiment, the control unit 138 includes a processor 2702, a memory device 2704, and an input/output (I/O) device interface unit 2706, a media characteristic determination unit 2710, a media flattening unit 2712, a media speed determination unit 2714, a print operation control unit 2716, an image processing unit 2718, a clock signal generation unit 2720, a printhead synchronization unit 2722, and a data synchronization unit 2724.

The processor 2702 may be embodied as an apparatus comprising one or more microprocessors with accompanying digital signal processors, one or more processors without an accompanying digital signal processor, one or more coprocessors, one or more multi-core processors, one or more controllers, processing circuitry, one or more computers, various other processing elements including integrated circuits such as an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) or Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA), or some combination thereof. Thus, although shown as a single processor in fig. 27, in one embodiment, the processor 2702 may include multiple processors and signal processing modules. The plurality of processors may be embodied on a single electronic device or may be distributed across a plurality of electronic devices that are commonly configured to function as circuitry for the printing apparatus 100. The plurality of processors may be in operative communication with each other and may be collectively configured to perform one or more functionalities of the circuitry of the printing apparatus 100, as described herein. In an exemplary embodiment, the processor 2702 may be configured to execute instructions stored in the memory device 2704 or otherwise accessible to the processor 2702. When executed by processor 2702, the instructions may cause circuitry of printing apparatus 100 to perform one or more functions as described herein.

Whether the processor 2702 is configured by a hardware method, by a firmware/software method, or by a combination thereof, the processor may comprise an entity capable of performing operations in accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure while configured accordingly. Thus, for example, when the processor 2702 is embodied as an ASIC, FPGA, or the like, the processor 2702 may include specially configured hardware for performing one or more of the operations described herein. Alternatively, as another example, when the processor 2702 is embodied as a runner of instructions (such as may be stored in the memory device 2704), the instructions may specifically configure the processor 2702 to perform one or more algorithms and operations described herein.

Thus, as used herein, processor 2702 may refer to a programmable microprocessor, microcomputer, or multiple processor chip or chips that can be configured by software instructions (applications) to perform a variety of functions, including the functions of the various embodiments described above. In some devices, multiple processors may be provided that are dedicated to wireless communication functions and one processor that is dedicated to running other applications. The software application may be stored in an internal memory before being accessed and loaded into the processor. The processor may include internal memory sufficient to store the application software instructions. In many devices, the internal memory may be volatile or non-volatile memory such as flash memory or a mix of both. The memory may also be located within another computing resource (e.g., to enable computer readable instructions to be downloaded over the internet or another wired or wireless connection).

The memory device 2704 may comprise suitable logic, circuitry, and/or an interface that may be adapted to store a set of instructions that may be executed by the processor 2702 to perform predetermined operations. Some of the commonly known memory implementations include, but are not limited to, hard disks, random access memories, cache memories, read-only memories (ROMs), erasable programmable read-only memories (EPROMs) and electrically erasable programmable read-only memories (EEPROMs), flash memories, magnetic cassettes, magnetic tape, magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage devices, compact disk read-only memories (CD-ROMs), digital versatile disk read-only memories (DVD-ROMs), optical disks, circuitry configured to store information, or some combination thereof. In an exemplary embodiment, the memory device 2704 may be integrated with the processor 2702 on a single chip without departing from the scope of this disclosure.

The I/O device interface unit 2706 may comprise suitable logic and/or circuitry that may be configured to communicate in accordance with one or more device communication protocols such as, but not limited to, an I2C communication protocol, a Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) communication protocol, a serial communication protocol, a Control Area Network (CAN) communication protocol, and The communication protocol communicates with one or more components of the printing apparatus 100. In an exemplary embodiment, the I/O device interface unit 2706 may be in communication with the first actuation unit 119, the second actuation unit 136, and the third actuation unit 504. Some examples of I/O device interface unit 2706 may include, but are not limited to, a Data Acquisition (DAQ) card, an electrical driver circuit, and the like. />

The media characteristic determination unit 2710 may comprise suitable logic and/or circuitry that may be configured to determine one or more print media characteristics. In some examples, the one or more print media characteristics may include, but are not limited to, a thickness of the print media 104, a type of the print media 104 (e.g., continuous media, spacer media, black mark media, etc.), and so forth. In an exemplary embodiment, the medium characteristic determination unit 2710 may receive input from an operator of the printing device 100 regarding a print medium name, such as described further with respect to fig. 28. Based on the print media names, the media characteristic determination unit 2710 may determine the one or more print media characteristics, as further described in fig. 28. In some examples, the media characteristic determination unit 2710 may receive the one or more print media characteristics as input directly from an operator of the printing device 100. The medium characteristic determination unit 2710 may be implemented using a field programmable gate array and/or an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) or the like.

The media flattening unit 2712 may include suitable logic and/or circuitry that may be configured to determine a period of time to deactivate/deactivate the first actuation unit 119, as further described in fig. 28. The media flattening unit 2712 may be implemented using a field programmable gate array and/or an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) or the like.

The media speed determination unit 2714 may include suitable logic and/or circuitry that may be configured to determine a media traverse speed of the print media 104. In an exemplary embodiment, the medium speed determination unit 2714 may be configured to receive another input from an operator of the printing apparatus 100 regarding an operation speed to be used by the printing apparatus 100. Based on the operation speed to be used by the printing apparatus 100, the medium speed determination unit 2714 may determine the medium traverse speed. Additionally or alternatively, the media speed determination unit 2714 may receive input from an operator of the printing device 100 regarding a measure of desired print quality. Based on a measure of the desired print quality, the media speed determination unit 2714 may determine a media traverse speed, as further described in fig. 28. The media speed determination unit 2714 may be implemented using a field programmable gate array and/or an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) or the like.

The print operation control unit 2716 may comprise suitable logic and/or circuitry that may enable the print operation control unit 2716 to determine one or more printhead parameters associated with the printhead 302 to print content on the print medium 104. In an exemplary embodiment, the one or more print head parameters associated with print head 302 may include, but are not limited to, a position of polygon mirror 2106, a speed of polygon mirror 2106, a duty cycle of the write laser beam, and the like. For example, the print operation control unit 2716 may be configured to access or otherwise receive the one or more configuration settings of the printing device 100. In some examples, the configuration settings may take the form of registers (e.g., printhead control registers, printhead DPI registers, image width registers, image length registers, print speed registers, print darkness and contrast registers, mirror overrun registers, printhead status registers, printhead self-test status registers, laser beam position registers, upper odometer registers, lower odometer registers, printhead error registers, etc.). Then, the print operation control unit 2716 may determine the rotational speed of the polygon mirror 2106 based on the one or more configuration settings, as further described in connection with fig. 32. In some examples, the print operation control unit 2716 may be configured to determine a measure of skew that may be introduced in the print content during printing of the content on the print medium 104, as further described in fig. 34. The print operation control unit 2716 may be implemented using a field programmable gate array and/or an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) or the like.

The image processing unit 2718 may include suitable logic and/or circuitry that may enable the image processing unit 2718 to modify content (received for printing on the print medium 104), as further described in fig. 34. For example, in some examples, image processing unit 2718 may be configured to modify the skew of content prior to printing the content on print medium 104, as further described in fig. 34. In some examples, image processing unit 2718 may modify content using one or more known image processing techniques. The image processing unit 2718 may be implemented using a field programmable gate array and/or an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), or the like.

The clock signal generation unit 2720 may comprise suitable logic and/or circuitry that may enable the clock signal generation unit 2720 to generate a clock signal. Further, the clock signal generation unit 2720 may be configured to transmit a clock signal to the printhead 302. In an exemplary embodiment, the clock signal generation unit 2720 may generate the clock signal using a known method such as, but not limited to, a Phase Locked Loop (PLL), quartz, etc. In some examples, the clock signal may have a predetermined frequency. In some examples, the clock signal may facilitate synchronization between the control unit 138 and the printhead 308. The clock signal generation unit 2720 may be implemented using a field programmable gate array and/or an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), or the like.

In some examples, the printhead synchronization unit 2722 may comprise suitable logic and/or circuitry that may cause the printhead synchronization unit 2722 to generate one or more signals based on a clock signal, the one or more signals being further described in connection with fig. 41-47. As discussed, the one or more signals may facilitate synchronization between the control unit 138 and the printhead 302. For example, based on the one or more signals, the printhead 302 may be configured to control the speed of the polygon mirror 2106. Similarly, based on the one or more signals, printhead 302 may control other operations of printhead 302. The printhead synchronization unit 2722 may be implemented using a field programmable gate array and/or an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), or the like.

The data synchronization unit 2724 may comprise suitable logic and/or circuitry that may enable generation of one or more data signals. In an exemplary embodiment, based on the one or more data signals, the control unit 138 may transmit data to the printhead 302, such as data indicative of content to be printed. In some examples, the one or more data signals may include, but are not limited to, frame synchronization signals (F-Sync) and line synchronization (L-Sync) signals. In an exemplary embodiment, the F-Sync signal may indicate to the print head 302 that the control unit 138 is transmitting data to be printed on a label of the print medium 104. In an exemplary embodiment, the L-Sync signal may indicate to the print head 302 that the control unit 138 is transmitting segment data to be printed on a label of the print medium 104.

The data synchronization unit 2724 may be implemented using a field programmable gate array and/or an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), or the like.

The operation of the control unit 138 is further described in connection with fig. 28.

Method for planarizing a medium

Fig. 28 illustrates a flow chart 2800 of a method for operating printing device 100 according to one or more embodiments described herein.

At step 2802, the printing apparatus 100 may include means for receiving input of a print media name from an operator, such as a control unit 138, a processor 2702, an I/O device interface unit 2706, a media characteristic determination unit 2710, and the like. In an exemplary embodiment, the medium characteristics determining unit 2710 may receive input from an operator through the I/O device interface unit 2706. For example, the I/O device interface unit 2706 may receive input from an operator through a UI. Upon receiving an input, the I/O device interface unit 2706 may be configured to transmit the input to the medium characteristics determination unit 2710.

In an exemplary embodiment, the input from the operator may include, but is not limited to, information related to a print media name of the print media 104 loaded in the printing apparatus 100. Some examples of media types are shown below:

Print media name
	Du Lase m (Duratherm) Synthesis
Du Lase mu II ink
	Du Lase mu III reception
Du Lase mu II gloss polyester

Table 3: print media name

At step 2804, printing apparatus 100 may include means for media characteristic determination unit 2710 to determine the one or more print media characteristics based on the print media named in the exemplary embodiment by using a first lookup table, such as control unit 138, processor 2702, I/O device interface unit 2706, media characteristic determination unit 2710, and the like. The following table shows an exemplary first lookup table:

name of print medium	Type of print medium 104	Print media thickness
			Du Lase m (Duratherm) Synthesis	(Continuous)	1mm
Du Lase mu II ink	Spacer medium	0.5mm
			Du Lase mu III reception	Black label medium	0.25mm
Du Lase mu II gloss polyester	(Continuous)	0.75mm

Table 4: first lookup table including one or more print media characteristics

At step 2806, the printing apparatus 100 includes means for determining a media traverse speed, such as a control unit 138, a processor 2702, an I/O device interface unit 2706, a media speed determination unit 2714, and the like. In an exemplary embodiment, before determining the print medium traverse speed, the medium speed determination unit 2714 may be configured to receive another input related to an operation speed to be used by the printing device 100. The media speed determination unit 2714 may then be configured to determine the media traverse speed by utilizing a second look-up table that includes a mapping between the media traverse speed and the operating speed that the printing device 100 is to use. The following table shows an exemplary second lookup table:

Table 5: a second check showing a mapping between the operating speed and the media traverse speed that the printing device 100 will use Look-up table。

Additionally or continuously, the media speed determination unit 2714 may be configured to receive input from an operator of the printing device 100 regarding a desired print quality. In such an exemplary implementation, the media speed determination unit 2714 may be configured to determine the media traverse speed by utilizing a third lookup table that includes a mapping between desired print quality and media traverse speed. The following table shows an exemplary third lookup table:

desired print media quality	Medium traverse speed (ips)
		High height	1ips
In (a)	2ips
		Low and low	5ips

Table 6: a third lookup table showing a mapping between a measure of desired print media quality and media traverse speed。

At step 2808, the printing apparatus 100 may include means, such as the control unit 138, the processor 2702, the I/O device interface unit 2706, the media flattening unit 2712, and the like, for determining a period of time to elapse before the second roller 134 stops based on the one or more print medium characteristics and the media traverse speed. In some examples, the media flattening unit 2712 may determine the time period using a fourth lookup table that includes a mapping between the one or more print media characteristics, the media traverse speed, and the time period. The following table shows an exemplary fourth lookup table:

Print media thickness	Speed of traverse of media	Type of print medium	Time period (ms)
				1mm	5ips	(Continuous)	1ms
0.5mm	2ips	Spacer medium	0.5ms
				0.25mm	1ips	Black label medium	2ms
0.75mm	5ips	(Continuous)	1ms

Table 7: showing a mapping between the one or more print media characteristics, media traverse speed, and the time period to A fourth lookup table for determining the time period。

At step 2810, the printing apparatus 100 may include means for activating the first and second actuation units 129, 136, such as a control unit 138, a processor 2702, an I/O device interface unit 2706, a media flattening unit 2712, and the like. Activation of the first and second actuation units 129, 136 rotates the first and second rollers 132, 134, respectively. Rotation of the first roller 132 and the second roller 134 causes the print medium 104 to traverse in the print direction.

At step 2812, the printing apparatus 100 may include means for disabling the first actuation unit 129 at a first time, such as the control unit 138, the processor 2702, the I/O device interface unit 2706, the media flattening unit 2712, and the like. Deactivation of the first actuation unit 129 stops the first roller 132 from rotating. At step 2814, the printing apparatus 100 may include means, such as the control unit 138, the processor 2702, the I/O device interface unit 2706, the media flattening unit 2712, and the like, for determining whether the period of time (the period of time determined in step 2808) has elapsed since the first time. If the media flattening unit 2712 determines that the period of time has elapsed, the media flattening unit 2712 may be configured to perform step 2816. However, if the media flattening unit 2712 determines that the period of time has not elapsed, the media flattening unit 2712 may be configured to repeat step 2814.

At step 2816, the printing apparatus 100 may include means, such as the control unit 138, the processor 2702, the I/O device interface unit 2706, the media flattening unit 2712, and the like, for disabling the second actuation unit 136 at a second time in response to expiration of the period of time. In an exemplary embodiment, the second time corresponds to a time at which the time period expires. Deactivation of the second actuation unit 136 stops the second roller 134 from rotating. In an exemplary embodiment, the second time is later in time than the first time. Further, the time difference between the first time instant and the second time instant is equal to the time period determined at step 2808. Since the second actuating unit 136 is movable after the first actuating unit 129 is deactivated, the second roller 134 remains rotated even after the first roller 132 stops rotating. Such a scenario causes the second roller 134 to pull and stretch the print medium 104. Thus, the print medium 104 becomes flat between the first roller 132 and the second roller 134.

At step 2818, printing apparatus 100 may include means, such as control unit 138, processor 2702, I/O device interface unit 2706, etc., for causing printhead engine 122 to print content on print medium 104.

Fig. 29 illustrates a functional block diagram 2900 of a portion of a printing device 100 according to one or more embodiments described herein. The functional block diagram 2900 includes first and second rollers 132, 134, a printhead engine 122, print media 104, a first actuation unit 129, a second actuation unit 136, and a control unit 138.

As depicted, the control unit 138 is coupled to the first and second actuation units 129, 136. Further, as depicted, the first and second actuation units 129, 136 are coupled to the first and second rollers 132, 134, respectively.

In an exemplary embodiment, the control unit 138 transmits a deactivation signal to the first actuation unit 129 at a first time (T1). The control unit 138 then transmits a deactivation signal to the second actuation unit 136 at a second time instant (T2). In an exemplary embodiment, the second instant (T2) occurs after the first instant (T1) in time. Thus, the first roller 132 remains rotated even after the one or more second rollers 134 cease to rotate. Such a scenario causes the first roller 132 to pull and stretch the print medium 104. Thus, the print medium 104 becomes flat between the first roller 132 and the one or more second rollers 134.

Fig. 30 illustrates a flowchart 3000 of a method for operating the printing device 100 according to one or more embodiments described herein.

At step 3002, printing apparatus 100 may include means, such as control unit 138, processor 2702, I/O device interface unit 2706, and the like, for advancing print medium 104 in a print direction along a print path.

At step 3004, printing apparatus 100 may include means, such as control unit 138, processor 2702, I/O device interface unit 2706, etc., for determining whether print medium 104 is positioned on platform 1222. In an exemplary embodiment, the I/O device interface unit 2706 may rely on media signals from the media sensor to determine the position of the print media on the platform 1222. In some examples, the media sensor may include an optical transmitter and an optical receiver that are operable in combination to generate a media signal that determines the position of the print media on the platform 1222. In some examples, the media signal may indicate a location of the print media 104. For example, the media sensor may be configured to generate a media signal based on the transmissivity/reflectivity of the print media 104 as the print media 104 travels along the print path. A sudden change in the transmissivity/reflectivity of the print medium 104 may indicate a division between labels passing over the media sensor, as the division between labels in the print medium 104 may be indicated by black dot markings or perforations in the print medium 104. In some examples, when such abrupt changes in transmissivity/reflectivity in print medium 104 are identified in the medium signal by processor 2702, processor 2702 may determine that the label of print medium 104 is received and positioned on platform 1222. In response to determining that print medium 104 is positioned on platform 1222, processor 2702 may be configured to perform step 3006. However, if the processor 2702 determines that the print medium 104 is not positioned on the platform 1222, the processor 2702 may be configured to repeat step 3004.

At step 3006, printing apparatus 100 may include means for stopping travel of print medium 104, such as control unit 138, processor 2702, I/O device interface unit 2706, and the like.

At step 3008, printing apparatus 100 may include means for activating vacuum generating unit 1602, such as control unit 138, processor 2702, I/O device interface unit 2706, and the like. For example, the I/O device interface unit 2706 may activate the vacuum generating unit 1602 (e.g., a fan). Activation of the vacuum generating unit 1602 generates a negative pressure at the platform 1222, thereby adhering the print medium 104 to the platform 1222.

At step 3010, the printing apparatus 100 can include means, such as the control unit 138, the processor 2702, the I/O device interface unit 2706, and the like, for activating a fifth actuation unit 1412 that applies an external force on the frame 1216. External forces on the frame 1216 cause the frame 1216 to traverse to the second position. As discussed above and with the frame 126 in the second position, the frame 1216 abuts the bottom chassis portion 128 of the printhead engine 122. When the print media 104 is positioned on the platform 1222 (defined on the bottom chassis portion 128), the frame 1216 may press against the print media 104. More specifically, the frame 1216 may press one or more edges of the print media 104 against the platform 1222. Thus, the combination of vacuum (generated by the vacuum generating unit) and frame 1216 levels the print media 104. In some examples, steps 3008 and 3010 may be performed simultaneously.

At step 3012, the printing apparatus 100 may include means for causing a printhead to print content on a flat print medium, such as a control unit 138, a processor 2702, an I/O device interface unit 2706, and the like.

Then, in some examples, after the content is printed, the processor 2702 may be configured to deactivate the fifth actuation unit 1412 and the vacuum generation unit 1602. Thus, the external force acting on the frame 1216 is removed and the frame 1216 may traverse to the first position under the biasing force exerted by the biasing member 1402. Thus, the print medium 104 can travel freely along the print path.

Fig. 31A and 31B illustrate positioning of a frame 1216 relative to a print medium 104 in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein. Referring to fig. 31a, the frame 1216 is in a first position in which the frame 1216 is positioned adjacent the top chassis portion 126. Thus, the frame 1216 does not press against the print media 104, allowing the print media 104 to travel freely along the print path. Referring to fig. 31B, the second actuation unit 136 (e.g., electromagnet 1604) is activated. The electromagnet 1604 generates an external force on the frame 1216, thereby traversing the frame 1216 to the second position. In the second position, the frame 1216 presses against the one or more edges of the print media 104, thereby planarizing the print media 104. When the electromagnet is deactivated, the biasing force exerted by the biasing member 1402 causes the frame 1216 to traverse back to the first position.

In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to biasing member 1402 applying a biasing force that places frame 1216 in the first position. In an exemplary embodiment, the biasing member 1402 can apply a biasing force that places the frame 1216 in a second position in which the frame 1216 presses against the one or more edges of the print media 104. In such embodiments, fifth actuation unit 1412 may be configured to apply an external force to traverse frame 1216 to the second position. For example, the electromagnet 1604 may exert a repulsive force on the frame 1216, thereby traversing the frame 1216 to the first position.

In yet another embodiment, the positioning of the biasing member 1402 and the electromagnet 1604 (i.e., the second actuation unit 136) may be interchanged with one another. In such embodiments, the biasing member 1402 may be coupled to the bottom chassis portion 128 and the electromagnet 1604 may be positioned in the top chassis portion 126. Further, to this end, the frame 1216 may be coupled to the bottom chassis portion 128 by a biasing member 1402. The biasing member 1402 may be configured to exert a biasing force on the frame, thereby causing the frame 1216 to be in a second position (i.e., pressing against the one or more edges of the print media 104). When the electromagnet 1604 is activated, an external force is applied to the frame 1216, thereby traversing the frame 1216 to a first position. For example, the electromagnet 1604 may exert an attractive force on the frame 1216, thereby traversing the frame 1216 to the first position.

In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the traversal of the frame 1216 and the simultaneous operation of the vacuum generating unit 1602. In an exemplary embodiment, both the traversing of the frame 1216 and the vacuum generating unit 1602 may operate independently. For example, in one embodiment, traversal of the frame 1216 may be disabled, and only the vacuum generating unit 1602 may be operable to level the print media. In another embodiment, the vacuum generating unit 1602 may be disabled and only the frame 1216 may be operable to planarize the print media 104.

In some examples, printing device 100 may receive commands or instructions to print at a particular resolution and/or at a particular print speed, such as by configuring settings or print jobs. In some examples, the command or instruction may cause a change to a different resolution or different printing speed than the previously used resolution or printing speed. In such a scenario, the printhead 302 may generate multiple laser beams capable of printing multiple lines in parallel. Changing the count of the laser beams allows the printing apparatus 100 to print content at a plurality of printing speeds. Additionally or alternatively, multiple print speeds can be achieved by varying the rotational speed of the optics (such as polygon mirror 2106). One such method of varying the count of the laser beams and the rotational speed of the polygon mirror 2106 is further described in connection with fig. 32.

In some examples, the control unit 138 may be configured to configure the printhead 302 to operate in one or more modes. For example, the control unit 138 may be configured to receive one or more configuration settings, and the control unit 138 may be configured to configure the printhead 302 based on the one or more configuration settings. Some examples of the one or more configuration settings include, but are not limited to: the resolution at which the print head 302 is to be used to print content, the content width, the speed at which the print content is to be used, the contrast and/or darkness values at which the print content is to be used, the duration of rotation of the polygon mirror 2106 at a constant rotational speed, the print head mode, the print head pressure, etc.

In an exemplary embodiment, the control unit 138 may be configured to set configuration values in the one or more configuration registers (in the memory device 2010 of the printhead 302) based on the one or more configuration settings. In some examples, control unit 138 may be configured to transmit the configuration values to the one or more configuration registers using one or more communication protocols, such as, but not limited to, serial Peripheral Interface (SPI), serial bus, parallel bus, and the like. To this end, each of the one or more configuration registers is stored at a determined memory location in memory device 2010. To set the configuration values in the configuration registers (of the one or more configuration registers), the control unit 138 may be configured to address the locations of the configuration registers. The control unit 138 may then be configured to transmit the configuration values to the configuration registers. As discussed, in some examples, the configuration values in the configuration registers determine the one or more configuration settings according to which printhead 302 operates.

The control unit 138 may then be configured to receive data to be printed from the remote device. Further, the control unit 138 may be configured to transmit data to be printed on the print medium 104 to the printhead 302 according to one or more data signals. In some examples, the control unit 138 may be configured to generate the one or more data signals, and the control unit 138 may be configured to transmit data to the printhead 138 based on the one or more data signals.

Fig. 40 illustrates a flow diagram 4000 of a method for configuring a printhead 302 according to one or more embodiments described herein.

At step 4002, printing apparatus 100 may include means for receiving the one or more configuration settings from a remote computing device, from a user interface, from a storage device, etc., such as control unit 138, processor 2702, I/O device interface unit 2706, etc. As discussed, the one or more configuration settings may determine an operating mode of the printing device 100. Some examples of the one or more configuration settings may include, but are not limited to: the resolution at which the print head 302 is to be used to print content, the content width, the print speed at which the print content is to be used, the contrast and darkness values at which the print content is to be based, the duration of the polygon mirror 2106 being at a constant rotational speed, the mode of operation of the print head 302, pressure, etc.

At step 4004, printing apparatus 100 may include means, such as control unit 138, processor 2702, I/O device interface unit 2706, and the like, for storing the one or more configuration values to the one or more configuration registers. For example, processor 2702 may be configured to cause the configuration values to be stored in the printhead control registers (stored in memory device 2010). The following table shows an exemplary structure of the printhead control registers:

table 8: printhead control register

In an exemplary embodiment, the printhead control register is a 16-bit configuration register. Bit 0 of the printhead control register determines whether the printhead 302 is to operate in raster mode or vector mode. Bits 1 through 3 are reserved for future configuration settings.

Bits 5 and 6 of the printhead control register determine one or more color settings in which the printhead 302 is to operate. The following table shows an example of the one or more color settings:

bit 5	Bit 4	Color setting
			0	0	Black and white
0	1	Gray scale
			1	0	Color of
1	1	Reserving for future use

Table 9: color setting

Bit 6 of the printhead control register is used to pause the printhead 302 in the event that the control unit 138 encounters an error. Bit 7 of the printhead control register is reserved for future use. Bit 8 of the printhead control register is used to configure the power mode of printhead 302. Bit 9 of the printhead control register is used to reset the printhead 302. Bit 10 of the printhead control register indicates the type of print medium 104 installed in the printing apparatus 100. Bits 11 through 13 indicate the type of data received by the printhead 302. For example, the values of bits 11 through 13 may be used to indicate to the printhead 302 that the data in the data buffer corresponds to a new line to be printed on a label or media, corresponds to a new line to be printed on a new label or media, corresponds to a new line to be printed independent of the label or media. Additionally or alternatively, based on the values of bits 11 through 13, the printhead 302 may clear the data buffer. Furthermore, bits 14-15 are reserved for future use.

In an exemplary embodiment, processor 2702 may be configured to transmit configuration values or otherwise allow access to the printhead control registers based on the structure of the printhead control registers and the mode in which printhead 302 is to be configured. For example, if printhead 302 is configured to print color content, processor 2702 may be configured to set bits 4-5 in the printhead control register to "10". Similarly, processor 2702 may be configured to set/reset other bits of the printhead control registers to configure the operational mode of printhead 302.

As another example, processor 2702 may receive configuration settings including information regarding a resolution at which printing device 100 is to be used to print content. In such embodiments, the processor 2702 may be configured to transmit or otherwise make available the resolution configuration values to the printhead 302. More specifically, processor 2702 may be configured to cause the resolution configuration values to be stored in a printhead DPI register. Prior to transmitting the resolution configuration values, the processor 2702 may be configured to determine the resolution configuration values based on the resolution-related information received in the one or more configuration settings and the structure of the printhead DPI registers. The following table shows the structure of an exemplary printhead DPI register:

Table 10: printhead DPI register

The exemplary values in exemplary bits 0-11 of the printhead DPI register are configured to store or otherwise represent the resolution configuration values received from the processor 2702. As discussed, based on resolution-related information included in the one or more configuration settings, the processor 2702 may be configured to determine a resolution configuration value. In an exemplary embodiment, the processor 2702 may be configured to determine the resolution configuration values using a lookup table (such as the following lookup table) based on resolution-related information included in the one or more configuration settings in the configuration settings:

table 11: lookup table for determining resolution configuration values

For example, where the information related to resolution (included in the one or more configuration settings) is 300DPI, the processor 2702 may determine the resolution configuration value as "0x12C". To this end, the processor 2702 may be configured to cause the resolution configuration value "0x12C" to be stored on the printhead DPI register.

As another example, the processor 2702 may receive configuration settings including information related to a print speed at which the printing device 100 is to print content. In such embodiments, processor 2702 may be configured to cause the print speed configuration values to be transmitted or otherwise made available to printhead 302. More specifically, the processor 2702 can be configured to cause the print speed configuration values to be stored in the print speed register. Prior to transmitting the print speed configuration values, the processor 2702 may be configured to determine the print speed configuration values based on the information related to the print speed received in the one or more configuration settings and the structure of the print speed registers. The following table shows an exemplary structure of the print speed register:

Table 12: print speed register

The values in bits 0-8 of the exemplary print speed register are configured to store print speed configuration values received from processor 2702. As discussed, based on the information related to the print speed included in the one or more configuration settings, the processor 2702 may be configured to determine a print speed configuration value. In an exemplary embodiment, the processor 2702 may be configured to determine the print speed configuration values using a lookup table (such as the following lookup table) based on information related to the print speed included in the one or more of the configuration settings:

table 13: lookup table for determining print speed configuration values

For example, where the information related to the print speed (included in the one or more configuration settings) is 100mm/s, the processor 2702 may determine the configuration value to be "001100100". To this end, the processor 2702 may be configured to cause the configuration value "001100100" to be stored in the print speed register. As another example, processor 2702 can be configured to directly convert the print speed (obtained from the one or more configuration settings) to a print speed configuration value. For example, the processor 2702 may be configured to convert the print speed to a binary number, wherein the binary number corresponds to or otherwise represents the configuration value. For example, processor 2702 may convert a print speed of 200mm/s to "011001000", where the value "011001000" corresponds to or otherwise represents the configuration value to be stored on the print speed register.

As another example, processor 2702 may receive configuration settings including information related to darkness and/or contrast settings for which printing device 100 is to be used to print content. In such embodiments, processor 2702 may be configured to transmit or otherwise make available darkness and/or contrast configuration values to printhead 302. More specifically, the processor 2702 may be configured to cause the darkness and/or contrast configuration values to be stored in the darkness and contrast registers. Prior to transmitting the darkness and/or contrast configuration values, the processor 2702 may be configured to determine the darkness and/or contrast configuration values based on information received in the one or more configuration settings relating to the darkness and/or contrast settings and the structure of the darkness and/or contrast registers. The following table shows an exemplary structure of darkness and/or contrast registers:

table 14: darkness and/or contrast register

The exemplary values in bits 0-7 of the darkness and/or contrast register are configured to store or otherwise represent darkness configuration values. Furthermore, the values in bits 8-15 of the darkness and/or contrast register are configured to store or otherwise represent contrast configuration values. As discussed, based on information about darkness and/or contrast settings included in the one or more configuration settings, the processor 2702 may be configured to determine darkness and/or contrast configuration values. In an exemplary embodiment, the processor 2702 may be configured to determine darkness and/or contrast configuration values using a lookup table (such as the following lookup table) based on information related to darkness and/or contrast settings included in the one or more configuration settings:

Darkness setting	Configuration value	Contrast setting	Configuration value
				100％	“0x64”	100％	“0x64”
0％	“0x9C”	0％	“0x9C”

Table 15: lookup table for determining darkness and/or contrast configuration values

For example, where the information about the darkness settings (included in the one or more configuration settings) is 100%, the processor 2702 may determine the configuration value to be "0x64". To this end, the processor 2702 may be configured to cause the configuration value "0x64" to be stored in a darkness and/or contrast register.

As another example, the processor 2702 may receive configuration settings including information related to the rotational overrun of the polygonal mirror. In some examples, the polygon mirror rotation timeout corresponds to a duration after which the polygon mirror 2106 stops rotating or is caused to reduce the rotational speed in the event that a new print job/data is not received or otherwise detected by the printhead 302. In such embodiments, the processor 2702 may be configured to transmit or otherwise make available rotational speed configuration values to the printhead 302. More specifically, the processor 2702 may be configured to cause the rotational speed configuration values to be stored in a mirror overrun register. Prior to transmitting the rotational speed configuration values, the processor 2702 may be configured to determine the rotational speed configuration values based on information received in the one or more configuration settings regarding when the polygon mirror rotates beyond and the structure of the mirror overrun register. The following table shows an exemplary structure of the mirror overrun register:

Table 16: mirror overrun register

The exemplary values in bits 0-15 of the mirror overrun register are configured to store or otherwise represent rotational speed configuration values. As discussed, based on information about the rotational overrun of the polygon mirror included in the one or more configuration settings, the processor 2702 may be configured to determine a rotational speed configuration value. In an exemplary embodiment, the processor 2702 may be configured to determine the rotational speed configuration values using a lookup table (such as the following lookup table) based on information relating to the polygon mirror rotational timeout included in the one or more of the configuration settings:

polygonal mirror rotation timeout	Rotational speed configuration value
		120 seconds	0x78
Infinite seconds	0xFFFF

Table 17: lookup table for determining rotational speed configuration values

For example, where the information about the polygon mirror rotation timeout (included in the one or more configuration settings) is 120 seconds, the processor 2702 may determine the configuration value to be "0x78". To this end, the processor 2702 may be configured to store the configuration value "0x78" in the mirror overrun register.

Similarly, the processor 2702 may be configured to transmit other configuration values to other configuration registers based on respective look-up tables, predetermined values, default settings, and the like. In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to determining the configuration values based on the respective lookup tables. In an exemplary embodiment, the processor 2702 may determine the configuration values directly from the one or more configuration settings. Further, in some examples, the configuration values depicted in the lookup tables (i.e., tables 11, 13, 15, and 17) are exemplary values, and the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the depicted configuration values.

In some examples, printhead 302 may print content on print medium 104 based on configuration values in the one or more configuration registers. For example, based on the darkness configuration values, the printhead 302 may be configured to print dark content on the print medium 104. As another example, the printhead 302 may be configured to determine the rotational speed of the polygon mirror 2106 based on the one or more configuration values stored in the one or more configuration registers.

In some examples, the content is printed on the print medium using a plurality of writing laser beams. The use of multiple writing laser beams may enable printing device 100 to operate at multiple printing speeds and/or support multiple printing resolutions. Further, the printing apparatus 100 may modify the count of the writing laser beams to achieve different resolutions and different printing speeds. One such method of printing content using multiple wired laser beams is described in connection with fig. 32.

Fig. 32 illustrates a flow diagram 3200 of a method for printing content in print medium 104 according to one or more embodiments described herein.

At step 3202, printing apparatus 100 may include means, such as control unit 138, processor 2702, I/O device interface unit 2706, and the like, for receiving the one or more configuration settings associated with printing apparatus 100. In an exemplary embodiment, I/O device interface unit 2706 may receive the one or more configuration settings associated with printing apparatus 100 via UI 140. In some examples, the one or more configuration settings may include a print resolution to be used to print content on the print medium 104, and a speed at which the print medium 104 is to traverse along a print path, as discussed. For example, I/O device interface unit 2706 may receive the one or more configuration settings as 600DPI (dots per inch) at 6IPS (inches per second). In some examples, 600DPI corresponds to a print resolution to be used to print content on print medium 104. Further, 6IPS corresponds to a speed at which the print medium 104 is to traverse along the print path. In addition, the one or more configuration settings may include information regarding a count of write laser beams to be used to write content on the print medium 104. For example, the one or more configuration settings may specify that the count of the writing laser beams used to write the content is three.

At step 3204, printing apparatus 100 may include means for determining one or more printhead parameters based on the one or more configuration parameters, such as control unit 138, processor 2702, I/O device interface unit 2706, print operation control unit 2716, and the like. For example, the print operation control unit 2716 may determine the rotation speed at which the polygon mirror 2106 rotates. In some examples, print operation control unit 2716 may be configured to determine a rotational speed of polygon mirror 2106 based on the one or more configuration settings (resolution and media traverse speed). In some examples, the print operation control unit 2716 may be configured to determine the rotational speed of the polygon mirror 2106 using the following equation.

Wherein, the liquid crystal display device comprises a liquid crystal display device,

D _r ＝r _L /r _p ；

ω = rotational speed of the polygon mirror;

r _p =print resolution;

r _L =writing laser beam resolution;

D _r data redundancy (number of adjacent laser lines for printing the same content);

v = speed at which print medium 104 traverses;

n _L a count of the writing laser beam for writing the content on the printing medium 104;

n=number of polygonal faces; and

N _s =the number of faces to skip after each scan face.

Equation 2 assumes that adjacent print lines are spaced apart from each other by the write laser beam resolution.

Considering that the medium traverse speed is 6IPS, the printing resolution is 600DPI, and the writing laser beam resolution is 600DPI, the printing operation control unit 2716 may be configured to determine the data redundancy as 1. Accordingly, the print operation control unit 2716 may determine that three writing laser beams are configured to simultaneously print individual content on the print medium 104. In addition, the printing operation control unit 2716 may determine the rotational speed of the polygon mirror 2106 to 9000rpm based on equation 2, considering that no polygon mirror 2106 is skipped (i.e., all eight sides of the polygon mirror 2106 are used for printing content) at the time of printing content.

At step 3206, printing apparatus 100 may include means, such as control unit 138, processor 2702, I/O device interface unit 2706, print operation control unit 2716, and the like, for causing one or more laser sources 2102 to generate a writing laser beam (depicted by 2604) and a pre-excitation laser beam (depicted by 2606) when polygon mirror 2106 is rotated at a determined rotational speed. In some examples, one or more laser sources 2102 may be configured to generate three writing laser beams having a predetermined laser resolution. For example, one or more laser sources 2102 may be configured to generate three writing laser beams with a 600DPI printing resolution.

Since the polygon mirror 2106 rotates at 9000rpm and the three writing laser beams have a laser resolution of 600DPI, a printing resolution of 600DPI and a printing speed of 6IPS are achieved. In some examples, the plurality of writing laser beams may be configured to write the same content on the print medium 104 in order to modify the print resolution of the print content and the print medium traverse speed without modifying the polygon rotation speed. For example, to achieve a resolution of 200DPI at a medium traverse speed of 6IPS, the print operation control unit 2716 may be configured to determine data redundancy as 3. Accordingly, the print operation control unit 2716 may determine that three writing laser beams may be configured to write the same content on the print medium 104 at the same time. For this reason, when the polygon mirror 2106 rotates at 9000rpm and three writing laser beams are configured to write the same content, a resolution of 200DPI under 6IPS is achieved.

As another example, to achieve a printing resolution of 600DPI and a printing speed of 12IPS, the printing operation control unit 2716 may be configured to determine the polygon mirror 2106 to be 18000rpm. Thus, when the polygon mirror 2106 rotates at 18000rpm and three writing laser beams are configured to write content on the print medium 104, a print resolution of 600dpi under 12IPS is achieved. In order to modify the print resolution at the same print speed, the print operation control unit 2716 may be configured to modify the data redundancy. As discussed, the data redundancy may determine a count of write laser beams used to write the same content on the print medium 104. For example, in order to achieve a print resolution of 200DPI at the same print speed 12IPS, the print operation control unit 2716 may be configured to modify the data redundancy to 3. Thus, the three writing laser beams may be configured to write the same content on the print medium 104.

In some examples, during configuration of the printing apparatus, the polygon mirror speeds to be used and the counts of the writing laser beams corresponding to the various printing speeds and resolutions are stored in advance in the memory of the printing apparatus 100. In alternative embodiments, the polygon mirror speed and the count of the writing laser beam may be pre-stored in the memory of the printhead.

In an additional embodiment, to achieve a resolution of 300DPI at a media traverse speed of 10IPS, the print operation control unit 2716 may be configured to determine data redundancy as 2. Accordingly, the print operation control unit 2716 may determine that two writing laser beams may be configured to simultaneously write the same content on the print medium 104. Further, the third writing laser beam may be configured to write different content in the print medium. For this reason, the print operation control unit 2716 may determine that the rotational speed of the polygon mirror is 15000rpm. Accordingly, in order to achieve a printing resolution of 300DPI under 10IPS, the printing operation control unit 2716 may be configured to rotate the polygon mirror at 15000rpm. Further, the print operation control unit 2716 may be configured to cause two writing laser beams to print the same content on the print medium 104.

Similarly, the print operation control unit 716 may be configured to modify one or more printhead parameters to achieve different print resolutions and print speeds.

Fig. 33 illustrates another method 3300 for printing content on print medium 104, in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein. At step 3302, printing apparatus 100 may include means, such as control unit 138, processor 2702, I/O device interface unit 2706, and the like, for receiving the one or more configuration settings associated with printing apparatus 100. At step 3304, printing apparatus 100 may include means, such as control unit 138, processor 2702, I/O device interface unit 2706, print operation control unit 2716, and the like, for determining one or more printhead parameters based on the one or more configuration settings. At step 3306, printing apparatus 100 may include means, such as control unit 138, processor 2702, I/O device interface unit 2706, print operation control unit 2716, and the like, for causing one or more laser sources 2102 to generate a writing laser beam (depicted by 2604) and a pre-excitation laser beam (depicted by 2606) when polygon mirror 2106 is rotated at a determined rotational speed. Additionally or alternatively, the print operation control unit 2716 may be configured to control activation and/or deactivation of the one or more laser sources based on the face of the polygon mirror 2106 to be skipped (determined from equation 2). In some examples, a single laser source 2102 may be used to generate the writing laser beam (depicted by 2604) and the pre-excitation laser beam (depicted by 2606) as the polygon mirror 2106 rotates at a determined rotational speed.

Fig. 41 shows a flow chart 4100 of a method of synchronization between the printhead 302 and the control unit 138.

At step 4102, the printing apparatus 100 may include means for determining a current rotational speed of the polygon mirror 2106, such as the printhead 302, the controller 2008, the laser subsystem control unit 2014, the SOL detector 2004, and the like. As discussed, the rotational speed of the polygon mirror 2106 is modified based on the one or more configuration settings. For example, as described in fig. 32 and 33, the rotation speed of the polygon mirror 2106 is modified based on the determined printing resolution and printing speed. Further, fig. 32 and 33 depict exemplary methods for modifying the rotational speed of the polygonal mirror that may occur prior to or concurrent with the steps of fig. 41.

To this end, in an exemplary embodiment, the controller 2008 may be configured to determine the current rotational speed of the polygonal mirror 2106 based on one or more signal parameters associated with the SOL signal received from the SOL detector 2004. As discussed, SOL detector 2004 may be configured to generate pulses when SOL detector 2004 receives a writing laser beam. The pulse corresponds to the SOL signal. Further, as discussed, SOL detector 2004 receives the writing laser beam reflected by each face of polygonal mirror 2106 as polygonal mirror 2106 rotates. Accordingly, based on the frequency of the SOL signal, the controller 2008 may be configured to determine the rotational speed of the polygon mirror 2106. In an exemplary embodiment, the controller 2008 may be configured to determine the rotational speed of the polygon mirror 2106 using the following equation:

nr=the number of pulses received from SOL detector 2004 per minute; and is also provided with

Nf=the number of facets in the polygon mirror 2106.

At step 4104, printing apparatus 100 can include means, such as print head 302, controller 2008, etc., for determining whether the current rotational speed of polygon mirror 2106 is the same speed as the rotational speed of polygon mirror 2106 (determined in flowcharts 3200 and 3300) when print head 302 is to print content. In the case where the controller 2008 determines that the current rotation speed of the polygon mirror 2106 is the same as the rotation speed of the polygon mirror 2106 when the print head 302 is to print content, the controller 2008 performs step 4106. However, in the event that the controller 2008 determines that the current rotational speed is not the same as the rotational speed of the polygon mirror 2106 at which the print head 302 must print content, the controller 2008 may be configured to repeat step 4102.

At step 4106, printing apparatus 100 may include means, such as printhead 302, controller 2008, synchronization unit 2016, etc., for generating a laser printhead ready (LPH RDY N) signal and transmitting the LPH RDY N signal to control unit 138. More specifically, the synchronization unit 2016 may be configured to modify the state of the LPH_RDY_N pin on the printhead interface. For example, the synchronization unit 2016 may be configured to modify the state of the pin LPH RDY N to "0".

At step 4108, printing apparatus 100 can include means, such as printhead 302, controller 2008, synchronization unit 2016, and the like, for determining whether a SOL signal has been received from SOL detector 2004. As discussed, the writing laser may be swept across one face of the polygon mirror 2106 (as the polygon mirror 2106 rotates) to print a line on the print medium 104. Further, as discussed, where the position of the writing laser beam transitions between the two faces of the polygon mirror 2106, the writing laser beam is directed to the SOL detector 2004. Thus, the SOL signal indicates that the printhead 302 is ready to print a new line on the print medium 104. If the synchronization unit 2016 determines that a SOL signal is received, the synchronization unit may be configured to perform step 4109. However, if the synchronization unit 2016 determines that the SOL signal is not received, the synchronization unit 2016 may be configured to repeat step 4110 until the SOL signal is received.

At step 4110, the printing device 100 may include means for generating a Laser position (laser_pos) signal, such as the printhead 302, the controller 2008, the synchronization unit 2016, and the like. In an exemplary embodiment, the synchronization unit 2016 may be configured to modify the state of a laser_pos pin in the printhead interface to indicate the generation of a laser_pos signal. For example, the synchronization unit 2016 may change the state of the laser_pos signal to "1". In some examples, a state "1" of the laser_pos signal may indicate that the writing Laser beam is located at a blanking position on the face of polygonal mirror 2106. That is, in some examples, the writing laser beam may reflect from a blanking position (on the face of polygonal mirror 2106) to a position other than print medium 104. In some examples, as the polygon mirror 2106 rotates, the angle of incidence of the writing laser beam changes. Thus, the write laser beam may be swept according to the angle of incidence of the write laser beam on the polygonal mirror 2106. Furthermore, the angle of incidence is determined based on the position on the polygonal mirror from which the writing laser beam is reflected. As the polygon mirror rotates, the position from which the writing laser beam is reflected changes. Thus, a blanking position and a non-blanking position on the polygon mirror 2106 are defined. For example, the writing laser beam may reflect from the blanking position to SOL detector 2004. Therefore, when the writing laser beam is reflected from the blanking position on the face of the polygon mirror 2106, no content is printed. In some examples, the face of the polygonal mirror 2106 can include a plurality of blanking positions. Further, the duration during which the writing laser beam is reflected from the plurality of blanking positions corresponds to a blanking period. During the blanking period, no content is printed on the print medium 104 (because the writing laser beam is not directed onto the print medium 104). In some examples, the blanking period may indicate that the printhead 302 is ready to print content on the print medium 104. In some examples, the blanking period is determined from the rotational speed of the polygon mirror 2106. For example, and in some examples, the blanking period is inversely proportional to the rotational speed of the polygon mirror 2106.

In an exemplary embodiment, the position on polygonal mirror 2106 that facilitates reflection of the writing laser beam on print medium 104 corresponds to a non-blanking position. Furthermore, the duration of time during which the writing laser beam is reflected from the non-blanking position corresponds to a non-blanking period. During the non-blanking period, content is printed on the print medium 104 (because the writing laser beam is directed onto the print medium 104).

At step 4112, the printing device 100 may include means, such as the printhead 302, the controller 2008, the synchronization unit 2016, and the like, for determining whether a PRINT ready (RDY 2 PRINT) signal is received from the control unit 138 in response to a change in the state of the laser_pos signal. In an exemplary embodiment, the RDY2PRINT signal indicates that the control unit 138 has traversed the PRINT medium 104 a single line. In an exemplary embodiment, the size of a single line is determined based on the resolution with which the printing device 100 is to print content on the print medium 104. For example, if the resolution is 600dpi, the size of a single line is 0.01667 inches. Thus, the control unit 138 may be configured to traverse the print medium 104 by 0.01667 inches. Control unit 138 may then be configured to generate and transmit (or otherwise indicate) an RDY2PRINT signal to printhead 302. Additionally or alternatively, the control unit 138 may be configured to modify the state of the RDY2PRINT pin on the printhead interface.

In some examples, the synchronization unit 2016 may be configured to read the RDY2PRINT pin. Reading the RDY2PRINT pin corresponds to receiving the RDY2PRINT signal. If the synchronization unit 2016 determines that RDY2PRINT is received, the synchronization unit 2016 may be configured to perform step 4114. However, if the synchronization unit 2016 determines that it has not received the RDY2PRINT signal, the synchronization unit 2016 may be configured to repeat step 4112 until the RDY2PRINT signal is received.

At step 4114, the printing device 100 may include means, such as the printhead 302, the controller 2008, the synchronization unit 2016, and the like, for determining whether the blanking period has expired. If the synchronization unit 2016 determines that the blanking period has expired, the synchronization unit 2016 may be configured to perform step 4116. However, if the synchronization unit 2016 determines that the blanking period has not expired, the synchronization unit 2016 may be configured to repeat step 4114 until the blanking period expires.

At step 4116, the printing device 100 may include means for modifying the state of the laser_pos signal to "0", such as the printhead 302, the controller 2008, the synchronization unit 2016, and the like. The state "0" of the laser_pos signal indicates the start of the non-blanking period.

At step 4116, the printing device 100 may include means, such as the printhead 302, the controller 2008, the synchronization unit 2016, and the like, for modifying the state of a LASER print (laser_print) signal to "1" in response to modifying the laser_pos signal to a state of "0". A state "1" of the laser_print signal indicates that content is being printed on the print medium 104 using the write Laser beam.

Fig. 42 shows a flow chart 4200 of another method of synchronization between the printhead 302 and the control unit 138.

At step 4202, printing apparatus 100 may include means, such as control unit 138, processor 2702, printhead synchronization unit 2722, etc., for determining whether an LPH RDY N signal from printhead 302 is received. In an exemplary embodiment, the LPH RDY N signal indicates that the polygon mirror 2106 is rotating at a determined rotational speed. For example, the printhead synchronization unit 2722 may be configured to receive a state "0" of the LPH RDY N signal. As discussed, a state "0" of the LPH RDY N signal indicates that the rotational speed of the polygon mirror 2106 has reached a determined rotational speed, such as the rotational speed determined in fig. 32 and 33. If the printhead synchronization unit 2722 determines that LPH RDY N is not received, the printhead synchronization unit 2722 may be configured to repeat step 4202 until LPH RDY N is received. However, if the printhead synchronization unit 2722 determines that LPH RDY N is received, the printhead synchronization unit 2722 may be configured to perform step 4204.

At step 4204, the printing apparatus 100 may include means for receiving a laser_pos signal from the printhead 302, such as the control unit 138, the processor 2702, the printhead synchronization unit 2722, and the like. In an exemplary embodiment, the laser_pos signal indicates the start of a blanking period. For example, the printhead synchronization unit 2722 may be configured to receive a status "1" of the laser_pos signal indicating the start of the blanking period.

At step 4206, printing apparatus 100 may include means, such as control unit 138, processor 2702, printhead synchronization unit 2722, I/O device interface unit 2706, etc., for causing first roller 132 and second roller 134 to traverse print medium 104 one line in response to receiving state "0" of the LPH RDY N signal and state "1" of the laser_pos signal. More specifically, I/O device interface unit 2706 may cause first roller 132 and second roller 134 to move print medium 104 a distance determined based on the print resolution (as discussed in step 4108).

At step 4208, printing device 100 may include means, such as control unit 138, processor 2702, printhead synchronization unit 2722, etc., for transmitting an RDY2PRINT signal to printhead 302. More specifically, the printhead synchronization unit 2722 is configured to transmit a state "1" of the RDY2PRINT signal.

Fig. 43 is a timing diagram 4300 illustrating synchronization between the printhead 302 and the control unit 138 according to one or more embodiments described herein.

Timing diagram 4300 includes clock signal 4302, RDY2Print signal 4304, LPH_RDY_N signal 4306, LASER_POS signal 4308, and laser_print signal 4310. As can be seen from timing diagram 4300, at time T1, lph_rdy_n signal 4306 is set to state "0". As discussed, the LPH RDY N signal 4306 indicates that the polygon mirror 2106 is rotating at a determined rotational speed. At time T2, the laser_pos signal 4308 is set to state "1". As discussed, the laser_pos signal 4308 indicates the beginning and/or end of the blanking period (depicted by 4312). At time T3, RDY2PRINT signal 4306 is set to state "1". The control unit 138 is configured to transmit the RDY2PRINT signal 4306 to the printhead 302. As discussed, the RDY2PRINT signal indicates that the PRINT medium 104 traversed a predetermined distance (e.g., one dot size and/or one line). At time T4, the laser_print signal 4310 is set to a state "1" indicating printing of one line on the print medium 104.

Fig. 44 shows a flowchart 4400 of a method of data synchronization between the printhead 302 and the control unit 138.

At step 4402, the printing apparatus 100 may include means, such as a control unit 138, a processor 2702, a data synchronization unit 2724, etc., for receiving data to be printed from a remote device, such as a remote computer, a remote data source, a network, etc. In an exemplary embodiment, the received data includes segmented data, where each segmented data corresponds to a portion of the data to be printed in a single line.

At step 4406, printing apparatus 100 may include means, such as control unit 138, processor 2702, data synchronization unit 2724, etc., for generating one or more data packets (to be transmitted to printhead 302 for printing) based on the segment data. Each segment data is included in the one or more data packets. Further, the data synchronization unit 2724 may determine a count of data packets to be transmitted to the printhead in order to transmit the segment data. The data synchronization unit 2724 may be configured to determine the count of the one or more data packets based on the print resolution, the color scheme to be used for the print data, the count of bits included in a single data packet. In another embodiment, the data synchronization unit 2724 may be configured to determine the count of the one or more data packets based on a lookup table (such as the following lookup table):

DPI	600	300	203	600	300	203
							Width of (L)	4.25	4.25	4.25	4.25	4.25	4.25
Mode	BW	BW	BW	Gray scale	Gray scale	Gray scale
							# per rowNumber of bits	2550	1275	863	20400	10200	6904
#32b word	80	40	27	638	319	216
							Bit stuffing	10	5	1	16	8	8
Total number of bits transmitted	2560	1280	864	20416	10208	6912

Table 18: lookup table for determining counts of one or more data packets

It can be observed from the exemplary look-up table that to print content at 600dpi, the fragment data is configured to be transmitted to the printhead 302 in 80 data packets. For another example, to print content at 203dpi, the segment data is configured to be transmitted in 27 data packets. In some examples, one or more portions of the segmented data are distributed in one or more data packets based on the location on the print medium 104 where the portion of the segmented data is to be printed and the write laser sweep direction. In some examples, the write laser sweep direction corresponds to a direction along which the write laser sweeps the print medium 104. In one example, the write laser beam may sweep the print medium 104 from left to right. As another example, the write laser beam may sweep the print medium 104 from right to left.

For example, if the write laser beam sweeps the print medium 104 from left to right and the portion of the segment data is to be printed at the leftmost location (in the write laser sweep direction), the portion of the segment data is included in the first or earlier data packet (to be transmitted to the printhead 302). Similarly, if another portion of the segment data is to be printed at the far right position (in the write laser sweep direction), then the other portion of the segment data is included in the last or later data packet (to be transmitted to the printhead 302).

Fig. 45 is a schematic diagram 4500 illustrating a distribution of the one or more portions of segmented data in the one or more data packets according to one or more embodiments described herein.

Schematic 4500 includes a write laser sweep direction 4502 and one or more data packets 4504. In one example, one or more data packets 4504 are arranged in the order in which the one or more data packets are to be printed on print medium 104. For example, the portion of the segment data included in the first data packet 4504a is printed at the rightmost position on the print medium 104. Accordingly, the data synchronization unit 2724 may be configured to transmit the first data packet 4504a before transmitting any other data packet of the one or more data packets. As another example, another portion of the segment data that is included in data packet 4504b is to be printed at the leftmost location on print medium 104. Thus, data packet 4504b corresponds to the last data packet transmitted to printhead 302. Referring back to fig. 44, at step 4408, the printing apparatus 100 may include means for modifying the state of a frame synchronization (F-Sync) signal, such as the control unit 138, the processor 2702, the data synchronization unit 2724, and the like. In an exemplary embodiment, the F-Sync signal may indicate to the print head 302 that the control unit 138 is transmitting data to be printed on a label of the print medium 104. In an exemplary embodiment, the data synchronization unit 2724 may be configured to modify the state of the F-Sync signal to "0," which may indicate to the printhead 302 that the control unit 138 is transmitting data to be printed on a label of the print medium 104.

Then, at step 4410, the printing apparatus 100 may include means for modifying the state of a line synchronization (L-Sync) signal, such as the control unit 138, the processor 2702, the data synchronization unit 2724, and the like. In an exemplary embodiment, the L-Sync signal may indicate to the print head 302 that the control unit 138 is transmitting segment data to be printed on a label of the print medium 104. As discussed, the segment data corresponds to a portion of data to be printed in a single line on the print medium 104. In an exemplary embodiment, the data synchronization unit 2724 may be configured to modify the state of the L-Sync signal to "0," which may indicate to the printhead 302 that the control unit 138 is transmitting segmented data.

When the states of the F-Sync signal and the L-Sync signal are "0", the printing apparatus 100 may include means for transmitting the segment data to the printhead 302, such as the control unit 138, the processor 2702, the data synchronization unit 2724, and the like, at step 4412. After the transmission of the segment data, the printing apparatus 100 may include means, such as the control unit 138, the processor 2702, the data synchronization unit 2724, etc., for modifying the state of the L-Sync signal to "1" to indicate that the transmission of the segment data (i.e., the data to be printed in lines on the printing medium 104) is completed, at step 4414.

At step 4416, the printing apparatus 100 may include means, such as the control unit 138, the processor 2702, the data synchronization unit 2724, etc., for determining whether data to be printed on a label of the print medium 104 has been transmitted to the printhead 302. If the data synchronization unit 2724 determines that complete data has been transferred to the printhead 302, the data synchronization unit 2724 may be configured to perform step 4418. However, if the data synchronization unit 2724 determines that complete data has not been transmitted, the data synchronization unit 2724 may be configured to repeat step 4412.

At step 4418, the printing apparatus 100 may include means, such as the control unit 138, the processor 2702, the data synchronization unit 2724, etc., for modifying the state of the F-Sync signal to "1" to indicate the end of transmission of data (i.e., complete data to be printed on the label of the print medium 104).

Fig. 46 is a timing diagram 4600 illustrating data synchronization between printhead 302 and control unit 138 in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein. The timing diagram 4600 includes a clock signal 4602, a data bus 4604, an L-Sync signal 4606, and an F-Sync signal 4608.

It can be observed that at time T1, L-sync signal 4606 and F-sync signal 4608 are in state "0". Further, the L-sync signal 4606 may be observed to be in state "0" until time T2. Between times T1 and T2, data bus 4604 transmits the segment data to printhead 302 (depicted by 4610). After transmission of the segment data, the L-Sync signal 4606 is in state "1" (depicted by 4612), however, the F-Sync signal 4608 is in state "0". To this end, such states of L-sync 4606 and F-sync signal 4608 indicate that control unit 138 has additional data to be transmitted to printhead 302.

In some examples, the states of the L-Sync signal and the F-Sync signal may indicate a data transfer mode between the control unit 138 and the printhead 302. The following exemplary table shows the data transfer modes between the control unit 138 and the printhead 302:

l-sync signal	F-sync signal	Data transmission mode
			0	0	Beginning of transmitting segmented data
1	0	End of transmission of segmented data
			0	1	Program mode
1	1	End of data transmission

Table 19: data transfer mode between control unit and print head

In an exemplary embodiment and in the case where the L-Sync signal is "0" and the F-Sync signal is "1", the transmitted data corresponds to firmware data. To this end, the control unit 138 may update the firmware of the printhead 302 with the aforementioned data patterns.

In some examples, it may be desirable to save power by modifying the rotational speed of polygon mirror 2106 when printhead 302 does not receive any data to print. Modifying the rotational speed of the polygon mirror 2106 can include reducing the rotational speed of the polygon mirror 2106. As another example, modifying the rotational speed of the polygon mirror 2106 can include stopping the rotation of the polygon mirror 2106. One such method of operating the printhead 302 is described in connection with fig. 47.

Fig. 47 illustrates a flow chart 4700 of a method for operating printhead 302 according to one or more embodiments described herein.

At step 4702, the printing device 100 includes means for determining the status of the L-Sync signal and the F-Sync signal, such as the printhead 302, the controller 2008, the laser subsystem control unit 2014, and the like. In an exemplary embodiment, the laser subsystem control unit 2014 may be configured to determine the status of the L-Sync signal and the F-Sync signal from the printhead interface.

At step 4704, the printing apparatus 100 includes means, such as the printhead 302, the controller 2008, the laser subsystem control unit 2014, etc., for determining whether the control unit 138 is transmitting data (data to be printed on the print medium 104) based on the states of the L-Sync signal and the F-Sync signal. For example, referring to table 19, if the laser subsystem control unit 2014 determines that the state of the L-Sync signal is "1" and the F-Sync signal is "1", the laser subsystem control unit 2014 may determine that the control unit 138 is not transmitting any data to the printhead 302. Accordingly, the laser subsystem control unit 2014 may perform step 4706. However, if the laser subsystem control unit 2014 determines that the control unit 138 is transmitting data to the printhead 302, the laser subsystem control unit 2014 may be configured to repeat step 4702.

At step 4706, the printing apparatus 100 includes means for determining whether a polygon mirror rotation timeout has elapsed, such as the printhead 302, the controller 2008, the laser subsystem control unit 2014, and the like. The laser subsystem control unit 2014 may be configured to determine a polygon mirror rotation timeout from the mirror overrun register. If the laser subsystem control unit 2014 determines that the polygon mirror rotation timeout has elapsed, the laser subsystem control unit 2014 may be configured to perform step 4708. However, if the laser subsystem control unit 2014 determines that the polygon mirror rotation timeout has not expired, the laser subsystem control unit 2014 may be configured to repeat step 4702.

At step 4708, the printing device 100 includes means for reducing the rotational speed of the polygon mirror 2106, such as the printhead 302, controller 2008, laser subsystem control unit 2014, and the like. At step 4710, the printing device 100 includes means for determining the status of the L-Sync signal and the F-Sync signal, such as the printhead 302, the controller 2008, the laser subsystem control unit 2014, and the like. At step 4712, the printing apparatus 100 includes means, such as the printhead 302, the controller 2008, the laser subsystem control unit 2014, etc., for determining whether the control unit 138 is transmitting data (data to be printed on the print medium 104) based on the states of the L-Sync signal and the F-Sync signal. If the laser subsystem control unit 2014 determines that the control unit 138 is transmitting data to the printhead 302, the laser subsystem control unit 2014 may be configured to perform step 4714. However, if the laser subsystem control unit 2014 determines that the control unit 138 is not transmitting data to the printhead 302, the laser subsystem control unit 2014 may be configured to perform step 4716.

At step 4714, the printing apparatus 100 includes means for increasing the rotational speed of the polygon mirror 2106 to a determined rotational speed (fig. 32 and 33), such as the printhead 302, the controller 2008, the laser subsystem control unit 2014, and the like. At step 4716, the printing apparatus 100 includes means for determining whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed, such as the printhead 302, the controller 2008, the laser subsystem control unit 2014, and the like. If the laser subsystem control unit 2014 determines that the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the laser subsystem control unit 2014 may be configured to perform step 4718. However, if the laser subsystem control unit 2014 determines that the predetermined period of time has not elapsed, the laser subsystem control unit 2014 may be configured to perform the arrangement 4712 as a repeated step.

At step 4718, the printing apparatus 100 includes means for stopping rotation of the polygon mirror 2106, such as the printhead 302, controller 2008, laser subsystem control unit 2014, and the like.

In some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to reducing the rotational speed of the polygon mirror 2106 and then stopping the polygon mirror 2106. In an exemplary embodiment, if it is determined at step 4706 that the polygon mirror rotation timeout has elapsed, the laser subsystem control unit 2014 may be configured to directly stop the polygon mirror. Alternatively or additionally, if it is determined that the control unit is transmitting data, the speed of the polygon mirror may be increased at step 4706.

As described herein, the print medium is configured to traverse along the print path and past the printheads throughout operation. As a result of the continuous traversal and in some examples, the printed content may exhibit skew. The embodiments shown herein disclose one or more methods in which the image or content is pre-compensated for skew. For example, a skew may be introduced in the original image or content in order to compensate for the skew. The systems and methods herein may determine skew based on one or more marks on a print medium, a traverse speed, results from a validator, and so forth. In other examples, the speed of traversal may also be altered. In some examples, fig. 34-38 illustrate methods for compensating for skew that may be introduced in print medium 104.

Fig. 34 is a flow chart 3400 illustrating another method for printing content on print medium 104 in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein.

At step 3402, printing apparatus 100 may include means, such as control unit 138, processor 2702, I/O device interface unit 2706, and the like, for receiving the one or more configuration settings associated with printing apparatus 100. In an exemplary embodiment, I/O device interface unit 2706 may receive the one or more configuration settings associated with printing apparatus 100 via UI 140. In some examples, the one or more configuration settings may include a resolution to be used to print content on the print medium 104, and a speed at which the print medium 104 is to traverse along a print path, as discussed. Additionally or alternatively, the one or more configuration settings may include a count of write laser beams to be used to print content on the print medium 104. For example, I/O device interface unit 2706 may receive the one or more configuration settings as 600DPI (dots per inch) at 6IPS (inches per second) and three write laser beams to be used to print content on print medium 104.

At step 3404, the printing apparatus 100 may include means, such as the control unit 138, the processor 2702, the I/O device interface unit 2706, the print operation control unit 2716, and the like, for determining a measure of skew that may be introduced in the print content based on the one or more configuration settings of the printer (received in step 3402). For example, the print operation control unit 2716 may be configured to determine a measure of skew based on the print resolution, the media traverse speed, and the count of write laser beams to be used to print content on the print medium 104. Additionally or alternatively, the print operation control unit 2716 may determine a measure of skew based on the one or more print medium characteristics (see fig. 28). As discussed, the one or more print media characteristics may include, but are not limited to, a width of the print media 104, a type of the print media 104, a thickness of the print media 104, and the like. Determining a measure of skew is further described in connection with fig. 35.

At step 3406, the printing apparatus 100 may include means for receiving content to be printed, such as a control unit 138, a processor 2702, an I/O device interface unit 2706, a print operation control unit 2716, and the like. In some examples, I/O device interface unit 2706 may receive content from a remote computer. In another embodiment, the I/O device interface unit 308 may receive content (to be printed) from the UI 140.

At step 3408, the printing apparatus 100 may include means for modifying the received content to compensate for the measure of skew (determined in step 3404), such as a control unit 138, a processor 2702, an I/O device interface unit 2706, a print operation control unit 2716, an image processing unit 2718, and the like. The method of modifying content is further described in connection with fig. 37.

Fig. 35 illustrates a flow diagram 3500 of a method for determining a measure of skew that can be introduced in printed content, in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein.

At step 3502, the printing apparatus 100 can include means for determining a dot size based on a resolution to be used for printing content on the print media 104, such as a control unit 138, a processor 2702, an I/O device interface unit 2706, a print operation control unit 2716, and the like. In some examples, print operation control unit 2716 may determine the dot size using the following formula:

for example, if the resolution is 203DPI, the print operation control unit 2716 may determine the dot size to be 0.005 inches. As another example, the print operation control unit 2716 may determine the dot size to be 0.0016 inches at a resolution of 600 DPI. In some examples, the print operation control unit 2716 may not determine the dot size using equation 4. In an exemplary embodiment, the print operation control unit 2716 may determine the dot size using the following lookup table:

Resolution ratio	200	300	600
				Dot size	0.125	0.085	0.042

Table 3: look-up table showing dot size and corresponding resolution。

Alternatively or additionally, the dot size may be determined by other means, such as by a validator, scanner, image and/or other image-based test.

At step 3504, the printing apparatus 100 can include means, such as the control unit 138, the processor 2702, the I/O device interface unit 2706, the print operation control unit 2716, and the like, for determining a measure of skew based on the dot size (determined in step 3502), the width of the print medium 104 (see fig. 28), and the count of the write laser beams. In some examples, the print operation control unit 2716 may determine the skew by using the following formula:

measurement of skew=tan (size of one dot×count of the first laser beam/((width of the printing medium 104)) (5)

For example, if the count of the writing laser beams for printing content is one, the width of the print medium 104 is 4.25 inches, and the dot size is 0.0016 inches, the measure of skew is 0.07 degrees. As another example, if the count of the writing laser beams for printing content is one, the width of the print medium 104 is 4.25 inches, and the dot size is 0.005 inches, the measure of skew is 0.02 degrees.

In some examples, the measure of skew increases as the count of the write laser beams used to print content on the print medium 104 increases. For example, when a single line is printed on the print medium 104 with a plurality of writing laser beams, the offset angle increases as described in fig. 36A, 36B, and 36C. 36A, 36B, and 36C are diagrams illustrating a relationship between a count of a write laser beam and a measure of deflection according to one or more embodiments described herein.

Referring to fig. 36A, the printhead 302 can sweep a single writing laser beam 3602a across the width of the print medium 104. As the print medium 104 traverses along the print path, a single writing laser beam 3602a may sweep the width of the print medium 104 with some skew to generate skewed print content 3604. The skew may correspond to an angle between an imaginary line (depicted by 3606) representing a line swept by a single writing laser beam and an imaginary line (depicted by 3608) depicting a width of the print medium 104. Further, in fig. 36A, the offset angle is determined based on equation 5.

Referring to fig. 36B, the printhead 302 can sweep the two writing laser beams 3602B and 3602c across the width of the print medium 104 such that 50% of the content is printed by the writing laser beam 3602B and 50% of the content is printed by the writing laser beam 3602 c. The print generated by writing laser beams 3602b and 3602c is depicted by 3606. To this end, the print content 3606 can include a splice point 3608 that decides the print content to enter the first print content portion 3610 and the second print content portion 3612. In some examples, the writing laser beam 3602b prints the first printed content portion 3610 and the writing laser beam prints the second printed content portion 3612. Further, it can be observed that the first printed content portion 3610 and the second printed content portion 3612 have respective skews (because both portions of the printed content are printed by separate writing laser beams). In addition, the respective measures of skew in the first portion of the print and the second portion of the print are greater than the measures of skew in the print printed by the single writing laser beam. In some examples, the measure of skew of first printed content portion 3610 and second printed content portion 3612 are the same. However, in some examples, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the first printed content portion 3610 and the second printed content portion 3612 having the same measure of skew. In an exemplary embodiment, the measure of deflection of first printed content portion 3610 and second printed content portion 3612 can vary based on the percentage of content printed by writing laser beams 3602b and 3602C, as further described in fig. 36C.

Referring to fig. 36C, writing laser beam 3602b prints 25% of the content, and writing laser beam 3602C prints 75% of the content. To this end, writing laser beam 3602b sweeps 25% of the width of print medium 104, while writing laser beam 3602c sweeps 75% of the width of print medium 104. In such embodiments, a measure of skew in a portion of the print is determined based on the following equation:

thus, based on equation 6, the skew of the first printing portion may be greater than the skew of the second printing portion.

Fig. 37 illustrates a flow chart 3700 of a method for modifying content prior to printing in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein.

At step 3702, the printing apparatus 100 may include means for determining whether to print content using the plurality of writing laser beams based on the configuration settings of the printing apparatus 100 (determined in step 3402), such as a control unit 138, a processor 2702, an I/O device interface unit 2706, a print operation control unit 2716, an image processing unit 2718, and the like. If the image processing unit 2718 determines that the content is to be printed using a single writing laser beam, the image processing unit 2718 may be configured to perform step 3704. However, if the image processing unit 2718 determines that the content is to be printed using multiple writing laser beams, such as because the content has a particular size or requires a particular resolution, the image processing unit 2718 may be configured to perform step 3708.

At step 3704, the printing apparatus 100 may include means, such as the control unit 138, the processor 2702, the I/O device interface unit 2706, the print operation control unit 2716, the image processing unit 2718, and the like, for determining a second measure of skew based on the measure of skew determined in step 3504. In an exemplary embodiment, the second measure of deflection is a negative value of the measure of deflection, as depicted by the following mathematical relationship:

second measure of skew= - (measure of skew) (7)

At step 3706, the printing apparatus 100 may include means for updating the content (to be printed) by modifying the skew of the content based on the second measure of skew, such as the control unit 138, the processor 2702, the I/O device interface unit 2706, the print operation control unit 2716, the image processing unit 2718, and the like. In an exemplary embodiment, the image processing unit 2718 may be configured to intentionally add a skew to the content (to be printed) such that printing of the skewed content generates printed content with zero degree skew.

At step 3708, printing apparatus 100 may include means, such as control unit 138, processor 2702, I/O device interface unit 2706, print operation control unit 2716, image processing unit 2718, and the like, for determining a second measure of deflection for each of the plurality of write laser beams based on the measure of deflection determined for each of the plurality of write laser beams. In an exemplary embodiment, the image processing unit 2718 may be configured to determine a second measure of deflection for each of the plurality of write laser beams using equation 7.

At step 3710, the printing apparatus 100 may include means for determining a portion of content to be printed by each of the plurality of writing laser beams, such as the control unit 138, the processor 2702, the I/O device interface unit 2706, the print operation control unit 2716, the image processing unit 2718, and the like. For example, if the count of writing laser beams is two and each of the two writing laser beams is configured to print 50% of the content (along the width of the print medium 104), the image processing unit 2718 may be configured to divide the content to be printed along the width of the print medium 104 by a percentage of the content that each of the plurality of writing laser beams has to print. Each segment of content corresponds to a portion of content.

At step 3712, the printing apparatus 100 may include means for modifying each portion of content, such as the control unit 138, the processor 2702, the I/O device interface unit 2706, the print operation control unit 2716, the image processing unit 2718, and the like, based on the second measure of skew determined for the respective writing laser beams. For example, the image processing unit 2718 may be configured to individually modify the skew of each portion of content. For example, the skew associated with one of the two writing laser beams is 0.5 degrees and the skew associated with the second of the two writing laser beams is 0.1 degrees. In such embodiments, image processing unit 2718 may be configured to modify the skew of the portion of content to be printed by the first of the two writing laser beams by-0.5 degrees. Further, the image processing unit 2718 may be configured to modify the skew of a portion of the content to be printed by the second of the two writing laser beams by-0.1 degrees. In an exemplary embodiment, the image processing unit 2718 may be configured to modify the skew of portions of content using known methods. Some examples of known methods may include, but are not limited to, coordinate transformation, coordinate rotation, and the like.

Fig. 38A illustrates an image 3802 of modified content to be printed using a single writing laser beam in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein. It can be observed that the modified content is skewed by an angle (determined based on a second measure of skew). Further, fig. 38B illustrates an image 3804 of modified content to be printed by multiple writing laser beams in accordance with one or more embodiments described herein. It can be observed that the image 3804 of the modified content has a first portion 3806 and a second portion 3808. Both the first portion 3806 and the second portion 3808 are individually deflected (based on a second measure of deflection associated with each of the plurality of writing laser beams configured to print the first portion 3806 of the content and the second portion 3808 of the content).

Print media validation

As described above, an exemplary printing device according to an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure may be "inkless" in that it may utilize the interaction of laser light with a laser-reactive medium on a print medium to perform printing, rather than using ink. In order to ensure printing on the correct printing medium having the best printing quality performance, it is necessary to determine and confirm that the printing medium loaded in the printing apparatus is the printing medium supported by the printing apparatus. For example, the printing device may need to verify the print medium to confirm that the print medium is a genuine print medium suitable for printing by the printing device and/or inkless printing.

In some embodiments, a "watermark" (e.g., in the form of a reactive coating) may be applied to a print medium supported by the printing device. For example, protective layer 2506 (also referred to as a UV reactive layer) may include a UV dye as described above in connection with at least fig. 25A. The UV dye may be configured to verify the authenticity of the print medium. For example, the UV dye/UV reactive layer may include a UV reactive coating (e.g., coated with a UV reactive chemical). When the print medium is irradiated with UV radiation, light may be reflected from the print medium surface (e.g., by the UV-reactive layer).

In some embodiments, when the print medium is loaded into the printing device, the printing device may verify the print medium based on light reflection from the print medium. In response to determining that the print medium is authenticated (e.g., the print device supports the print medium), the print device may enable printing on the print medium (e.g., enable a printhead of the print device). In response to determining that the print medium is not authenticated (e.g., the print device does not support print medium), the print device may disable printing on the print medium (e.g., disable a printhead of the print device).

Additionally, exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure may determine the type or class of print media (also referred to as "print media characteristics") to provide optimal print quality. For example, the print media characteristics may correspond to the type of print media, whether the print media is intended for black and white printing, whether the print media is intended for grayscale printing, whether the print media is intended for color printing, and so forth. In some embodiments, the printing device is capable of distinguishing between different print media characteristics of print media loaded in the printing device using different types of UV reactive coatings (e.g., each type of print media is coated with a unique UV coating). Based on the print media characteristics, the printing device can automatically set print parameters and without user intervention.

Accordingly, various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure may implement a UV light source (such as a UV LED source) and one or more light sensors (such as one or both of a UV light sensor and a Red Green Blue (RGB) sensor) to emit UV light on a print medium, determine a level of luminescence from the print medium, and determine whether the print device supports print media loaded in the print device, and/or print medium characteristics of the print medium.

Referring now to fig. 48, an exemplary diagram of a portion of an exemplary printing device 4800 according to one or more embodiments is shown.

For example, fig. 48 illustrates an exemplary top chassis portion 4802 of an exemplary printing device 4800. Top chassis portion 4802 is similar to the various exemplary top chassis portions shown and described above, including, but not limited to, top chassis portion 126 shown and described above. For example, top chassis portion 4802 may be configured to receive a printhead engine 4804 configured to emit a laser beam onto a print medium for laser printing, similar to exemplary printhead engine 122 shown and described above.

In some embodiments, top chassis portion 4802 may house media supply spindle 4806, similar to media supply spindle 108 shown and described above. For example, media supply spindle 4806 may receive a roll of print media that may travel in a print direction (as indicated by the arrow in fig. 48) during a printing process. As described above, the roll of print media may be supported by an exemplary printing device 4800 and coated with a specialized chemical that emits light when exposed to UV light.

In some embodiments, print media validation module 4808 is disposed on the top chassis portion. In some embodiments, print media validation module 4808 is disposed at a position between printhead engine 4804 and media supply spindle 4806 along the print direction. Referring now to FIG. 49, an exemplary block diagram of some exemplary components of an exemplary print media validation module is shown.

In the example shown in fig. 49, the print medium validation module may include a UV light source 4901 and a light sensor 4903. In some embodiments, UV light source 4901 and light sensor 4903 are electrically coupled to and secured to a circuit board. In some embodiments, UV light source 4901 and light sensor 4903 are electrically coupled to processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to an exemplary printing device). In some embodiments, the print medium validation module is disposed in a print head engine or print head. As described herein, a printhead engine or printhead may include a housing that prevents laser light from leaking from the printhead engine or printhead. In this way, locating the print media validation module within the printhead engine or printhead may prevent light interference from the local environment that may interfere with the print media validation module. In some embodiments, the print media validation module is positioned away from the media opening (where the print media exits the printing device), thus preventing ambient light from interfering with UV light emitted by the print media validation module. In some embodiments, the platen roller may block ambient light from interfering with UV light emitted by the print medium validation module.

In some embodiments, UV light source 4901 is configured to emit UV light onto print medium 4905. For example, UV light source 4901 may be in the form of a light source including, but not limited to, a UV LED, a fluorescent lamp, and the like.

In some embodiments, if the print medium 4905 includes a UV reactive layer/coating, the print medium 4905 may reflect light from the UV light source 4901. Reflected light from print medium 4905 may be received by light sensor 4903, which in turn may convert the light signal into an indication of light intensity, including but not limited to a light intensity level.

In some implementations, the light sensor 4903 may be an ambient light sensor. For example, the ambient light sensor may be configured to detect the light intensity of ambient light. In some implementations, the light sensor 4903 may be an RGB sensor. For example, the RGB sensor may be configured to detect the light intensity of red light from ambient light, the light intensity of green light from ambient light, and the light intensity of blue light from ambient light. In some implementations, the light sensor 4903 may be other types of light sensors.

Referring now to fig. 50, an exemplary method 5000 is shown. In particular, exemplary method 5000 illustrates exemplary steps/operations of determining whether an exemplary printing device supports an exemplary print medium. For example, exemplary method 5000 illustrates determining whether to support a print medium based on whether reflected light (e.g., as detected by an ambient light sensor) meets a threshold.

In the example shown in fig. 50, the example method 5000 begins at block 5002 and then proceeds to step/operation 5004. At step/operation 5004, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may trigger emission of UV light to the print medium.

For example, the processing circuitry may be electrically coupled to the UV light source. When the processing circuitry determines that a print medium is loaded into the exemplary printing device and the printing device is in a closed state (e.g., based on signals from the various sensors described above), the processing circuitry may transmit signals to the UV light source, and the UV light source may emit UV light onto the print medium, similar to those described above in connection with fig. 48 and 49.

Referring back to fig. 50, after step/operation 5004, method 5000 proceeds to step/operation 5006. At step/operation 5006, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may detect reflected light from the print medium.

In some embodiments, a light sensor (such as an ambient light sensor) may receive light reflected from the print medium and may convert it into an electrical signal proportional to the amount of light received by the sensor. For example, when a print medium supported by the printing device is loaded and exposed to UV light, a certain amount of light may reflect from the print medium, which may be received by the light sensor. The light sensor may convert the amount of light into an electrical signal (e.g., in the form of a given voltage).

Referring back to fig. 50, after step/operation 5006, method 5000 proceeds to step/operation 5008. At step/operation 5008, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may generate the light intensity indication.

For example, the light sensor and/or processing circuitry may convert an electrical signal (e.g., in the form of a given voltage) into an electronic indication corresponding to the intensity of light received by the light sensor. For example, the light sensor and/or processing circuitry may perform one or more signal functions, such as, but not limited to, signal conditioning, signal amplification, analog-to-digital conversion, etc., to generate the light intensity indication based on the electrical signal.

Referring back to fig. 50, after step/operation 5008, method 5000 proceeds to step/operation 5010. At step/operation 5010, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may determine whether the light intensity indication meets a light intensity threshold.

In some implementations, the light intensity threshold may correspond to a light intensity level of reflected light received by the light sensor and from a print medium supported by the printing device. In some embodiments, the light intensity threshold may be determined based on the amount of chemical coating in the UV reactive layer of the print medium supported by the printing device.

If at step/operation 5010 the processing circuit determines that the light intensity indication meets the light intensity threshold, then the method 5000 proceeds to step/operation 5012. At step/operation 5012, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing device) may determine that the printing device supports print media.

For example, referring now to the example shown in fig. 51, the light intensity indication 5101 meets the light intensity threshold 5103. In this example, the processing circuitry determines that the printing device supports a print medium corresponding to light intensity indication 5101. In this example, the printing apparatus may enable all operations on the print medium.

Referring back to fig. 50, if at step/operation 5010 the processing circuit determines that the light intensity indication does not satisfy the light intensity threshold, then the method 5000 proceeds to step/operation 5014. At step/operation 5014, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing device) may determine that the printing device does not support print media.

In some embodiments, when an unsupported print medium is loaded, the unsupported print medium may not be able to reflect light to the light sensor due to the lack (or inadequacy) of the UV reactive coating, or may reflect light having a smaller intensity than the light reflected by the supported print medium.

For example, referring now to the example shown in fig. 51, the light intensity indication 5105 does not satisfy the light intensity threshold 5103. In this example, the processing circuitry determines that the printing device does not support print media corresponding to light intensity indication 5105. In this example, the printing device may prevent all operations on the print medium, and may further display a warning message on a display associated with the printing device indicating that an unsupported print medium is loaded.

Referring back to fig. 50, after step/operation 5012 and/or step/operation 5014, method 5000 proceeds to block 5016 and ends.

Referring now to fig. 52, an exemplary method 5200 is illustrated. In particular, exemplary method 5200 illustrates exemplary steps/operations of determining whether an exemplary printing device supports an exemplary print medium. For example, exemplary method 5200 illustrates determining whether to support a print medium based on whether at least one of reflected red light, reflected green light, or reflected blue light (e.g., as detected by an ambient light sensor) meets a threshold.

In the example shown in fig. 52, the example method 5200 begins at block 5202 and then proceeds to step/operation 5204. At step/operation 5204, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may trigger emission of UV light to the print medium.

Referring back to fig. 52, after step/operation 5204, the method 5200 proceeds to step/operation 5206. At step/operation 5206, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may detect reflected light from the print medium.

In some embodiments, a light sensor (such as an RGB sensor) may receive light reflected from the print medium. For example, when a print medium supported by the printing device is loaded and exposed to UV light, a quantity of red, green, and/or blue light may reflect from the print medium, which may be received by the light sensor. The light sensor may convert the red, green, and blue amounts of light into electrical signals (e.g., in the form of a given voltage).

Referring back to fig. 52, after step/operation 5206, the method 5200 proceeds to step/operation 5208. At step/operation 5208, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may generate the red light intensity indication.

For example, the light sensor may determine the amount of red light from the light detected at step/operation 5206, and may generate an electrical signal (e.g., in the form of a given voltage) indicative of the amount of red light. Additionally, in some implementations, the processing circuitry may convert the electrical signal (e.g., in the form of a given voltage) into an electronic indication corresponding to the intensity of the red light received by the light sensor. For example, the light sensor and/or processing circuitry may perform one or more signal functions, such as, but not limited to, signal conditioning, signal amplification, analog-to-digital conversion, etc., to generate the red light intensity indication based on the electrical signal.

Referring back to fig. 52, after step/operation 5206, the method 5200 proceeds to step/operation 5210. At step/operation 5210, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may generate a green light intensity indication.

For example, the light sensor may determine the amount of green light from the light detected at step/operation 5206, and may generate an electrical signal (e.g., in the form of a given voltage) indicative of the amount of green light. Additionally, in some implementations, the processing circuitry may convert the electrical signal (e.g., in the form of a given voltage) into an electronic indication corresponding to the intensity of the green light received by the light sensor. For example, the light sensor and/or processing circuitry may perform one or more signal functions, such as, but not limited to, signal conditioning, signal amplification, analog-to-digital conversion, etc., to generate a green light intensity indication based on the electrical signal.

Referring back to fig. 52, after step/operation 5206, the method 5200 proceeds to step/operation 5212. At step/operation 5212, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may generate the blue light intensity indication.

For example, the light sensor may determine the amount of blue light from the light detected at step/operation 5206, and may generate an electrical signal (e.g., in the form of a given voltage) indicative of the amount of blue light. Additionally, in some implementations, the processing circuitry may convert the electrical signal (e.g., in the form of a given voltage) into an electronic indication corresponding to the intensity of blue light received by the light sensor. For example, the light sensor and/or processing circuitry may perform one or more signal functions, such as, but not limited to, signal conditioning, signal amplification, analog-to-digital conversion, etc., to generate the blue light intensity indication based on the electrical signal.

Referring back to fig. 52, after steps/operations 5208, 5210 and 5212, the method 5200 proceeds to step/operation 5214. At step/operation 5214, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may determine whether at least one of the red, green, or blue light intensity indications meets a light intensity threshold.

In some implementations, the light intensity threshold may correspond to a light intensity level of reflected red light, reflected green light, and/or reflected blue light received by the light sensor and from a print medium supported by the printing device. In some embodiments, the light intensity threshold may be determined based on the amount of chemical coating in the UV reactive layer of the print medium supported by the printing device.

If at step/operation 5214 the processing circuit determines that at least one light intensity indication meets the light intensity threshold, the method 5200 proceeds to step/operation 5216. At step/operation 5216, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing device) may determine that the printing device supports print media.

In some embodiments, when the supported print medium is loaded, the light intensity of the reflected light to the light sensor may satisfy a light intensity threshold, as the light intensity threshold may be set based on the light to be reflected in the case of the supported print medium being loaded.

For example, referring now to the example shown in fig. 53, red light intensity indicator 5301, green light intensity indicator 5303, and blue light intensity indicator 5305 all meet light intensity threshold 5307. In this example, the processing circuitry determines that the printing device supports print media corresponding to red light intensity indication 5301, green light intensity indication 5303, and blue light intensity indication 5305. In this example, the printing apparatus may allow all operations on the print medium.

If at step/operation 5214, the processing circuit determines that no light intensity indication meets the light intensity threshold, the method 5200 proceeds to step/operation 5218. At step/operation 5218, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing device) may determine that the printing device does not support print media.

In some embodiments, when an unsupported print medium is loaded, the unsupported print medium may not reflect light to the light sensor due to the lack (or inadequacy) of the UV reactive coating, or may reflect red, green, and blue light all having less intensity than the light reflected by the supported print medium.

For example, referring now to the example shown in fig. 51, red light intensity indicator 5309, green light intensity indicator 5311, and blue light intensity indicator 5313 all fail to meet light intensity threshold 5307. In this example, the processing circuit determines that the printing device does not support print media corresponding to red light intensity indication 5309, green light intensity indication 5311, and blue light intensity indication 5313. In this example, the printing device may prevent all operations on the print medium, and may further display a warning message on a display associated with the printing device indicating that an unsupported print medium is loaded.

Referring back to fig. 52, after step/operation 5216 and/or step/operation 5218, the method 5200 proceeds to block 5220 and ends.

Referring now to FIG. 54, an exemplary method 5400 is illustrated. In particular, the example method 5400 illustrates example steps/operations for determining print media characteristics of an example print media associated with an example printing device.

In the example shown in fig. 54, the example method 5400 begins at block 5402 and then proceeds to step/operation 5404. At step/operation 5404, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may trigger UV light emissions emitted to the print medium, similar to those described above in connection with at least step/operation 5204 of fig. 52.

Referring back to fig. 54, after step/operation 5404, method 5400 proceeds to step/operation 5406. At step/operation 5406, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may detect reflected light from the print medium, similar to those described above in connection with at least step/operation 5206 of fig. 52.

Referring back to fig. 54, after step/operation 5406, method 5400 proceeds to step/operation 5408. At step/operation 5408, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to an exemplary printing device) may generate a red light intensity indication similar to step/operation 5208 described above in connection with at least step/operation 5208 of fig. 52.

Referring back to fig. 54, after step/operation 5408, method 5400 proceeds to step/operation 5410. At step/operation 5410, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may compare the red light intensity indication to a light intensity threshold and determine whether the red light intensity indication meets the light intensity threshold, similar to those described above in connection with at least step/operation 5214 of fig. 52.

Referring back to fig. 54, after step/operation 5406, method 5400 proceeds to step/operation 5412. At step/operation 5414, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to an exemplary printing device) may generate green light intensity indications similar to step/operation 5210 described above in connection with at least fig. 52.

Referring back to fig. 54, after step/operation 5412, method 5400 proceeds to step/operation 5414. At step/operation 5414, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may compare the green light intensity indication to a light intensity threshold and determine whether the green light intensity indication meets the light intensity threshold, similar to those described above in connection with at least step/operation 5214 of fig. 52.

Referring back to fig. 54, after step/operation 5406, method 5400 proceeds to step/operation 5416. At step/operation 5416, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may generate a blue light intensity indication similar to step/operation 5212 described above in connection with at least fig. 52.

Referring back to fig. 54, after step/operation 5416, method 5400 proceeds to step/operation 5418. At step/operation 5418, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may compare the blue light intensity indication to a light intensity threshold and determine whether the blue light intensity indication meets the light intensity threshold, similar to those described above in connection with at least step/operation 5214 of fig. 52.

Referring back to fig. 54, after steps/operations 5410, 5414, and 5418, method 5400 proceeds to step/operation 5420. At step/operation 5420, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may determine print medium characteristics based on the red light intensity indication, the green light intensity indication, and the blue light intensity indication.

For example, an exemplary printing device may associate a print medium characteristic of a print medium with whether its red light intensity indication meets a light intensity threshold, its green light intensity indication meets a light intensity threshold, and its blue light intensity indication meets a light intensity threshold. The printing device may store such information on a data look-up table, and the processing circuitry may retrieve the data look-up table to determine print media characteristics of a particular print media loaded in the exemplary printing device.

Referring now to the example shown in fig. 55, a red light intensity indicator 5501, a green light intensity indicator 5503, and a blue light intensity indicator 5505 may be associated with a print medium loaded in a printing device. As shown, the red light intensity indication 5501 meets the light intensity threshold 5525 (e.g., high level red light), the green light intensity indication 5503 meets the light intensity threshold 5525 (e.g., high level green light), and the blue light intensity indication 5505 does not meet the light intensity threshold 5525 (e.g., low level blue light). The processing circuitry may determine print media characteristics corresponding to the high level red light, the high level green light, and the low level blue light from the data look-up table and may determine that the print media is associated with the print media characteristics.

As another example, the red 5507, green 5509, and blue 5511 intensity indications may be associated with a print medium loaded in a printing device. As shown, the red light intensity indication 5507 does not satisfy the light intensity threshold 5525 (e.g., low level red light), the green light intensity indication 5509 satisfies the light intensity threshold 5525 (e.g., high level green light), and the blue light intensity indication 5511 does not satisfy the light intensity threshold 5525 (e.g., low level blue light). The processing circuitry may determine print media characteristics corresponding to the low level red light, the high level green light, and the low level blue light from the data look-up table and may determine that the print media is associated with the print media characteristics.

As another example, the red light intensity indication 5513, the green light intensity indication 5515, and the blue light intensity indication 5517 may be associated with a print medium loaded in the printing device. As shown, the red light intensity indication 5513 meets the light intensity threshold 5525 (e.g., high level red light), the green light intensity indication 5509 does not meet the light intensity threshold 5525 (e.g., low level green light), and the blue light intensity indication 5517 meets the light intensity threshold 5525 (e.g., high level blue light). The processing circuitry may determine print media characteristics corresponding to the high level red light, the low level green light, and the high level blue light from the data look-up table and may determine that the print media is associated with the print media characteristics.

As another example, the red light intensity indication 5519, the green light intensity indication 5521, and the blue light intensity indication 5523 may be associated with a print medium loaded in the printing device. As shown, the red light intensity indication 5519 does not satisfy the light intensity threshold 5525 (e.g., low level red light), the green light intensity indication 5521 does not satisfy the light intensity threshold 5525 (e.g., low level green light), and the blue light intensity indication 5523 satisfies the light intensity threshold 5525 (e.g., high level blue light). The processing circuitry may determine print media characteristics corresponding to the low level red light, the low level green light, and the high level blue light from the data look-up table and may determine that the print media is associated with the print media characteristics.

In some embodiments, the printing device may adjust settings and parameters, such as darkness, contrast, speed, black and white, gray scale, color printing, and/or others, based on print media characteristics. For example, the print media characteristics may indicate not only whether the print media is for color printing, black and white printing, or grayscale printing, but also how much power is required to make the appropriate marks on the print media. In such examples, based on print media characteristics, the printing device may adjust the power level and dwell time such that the output provides better print quality (e.g., clearer text, higher level bar codes, etc.).

Referring back to fig. 54, after step/operation 5420, method 5400 proceeds to block 5422 and ends.

Referring now to fig. 56, an exemplary method 5600 is illustrated. In particular, the example method 5600 illustrates example steps/operations of determining print media characteristics of an example print media associated with an example printing device. In particular, exemplary method 5600 illustrates determining print media characteristics based on one or more light intensity thresholds.

In the example shown in fig. 56, the example method 5600 begins at block 5602 and then proceeds to step/operation 5604. At step/operation 5604, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may trigger UV light emissions to be emitted to the print medium, similar to those described in connection with at least step/operation 5004 of fig. 50.

Referring back to fig. 56, after step/operation 5604, the method 5600 proceeds to step/operation 5606. At step/operation 5606, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may detect reflected light from the print medium, similar to those described above in connection with at least step/operation 5006 of fig. 50.

Referring back to fig. 56, after step/operation 5606, method 5600 proceeds to step/operation 5608. At step/operation 5608, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may generate light intensity indications similar to those described above in connection with step/operation 5008 of fig. 50.

Referring back to fig. 56, after step/operation 5608, the method 5600 proceeds to step/operation 5610. At step/operation 5610, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may compare the light intensity indication to a first light intensity threshold, similar to those described above in connection with step/operation 5010 of fig. 50.

Referring back to fig. 56, after step/operation 5608, the method 5600 proceeds to step/operation 5612. At step/operation 5612, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may compare the light intensity indication to a second light intensity threshold, similar to those described above in connection with step/operation 5010 of fig. 50.

Referring back to fig. 56, after step/operation 5610 and step/operation 5612, method 5600 proceeds to step/operation 5614. At step/operation 5614, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may determine a print medium characteristic based at least in part on the light intensity indication, the first light intensity threshold, and the second light intensity threshold.

For example, referring now to fig. 57, the processing circuitry may determine that the first light intensity indication 5701 and the third light intensity indication 5705 (e.g., as determined by the ambient light sensor described herein) are at a mid-level (e.g., between the threshold 5709 and the threshold 5711), and may determine that the print medium corresponding to the first light intensity indication 5701 and the print medium corresponding to the third light intensity indication 5705 have print medium characteristics corresponding to the mid-level light intensity. The processing circuitry may determine that the second light intensity indication 5703 and the fourth light intensity indication 5707 are at a high level (e.g., above the threshold 5711) and may determine that the print medium corresponding to the second light intensity indication 5703 and the print medium corresponding to the fourth light intensity indication 5707 have print medium characteristics corresponding to the high level light intensity.

As another example, referring now to fig. 58, a red light intensity indication 5802, a green light intensity indication 5804, and a blue light intensity indication 5806 may be associated with a print medium loaded in a printing device. As shown, the red light intensity indication 5802 is at a medium level (e.g., between the threshold 5828 and the threshold 5826), the green light intensity indication 5804 is at a high level (e.g., above the threshold 5826), and the blue light intensity indication 5806 is at a low level (e.g., below the threshold 5828). The processing circuitry may determine print media characteristics corresponding to the mid-level red light, the high-level green light, and the low-level blue light from the data look-up table and may determine that the print media is associated with the print media characteristics.

As another example, red light intensity indication 5808, green light intensity indication 5810, and blue light intensity indication 5812 may be associated with a print medium loaded in a printing device. As shown, red light intensity indicator 5808 is at a low level, green light intensity indicator 5810 is at a high level, and blue light intensity indicator 5812 is at a high level. The processing circuitry may determine print media characteristics corresponding to the low level red light, the high level green light, and the high level blue light from the data look-up table and may determine that the print media is associated with the print media characteristics.

As another example, red light intensity indication 5814, green light intensity indication 5816, and blue light intensity indication 5818 may be associated with a print medium loaded in a printing device. As shown, red light intensity indication 5814 is at a high level, green light intensity indication 5816 is at a low level, and blue light intensity indication 5818 is at a medium level. The processing circuitry may determine print media characteristics corresponding to the high level red light, the medium level green light, and the medium level blue light from the data look-up table and may determine that the print media is associated with the print media characteristics.

As another example, the red light intensity indication 5820, the green light intensity indication 5822, and the blue light intensity indication 5824 may be associated with a print medium loaded in a printing device. As shown, the red light intensity indication 5820 is at a medium level, the green light intensity indication 5822 is at a medium level, and the blue light intensity indication 5824 is at a high level. The processing circuitry may determine print media characteristics corresponding to mid-level red light, mid-level green light, and high-level blue light from the data look-up table and may determine that the print media is associated with the print media characteristics.

In some embodiments, the number of print media features that can be identified increases as the threshold number increases. For example, while an RGB sensor with one threshold can only detect 7 possible print media characteristics, an RGB sensor with two thresholds (e.g., three different levels) can detect 26 print media characteristics. In the case of the fourth intensity level, 63 print media features are supported. In some embodiments, the number of print media features that can be detected can be calculated based on the following formula:

In the above formula, R represents red light, G represents green light, and B represents blue light. R, G, B takes on a value of 0 or 1. Mathematical symbol'"means calculating the sum. The following numbers are starting points and the upper numbers are ending points. For example, the sum of r=0 is calculated, and then the sum of r=1 is calculated. The formula is used to calculate: if three R, G, B components are used, how many media types can be supported for different media levels. For example, if the number of levels is equal to 3, if all three components of R, G, B are used, the number of supported media types can be calculated as:

r=01g=01b=013-1 r+g+b-1=20+0+0+20+0+1+20+0+0+1+1+0+0+1+1+1+1+1+0+1+1+1+20+21+22+22+22+23-1=1+2+2+4+4+4+8-1=26 supported possible media types.

Referring back to fig. 56, after step/operation 5614, the method 5600 proceeds to block 5616 and ends.

Thus, by incorporating a UV reactive coating in the media and pairing with the UV LED and sensor, various embodiments of the present disclosure can detect whether the supported print media is loaded in the printing device (the printing device can only allow the supported print media to be used for printing). Additionally, based on the type of coating, various embodiments of the present disclosure may detect various media characteristics, which are used to detect print media characteristics loaded in a printing device. Based on the print media characteristics, the system can automatically adjust its settings to ensure that the best print quality will be available.

Print security protection

As described above, various embodiments of the present disclosure may implement lasers to print text, images, bar codes, etc. on a print medium. For example, an exemplary printing device according to examples of the present disclosure may include a printhead engine configured to emit a laser beam onto a print medium during a printing process.

In some embodiments, an exemplary print medium may include printable areas and non-printable areas. As an example, the exemplary print medium may be in the form of an exemplary label carried by an exemplary label liner (also referred to as a "label backing"). In such examples, the exemplary label may correspond to a printable area and the exemplary label liner may correspond to a non-printable area. In some embodiments, the exemplary label may be positioned along a centerline of the label liner and on a top surface of the label liner. As such, a central portion of the exemplary print medium may include an exemplary label, while an outer portion (or "edge") of the print medium may include an exemplary label liner.

In some embodiments, the exemplary label is attached to the exemplary label liner by an adhesive material. In some embodiments, the example label and the example label liner may travel together within the example printing device and under a printhead engine of the example printing device. In some embodiments, the exemplary label liner may be used as a carrier sheet for exemplary labels in an exemplary printing device. After text, images, bar codes, etc. are printed on the exemplary labels, the exemplary labels may be separated from the exemplary label liner and applied to the surface of the package, box, carton, product, etc.

Security is always a concern when applying laser beams in laser printing. For example, an improperly operated laser beam may accidentally come into direct or indirect contact with a person (e.g., a user of a laser printer) and may cause serious injury to the person (such as corneal burn, blindness, skin burn, and/or laceration).

Continuing with the examples related to labels and label liners, while an exemplary label may not reflect a laser beam from its surface, an exemplary label liner may include a material and/or coating that may reflect a laser beam. When a laser beam is accidentally directed to an exemplary label liner, the exemplary label liner may reflect and/or redirect the laser beam, which may lead to a safety hazard. Therefore, it is necessary to prevent the laser beam from traveling toward the edge of the printing medium.

Various embodiments of the present disclosure may provide example devices, systems, and methods to detect an edge position of a print medium within a printing device and/or to adjust the printing device upon detecting that a laser travel path associated with the printing device overlaps or extends from an edge portion of the print medium. Accordingly, various embodiments of the present disclosure may direct and protect a laser beam emitted from a printhead engine to ensure that the laser beam is directed only to printable areas of the print medium, and may present a safety hazard due to laser printing beyond the edges of the print medium.

Referring now to fig. 59A and 59B, exemplary portions of an exemplary printing device 5900 according to various embodiments of the disclosure are shown. Specifically, fig. 59A illustrates an exemplary top view of an exemplary portion of a printing device 5900. Fig. 59B illustrates an exemplary cross-sectional view of an exemplary printing device 5900 along section line A-A' and viewed in the direction of the arrow in fig. 59A.

In the example shown in fig. 59A, an example section associated with an example bottom chassis portion of an example printing device 5900 is shown. In this example, print medium 5919 may travel on the bottom chassis portion. Print media 5919 may travel along a media path in a travel direction 5921.

Print medium 5919 may include printable portion 5915 and non-printable portion 5917. For example, the printable portion 5915 may correspond to the label portion described above, while the non-printable portion 5917 may correspond to the label liner portion described above. In the example shown in fig. 59A, the printable portion 5915 may correspond to a central portion of the print medium 5919, and the non-printable portion 5917 may correspond to an edge portion of the print medium 5919.

As described above, when the laser beam is emitted to the unprintable portion 5917 of the printing medium, the laser beam may be reflected from the unprintable portion 5917, thereby causing a safety hazard. Therefore, it is important to detect the edge position of the printing medium in order to prevent the laser beam from being emitted to the unprintable portion 5917.

Referring now to fig. 59B, an exemplary cross-sectional view is provided. In the example shown in fig. 59B, the example media guard bar 5903 and the example media guard bar 5905 may be disposed on a top surface 5901 of the example bottom chassis portion. In some embodiments, one of the media guard bars may be fixed to the top surface 5901, while another of the media guard bars may be movable on the top surface 5901. For example, the position of the media guard bar 5903 may be fixed on the top surface 5901, while the position of the media guard bar 5905 may be adjustable. In some embodiments, the print medium 5919 travels between the example media guard bar 5903 and the example media guard bar 5905. In some embodiments, a fixed media guard bar (e.g., media guard bar 5903) may be aligned at a starting position of the print medium, while the position of an adjustable media guard bar (e.g., media guard bar 5905) may be adjusted based on the width of the print medium. In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 59A, the media guard bar 5903 and the central axis B-B' of the media guard bar 5905 are arranged perpendicular to the direction of travel 5921 of the print medium 5919. In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 59A, the media guard bar 5903 and the central axis B-B' of the media guard bar 5905 are arranged parallel to the laser printing direction as described above.

With continued reference to the example shown in FIG. 59B, an example media sensor retention bar 5907 may be provided on a surface of an example media protection bar 5903. For example, an exemplary media sensor retention bar 5907 may be disposed on a side surface facing print media 5919 and may be positioned above print media 5919. In some embodiments, the central axis of the example media sensor retention bar 5907 may be disposed perpendicular to the central axis of the example media protection bar 5903.

Similarly, the example media sensor retention bar 5909 may be disposed on a surface of the example media protection bar 5905. For example, an exemplary media sensor retention bar 5909 may be provided on a side surface facing print media 5919 and may be positioned above print media 5919. In some embodiments, the central axis of the example media sensor retention bar 5909 may be disposed perpendicular to the central axis of the example media protection bar 5905.

With continued reference to the example shown in fig. 59B, an example media sensor 5911 may be provided on a surface of an example media sensor retention bar 5907. For example, an exemplary media sensor 5911 may be provided on a bottom surface of an exemplary media sensor retention bar 5907 facing an exemplary print medium 5919. In some embodiments, exemplary media sensor 5911 may be configured to emit first Ultraviolet (UV) light to print media 5919 and may detect a level of light reflected from print media 5919. In some embodiments, media sensor 5911 may be configured to detect UV reactive coatings on print media, similar to those described above.

Similarly, an exemplary media sensor 5913 may be disposed on a surface of an exemplary media sensor retention bar 5909. For example, the example media sensor 5913 may be disposed on a bottom surface of the example media sensor retention bar 5909 facing the example print media 5919. In some embodiments, exemplary media sensor 5913 may be configured to emit first Ultraviolet (UV) light to print media 5919 and may detect a level of light reflected from print media 5919. In some embodiments, media sensor 5913 may be configured to detect UV reactive coatings on print media, similar to those described above.

In some embodiments, each exemplary media sensor is movable along a bottom surface of the media sensor retention bar. For example, an exemplary media sensor 5911 may be attached to a sliding guard that travels along a sliding rail provided on a bottom surface of a media sensor retention bar 5907. In some embodiments, movement of media sensor 5911 may be controlled by a motor, and media sensor 5911 may travel in a direction 5923 arranged perpendicular to the direction of travel of print media 5919. Similarly, the media sensor 5913 may be attached to a slide guard that travels along a slide rail provided on the bottom surface of the media sensor retention bar 5909. In some embodiments, movement of media sensor 5913 may be controlled by a motor, and media sensor 5913 may travel in a direction 5925 arranged perpendicular to a direction of travel 5921 of print media 5919.

In some embodiments, as print medium 5919 travels in travel direction 5921, exemplary media sensor 5911 and exemplary media sensor 5913 may move along their respective paths to detect and determine the edge position of print medium 5919. For example, exemplary media sensor 5911 is configured to detect a first media edge of print media 5919 based on first reflected light from print media 5919, and exemplary media sensor 5913 is configured to detect a second media edge of print media 5919 based on second reflected light from print media 5919. Additional details associated with determining the media edge are described in connection with at least FIG. 60.

Referring now to fig. 60, an exemplary method 6000 is shown. In particular, exemplary method 6000 illustrates exemplary steps/operations of determining an edge position of an exemplary print medium associated with an exemplary printing device.

In the example shown in fig. 60, exemplary method 6000 starts at block 6002 and then proceeds to step/operation 6004. At step/operation 6004, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may detect a first media edge of the print media.

In some embodiments, the processing circuitry may be electrically coupled to a media sensor, such as, but not limited to, the exemplary media sensor 5911 described above in connection with fig. 59A and 59B. In some embodiments, the processing circuitry may trigger the media sensor to emit UV light onto the print medium, and the media sensor may detect the amount of light reflected from the print medium. In some embodiments, the amount of light reflected from a printable portion of the print medium (e.g., a central portion of the print medium, such as an exemplary label) may be different (e.g., less than or greater than) the amount of light reflected from a non-printable portion of the print medium (e.g., an edge portion of the print medium, such as an exemplary label liner).

In some embodiments, the processing circuitry may trigger the exemplary media sensor to continuously move on the bottom surface of its corresponding media sensor-retaining bar until the amount of reflected light received by the exemplary media sensor corresponds to the amount of reflected light from the unprintable portion of the print medium. Once the amount of reflected light received by the exemplary media sensor corresponds to the amount of reflected light from the unprintable portion, the media sensor may detect a first media edge of the print media.

Referring back to fig. 60, after step/operation 6004, the method 5600 proceeds to step/operation 6006. At step/operation 6006, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may determine a first media edge position.

In some embodiments, the processing circuitry may determine the corresponding location of the first media edge based on the length that the media sensor traveled before detecting the first media edge.

For example, the media sensor 5911 described above in connection with fig. 59A and 59B may begin at position (0, 0) and travel 5 millimeters horizontally and away from the print media until an edge is detected. In this example, the processing circuitry determines that the first edge of the print medium is at (-5 mm, 0).

Referring back to fig. 60, after step/operation 6006, method 6000 proceeds to step/operation 6008. At step/operation 6008, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may compare the laser travel path to the first media edge position to determine whether the laser travel path overlaps the first media edge position.

As described above, the laser travel path of an exemplary laser beam may begin with the printhead engine and end on the surface print medium. For example, the laser travel path may begin at a location (-5 mm,0,5 mm) and end at a location (-5 mm, 0). In this example, the laser travel path may overlap with the edge position (-5 mm, 0). As another example, the laser travel path may begin at position (3 mm,5 mm) and end at position (3 mm,5mm, 0). In this example, the laser travel path does not overlap with the edge position (-5 mm, 0).

Referring back to fig. 60, after block 6002, method 6000 proceeds to step/operation 6010. At step/operation 6010, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may detect a second media edge of the print media.

In some embodiments, the processing circuitry may be electrically coupled to a media sensor, such as, but not limited to, the exemplary media sensor 5913 described above in connection with fig. 59A and 59B. In some embodiments, the processing circuitry may trigger the media sensor to emit UV light onto the print medium, and the media sensor may detect the amount of light reflected from the print medium. As described above, the amount of light reflected from a printable portion of the print medium (e.g., a central portion of the print medium, such as an exemplary label) may be different from the amount of light reflected from a non-printable portion of the print medium (e.g., an edge portion of the print medium, such as an exemplary label liner).

In some embodiments, the processing circuitry may trigger the exemplary media sensor to continuously move on the bottom surface of its corresponding media sensor-retaining bar until the amount of reflected light received by the exemplary media sensor corresponds to the amount of reflected light from the unprintable portion of the print medium. Once the amount of reflected light received by the exemplary media sensor corresponds to the amount of reflected light from the unprintable portion, the media sensor may detect a second media edge of the print media.

Referring back to fig. 60, after step/operation 6010, method 6000 proceeds to step/operation 6012. At step/operation 6012, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may determine a second media edge position.

In some embodiments, the processing circuitry may determine the corresponding location of the second media edge based on the length that the media sensor traveled before detecting the second media edge.

For example, the media sensor 5913 described above in connection with fig. 59A and 59B may begin at position (0, 0) and travel 5 millimeters on a horizontal plane and away from the print media until an edge is detected. In this example, the processing circuitry determines that the second edge of the print medium is at (5 mm, 0).

Referring back to fig. 60, after step/operation 6012, method 6000 proceeds to step/operation 6014. At step/operation 6014, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may compare the laser travel path to the second media edge position to determine whether the laser travel path overlaps the second media edge position.

As described above, the laser travel path of an exemplary laser beam may begin with the printhead engine and end on the surface print medium. For example, the laser travel path may begin at position (5 mm,0,5 mm) and end at position (5 mm, 0). In this example, the laser travel path may overlap with the edge position (5 mm, 0). As another example, the laser travel path may begin at position (3 mm,5 mm) and end at position (3 mm,5mm, 0). In this example, the laser travel path does not overlap with the edge position (5 mm, 0).

Referring back to fig. 60, after step/operation 6008 and step/operation 6014, method 6000 proceeds to step/operation 6016. At step/operation 6016, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may determine whether a laser travel path associated with a laser subsystem of the printing device overlaps at least one of the first media edge position or the second media edge position.

If at step/operation 6016 the processing circuit determines that the laser travel path overlaps one of the first media edge position or the second media edge position, then the method 6000 proceeds to step/operation 6018. At step/operation 6018, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may perform protection operations.

In some embodiments, the processing circuitry may cause the laser subsystem to be turned off.

Referring back to fig. 60, after step/operation 6018, the method 6000 proceeds to block 6020 and ends.

If at step/operation 6016, the processing circuit determines that the laser travel path does not overlap either the first media edge position or the second media edge position, then the method 6000 proceeds to block 6020 and ends.

Print media height limiter

As described above, various embodiments of the present disclosure may provide an exemplary printing apparatus that prints using laser technology. To achieve the desired print quality and throughput, the print media provided to the exemplary printing device needs to be managed and/or controlled. In particular, different types of print media may have different characteristics and requirements associated with laser printing, and/or corresponding methods of addressing problems in the exemplary printing apparatus.

For example, certain types of print media may be susceptible to curling and/or bending during processing circuitry (especially when the print media is near the end of the print media web), which reduces the flatness of the print media and the quality of laser printing. Thus, controlling the flatness of the print medium during laser printing can be one of the key challenges.

As described above, an exemplary printing device may include a top chassis portion and a bottom chassis portion. In some embodiments, the printhead engine may be mounted on a bottom surface of the top chassis portion and the print medium may travel on a top surface of the bottom chassis portion.

In some embodiments, the top chassis portion and the bottom chassis portion may be coupled by a latch. In some embodiments, the bottom chassis portion may be designed with a downward opening mechanism (e.g., that pivotally rotates about a central axis of the latch). In some implementations, the tolerance of the distance between the bottom surface of the top chassis portion and the top surface of the bottom chassis portion may be above a +/-0.05 millimeter maximum tolerance that achieves optimal print quality. In some embodiments, a large gap may occur between the bottom surface of the top chassis portion and the top surface of the bottom chassis portion, which may affect laser focus selection and affect print quality. In some embodiments, a narrow gap (or no gap) may occur between the bottom surface of the top chassis portion and the top surface of the bottom chassis portion, which may clog the print medium.

Various embodiments of the present disclosure may overcome the technical challenges described above. For example, various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure may achieve good and desirable print quality through proper media management with control of media flatness for various media sizes and types. For example, the example height limiter panel and the example height limiter channel may be integrated within a printing device and provide raster mode printing. Various embodiments of the present disclosure may achieve controlled media flatness without creating unnecessary interruption of media flow (or movement) or the potential risk of media curl (bending) that may cause media blockage inside the printing device. Additionally or alternatively, the example biasing mechanism including the spring element may eliminate and/or reduce tolerances in the distance between the top surface of the bottom chassis portion and the bottom surface of the top chassis portion. Additionally or alternatively, exemplary rib elements according to examples of the present disclosure may control a distance between a top surface of the bottom chassis portion and a bottom surface of the top chassis portion. Thus, various embodiments of the present disclosure may achieve a desired distance between the top surface of the bottom chassis portion and the bottom surface of the top chassis portion: 0.4mm with a tolerance of +/-0.05 mm.

Referring now to fig. 61A, 61B, and 61C, various exemplary diagrams associated with exemplary portions of an exemplary printing device 6100 are shown. Specifically, fig. 61A shows an exemplary perspective view of an exemplary printing apparatus 6100. Fig. 61B shows an exemplary cross-sectional view of an exemplary printing device 6100 along the section line A-A' and viewed in the direction of the arrow in fig. 61A. Fig. 61C illustrates an exemplary zoomed view of the exemplary portion 6127 illustrated in fig. 61B.

In the example shown in fig. 61A, a section of an exemplary bottom chassis portion 6101 is shown. Similar to the various example bottom chassis portions described above, example bottom chassis portion 6101 defines a platform 6115 that can correspond to an area on which print media is received and traveling along a print path for a print operation.

For example, one or more rollers (such as but not limited to the example roller 6117) may be disposed on or embedded in the platform 6115. The roller may rotate as the print medium travels over the roller. Due to friction between the roller surface and the print medium, the rotational force of the roller may be translated into forward motion of the print medium. In this way, the print medium may travel along the media path in the print direction 6119. In some embodiments, the print direction 6119 of the print medium may be arranged perpendicular to an axis along the width of the platform 6115.

In some embodiments, the example bottom chassis portion 6101 includes an example height limiter panel 6103. In some embodiments, an exemplary height limiter panel 6103 may be provided along the width of the platform 6115. For example, the central axis B-B' along the width of the example height limiter panel 6103 may be arranged parallel to an axis along the width of the platform 6115. Additionally or alternatively, a central axis B-B' along the width of the example height limiter panel 6103 may be arranged perpendicular to the print direction 6119.

While the above description provides an exemplary arrangement of the height limiter panels, it is noted that the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the above description. In some examples, the example height limiter panels may be positioned differently (relative to the printing direction and/or the width of the platform) than those described above.

In some embodiments, at least one bottom rib element may protrude from a top surface of the example height limiter panel. In some embodiments, the first bottom rib element and the second bottom rib element may protrude from a top surface of the height limiter panel. In some embodiments, the print medium travels between the first bottom rib element and the second bottom rib element.

In the example shown in fig. 61A, the first bottom rib element 6105 and the second bottom rib element 6107 may protrude from the top surface of the example height limiter panel 6103. The print medium can travel between the first bottom rib element 6105 and the second bottom rib element 6107. In this way, the width of the example height limiter panel 6103 may be greater than the width of the print media.

Although the above description provides examples of two bottom rib elements, it is noted that the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the above description. In some examples, fewer than two or more than two bottom rib elements may protrude from a surface of the example height limiter panel.

Similar to the various example bottom chassis portions described above, example bottom chassis portion 6101 may be positioned below a top chassis portion of an example printing device. Referring now to fig. 61B, an exemplary printing device 6100 includes an exemplary top chassis portion 6109 and an exemplary bottom chassis portion 6101. As shown, the example printing device 6100 is in a closed state and the bottom chassis portion 6101 can be positioned below the top chassis portion 6109.

As shown in fig. 61C, in some embodiments, the example top chassis portion 6109 includes a height limiter groove 6111. In particular, the height limiter grooves 6111 on the top chassis portion 6109 may correspond to the height limiter panel 6103 on the bottom chassis portion 6101 when the example printing device is in the closed position.

In some embodiments, at least one top rib element protrudes from a bottom surface of the height limiter channel. Referring now to the example shown in fig. 61C, an example top rib element 6113 protrudes from the bottom surface of the height limiter groove 6111.

In some embodiments, the distance between the top surface of one of the at least one bottom rib element and the bottom surface of one of the at least one top rib element is 0.4 millimeters. For example, the distance H between the top surface of the second bottom rib element 6107 and the bottom surface of the top rib element 6113 is 0.4 millimeters. In this way, the distance H may enable the printing apparatus to achieve optimal flatness.

In some embodiments, the biasing mechanism may be disposed on a bottom surface of the height limiter panel. In some embodiments, the biasing mechanism includes a support beam and a spring element. In some embodiments, the support beam is disposed on a bottom surface of the height limiter panel.

Referring now to the example shown in fig. 61A and 61B, an example biasing mechanism 6121 is shown. As shown, the example biasing mechanism 6121 may include a support beam 6125 and a spring element 6123. As shown in fig. 61C, a support beam 6125 is provided on the bottom surface of the height restricting plate 6103.

Referring now to fig. 62A and 62B, various exemplary diagrams associated with exemplary portions of an exemplary printing device 6200 are shown. Specifically, fig. 62A illustrates an exemplary top view of an exemplary printing device 6200. Fig. 62B illustrates an exemplary perspective view of the exemplary portion 6202 illustrated in fig. 62B.

In some embodiments, the bottom chassis portion further comprises a securing panel. In some embodiments, a plurality of locking rib elements protrude from a side surface of the height limiter panel. In some embodiments, a plurality of locking groove elements protrude from a side surface of the securing panel. In some embodiments, the height limiter panel is secured to the securing panel by the plurality of locking rib elements and the plurality of locking groove elements.

For example, referring to the example shown in fig. 62A and 62B, the example bottom chassis portion 6204 includes a fixed panel 6206 and a height limiter panel 6208. As shown, a plurality of locking rib elements (such as but not limited to locking rib elements 6210) protrude from a side surface of the height limiter panel 6208. A plurality of locking groove elements, such as but not limited to locking groove elements 6212, are disposed on a side surface of the fixed panel 6206. In some embodiments, the height limiter panel 6208 is secured to the fixed panel 6206 by the plurality of locking rib elements (such as but not limited to locking rib elements 6210) and the plurality of locking groove elements (such as but not limited to locking groove elements 6212).

Referring now to fig. 63A and 63B, various exemplary diagrams associated with exemplary portions of an exemplary printing device 6300 are shown. Specifically, fig. 63A illustrates an exemplary cross-sectional view of an exemplary printing device 6300. Fig. 63B illustrates an exemplary perspective view of the exemplary portion 6301 illustrated in fig. 63A.

Specifically, as shown in fig. 63A, the exemplary printing apparatus 6300 is in an open state, and the bottom chassis portion 6303 is not fixed to the top chassis portion 6313.

As shown in fig. 63B, an exemplary biasing mechanism 6305 may be provided on a bottom surface of the height limiter panel 6307. In some embodiments, the biasing mechanism 6305 may include a support beam 6309 and a spring element 6311. In some embodiments, a support beam 6309 is disposed on the bottom surface of the height limiter panel 6307. In some embodiments, a first end of the spring element 6311 is fixed to the support beam 6309 and a second end of the spring element 6311 is fixed to a bottom surface of the height limiter panel 6307.

Referring again to fig. 20, an exemplary printing apparatus can include a laser printhead 302 having one or more laser sources configured to facilitate printing content directly on a print medium using one or more laser beams emitted from the one or more laser sources. As depicted in fig. 20, the laser printhead 302 includes a SOL detector 2004, a laser power control system 2006, a laser subsystem control unit and I/O device interface unit 2012, and a synchronization unit 2016. Each of SOL detector 2004, laser power control system 2006, laser subsystem control unit and I/O device interface unit 2012, and synchronization unit 2016 of laser printhead 302 may be configured to perform one or more operations of an exemplary printing apparatus. As such, laser printhead 302 can control one or more operations of one or more components (e.g., laser sources) that are electronically coupled and/or in electronic communication with laser printhead 302. While some of the embodiments herein provide the exemplary laser printheads described in connection with fig. 20, it is noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. For example, in some examples, a laser printhead according to the present disclosure may be in other forms.

Referring now to fig. 64, a schematic diagram depicting an exemplary laser printhead controller 6400 in electronic communication with various other components according to various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. As shown, the laser printhead controller 6400 includes processing circuitry 6401, a communication module 6403, an input/output module 6405, a memory 6407, and/or other components configured to perform various operations, programs, functions, etc., described herein.

As shown, a laser printhead controller 6400 (such as processing circuitry 6401, communication module 6403, input/output module 6405, and memory 6407) is electrically coupled to and/or in electronic communication with one or more laser sources 6409, one or more sensors 6411, optical assembly 6413, and print media assembly 6415. The laser printhead controller 6400 may also be electrically coupled to and/or in electronic communication with other components of the exemplary printing device, including the control unit 138 described above in connection with fig. 27. As depicted, each of the communication module 6403, input/output module 6405, and memory 6407 may exchange (e.g., transmit and receive) data with the processing circuitry 6401 of the laser printhead controller 6400.

The processing circuit 6401 may be implemented, for example, as various devices including one or more microprocessors with accompanying digital signal processors; one or more processors without an accompanying digital signal processor; one or more coprocessors; one or more multi-core processors; one or more controllers; a processing circuit; one or more computers; and various other processing elements (including integrated circuits such as ASICs or FPGAs, or some combinations thereof). In some implementations, the processing circuit 6401 may include one or more processors. In an exemplary embodiment, the processing circuit 6401 is configured to execute instructions stored in the memory 6407 or otherwise accessible to the processing circuit 6401. When executed by the processing circuit 6401, these instructions may enable the laser printhead controller 6400 to perform one or more functions as described herein. Whether the processing circuitry 6401 is configured by a hardware approach, by a firmware/software approach, or by a combination thereof, the processing circuitry may comprise entities capable of performing operations according to embodiments of the present invention when correspondingly configured. Thus, for example, when the processing circuit 6401 is implemented as an ASIC, FPGA, or the like, the processing circuit 6401 may include specially configured hardware for carrying out one or more operations described herein. Alternatively, as another example, when the processing circuit 6401 is implemented as an actuator of instructions (such as those that may be stored in the memory 6407), the instructions may configure the processing circuit 6401 specifically to perform one or more algorithms and operations of embodiments of the present disclosure.

The memory 6407 may include, for example, volatile memory, non-volatile memory, or specific combinations thereof. Although shown as a single memory in fig. 64, the memory 6407 may include multiple memory components. In various embodiments, memory 6407 may include, for example, a hard disk drive, random access memory, cache memory, flash memory, compact disc read only memory (CD-ROM), digital versatile disc read only memory (DVD-ROM), an optical disc, circuitry configured to store information, or a particular combination thereof. The memory 6407 may be configured to store information, data, applications, instructions, etc., such that the laser printhead controller 6400 may perform various functions according to embodiments of the present disclosure. For example, in at least some embodiments, the memory 6407 is configured to cache input data for processing by the processing circuitry 6401. Additionally or alternatively, in at least some embodiments, the memory 6407 is configured to store program instructions for execution by the processing circuit 6401. The memory 6407 may store information in the form of static and/or dynamic information. The stored information may be stored and/or used by the laser printhead controller 6400 when performing functions.

The communication module 6403 may be implemented as any means embodied in circuitry, hardware, a computer program product, or a combination thereof, configured to receive and/or transmit data from/to another component or means. The computer program product includes computer readable program instructions stored on a computer readable medium (e.g., memory 6407) and executed by a laser printhead controller 6400 (e.g., processing circuitry 6401). In some embodiments, the communication module 6403 (as with other components discussed herein) may be at least partially implemented as processing circuitry 6401 or otherwise controlled by processing circuitry 6401. In this regard, the communication module 6403 may communicate with the processing circuit 6401, for example, via a bus. The communication module 6403 may include, for example, an antenna, a transmitter, a receiver, a transceiver, a network interface card, and/or supporting hardware and/or firmware/software, and is used to establish communication with another device. The communication module 6403 may be configured to receive and/or transmit any data that may be stored by the memory 6407 using any protocol that may be used for communication between devices. The communication module 6403 may additionally or alternatively communicate with the memory 6407, the input/output module 6405, and/or any other component of the laser printhead controller 6400, such as via a bus.

In some embodiments, the laser printhead controller 6400 may include an input/output module 6405. The input/output module 6405 may communicate with the processing circuit 6401 to receive instructions input by a user and/or to provide audible, visual, mechanical, or other output to a user. Accordingly, the input/output module 6405 may be in electronic communication with a support device (such as a keyboard, mouse, display, touch screen display, and/or other input/output mechanism). Alternatively, at least some aspects of the input/output module 6405 may be implemented on a device used by a user to communicate with the laser printhead controller 6400. The input/output module 6405 may communicate with the memory 6407, the communication module 6403, and/or any other component, for example, via a bus. One or more input/output modules and/or other components may be included in the laser printhead controller 6400.

Printing with two crossed high aspect ratio multimode lasers

In various laser printing and laser marking applications, controlling the spot size and depth of focus of the laser beam is important to print quality. Typically, nd: YAG or dioxygen is used in such systemsCarbon (CO) ₂ ) A laser. However, such lasers can be expensive and cannot operate at the switching bandwidths required for fast printing. In some embodiments of the present disclosure, various configurations of low cost, high power multimode laser diodes may be utilized to reduce product cost and achieve fast printing speeds.

In some examples, two intersecting high aspect ratio lasers (e.g., multimode laser spots/diodes) may be utilized to provide a low cost, high speed printing and/or marking system. In some examples, implementation of two intersecting high aspect ratio laser configurations may facilitate print media using media coatings with higher sensitivity threshold characteristics.

In general, multimode lasers exhibit high aspect ratio beam profiles in which the laser energy is distributed over an elliptical area that cannot be optically focused/resolved in a circular shape in two axes. In some examples, attempting to print using a single multimode laser will produce a rectangular or high aspect ratio ellipse that does not meet print quality or DPI (dots per inch) requirements. In addition, it may be difficult to control the print quality of single mode lasers in various printing applications. Thus, by configuring the printhead to use two multimode lasers (e.g., two multimode lasers arranged perpendicular to each other) at a lower power setting, a high power spot can be generated at the center of the two beams due to the combined laser irradiation at the center of the two high aspect ratio ellipses. The output simulates a single high power laser with a circular beam to produce printed dots meeting the required specifications (e.g., print quality or DPI requirements).

As discussed above in connection with fig. 21, laser subsystem 2002 may include one or more laser sources 2102, an optical assembly 2104 positioned adjacent and/or near one or more laser sources 2102, a polygonal mirror 2106, and a reflective surface 2110. The optical assembly 2104 and one or more laser sources 2102 can operate in conjunction with the laser printhead 302 to facilitate directing a laser beam onto a print medium. For example, the one or more laser sources 2102 may comprise suitable logic and/or circuitry that enables the one or more laser sources 2102 to generate one or more laser beams in response to receiving laser control signals from the laser printhead 302/laser printhead controller.

In some examples, multiple laser sources (e.g., multimode lasers) may be provided. In some examples, two multimode lasers may be provided and arranged in a perpendicular manner relative to each other. In some examples, the output of each multimode laser may be about 10 watts.

Fig. 65 provides an exemplary schematic 6500 depicting laser beams generated by two laser sources according to various embodiments of the present disclosure.

As depicted, an exemplary laser printhead controller (such as but not limited to the laser printhead controller 6400 discussed above in connection with fig. 64) can cause a first laser source to generate a first laser beam 6501 and a second laser source to generate a second laser beam 6503, which are directed through an optical assembly 6505. The optical assembly 6505 may be similar to the optical assembly 2104 described herein in connection with fig. 21. The laser printhead controller may be configured to generate one or more laser control signals to cause two or more laser sources to each generate a respective laser beam simultaneously or in close succession (e.g., within 1-4 milliseconds of each other). In some examples, the laser printhead controller may generate one or more laser control signals to cause one or more laser sources 2102 to each generate a laser beam incident on a target location of the print medium 6507 (e.g., a width or a line of the print medium 6507).

As described above, the first laser beam 6501 and the second laser beam 6503 may be directed onto a print medium by an optical assembly 6505. For example, the optical assembly 6505 may include at least a polygonal mirror. The laser printhead controller can sweep the first laser beam 6501 and the second laser beam 6503 across the width of the print medium 6507. As depicted in fig. 65, in some examples, the laser printhead controller can sweep the first and second laser beams 6501, 6503 across a target location (e.g., width) of the print medium 6507 such that at least a portion of the outputs of the first and second laser beams 6501, 6503 overlap. For example, as depicted, the output of the first laser beam 6501 and the second laser beam 6503 may generate a high power spot at the center of the two beams. For example, the outputs of the first laser beam 6501 and the second laser beam 6503 may be superimposed on each other to irradiate marks (e.g., dots) onto the print medium 6507. In other examples, the output of each laser beam may be directed through an optical assembly 6505 to impinge a corresponding portion of content (e.g., marks, dots, etc.) onto the print medium. The laser printhead controller can be configured to cause the first laser source to generate the first laser beam 6501 at a first power output and the second laser source to generate the second laser beam 6503 at a second power output. In this way, the power output of each respective laser source may be a configurable parameter. For example, the output of each respective laser source may be a configurable parameter corresponding to one or more printing parameters (such as, but not limited to, printing resolution).

The direct printing medium is pre-excited with a high power laser and high frequency SM pulse laser data and low frequency MM pulse data to improve efficiency.

In various embodiments, a high power laser capable of generating a high intensity laser beam may be required to irradiate content onto a print medium. In addition to the cost impact associated therewith, the laser beam quality may be reduced due to the increased power output of the laser source.

Although a low quality multimode laser may not be suitable for generating high resolution marks, it may be used to supply energy to the print medium until/just before an activation threshold at which content may be irradiated onto the print medium (i.e., a threshold at which marks may be made). A relatively large amount of energy is required to energize the print medium up to the activation threshold, and any additional energy supplied thereafter is then required to operate to activate the "ink" and mark the print medium.

Thus, in some embodiments of the present disclosure, a combination of high power and low quality lasers may be used to maintain both high printing speeds and high quality print resolutions. By way of example, a first high power, low quality laser (e.g., a pre-fire laser) may be used to pre-fire a target area of the print medium, followed by a low or medium power, high quality laser (e.g., a write laser/beam) may be used to impinge content onto the print medium (i.e., perform color change operations with respect to the print medium).

In some examples, the exemplary pre-excitation laser may include a multimode laser. An exemplary multimode laser may have multiple traversing modes, limiting the ability of the laser to focus the beam size in at least one dimension (e.g., the x-dimension). However, in a second dimension (e.g., the y-dimension), the exemplary multimode laser may operate in a single mode and can be focused similar to a high quality laser.

In some examples, the write laser may include a single mode laser. An exemplary single mode laser can be precisely focused in both the x-dimension and the y-dimension. Thus, the mark area of the pre-excitation area may be significantly larger than the mark area of the writing laser. For example, the shape or mark generated by the pre-excitation laser may be substantially rectangular (e.g., 1mm long and 80 μm wide with slightly rounded corners).

In some examples, the write beam should follow the pre-excitation beam quickly (e.g., within 1 millisecond) so that the energy absorbed by the print medium is not dispersed before the write beam is incident on the target area. In contrast to the pre-excitation laser, the marks generated by the writing laser may be substantially circular, e.g. dots with a diameter of about 80 μm. In some examples, the high quality dimension of the pre-excitation laser is oriented to the line width of the print medium such that a high resolution band matching the resolution of the write beam is deposited before the write beam is incident on the target area such that maximum energy efficiency is achieved. As the pre-excitation beam and the write beam are scanned, each beam can be selectively turned on and off, depositing energy only as needed to save power and eliminate increases in component temperature. By way of example, the laser source need not be continuously on in order to print content onto a print medium requiring a total print density of about 30%. Each respective laser may be turned on as needed using a control algorithm. For the write beam, higher frequency controlled pulses may be utilized at the rate of the actual printed dots. For the pre-excitation beam, a lower frequency pulse may be utilized such that the pre-excitation laser is turned off when traversing a large area where printing does not occur.

As discussed above with respect to fig. 32, an exemplary printing device may include means for receiving one or more configuration values. As discussed, the one or more configuration values determine and/or represent a configuration in which the printhead is to operate to print content onto the print medium. In addition, a plurality of printing parameters (e.g., printing speed) may be achieved by varying the rotational speed of the optical component (e.g., polygonal mirror). In some examples, the count of the laser beams and/or the rotational speed of the polygonal mirror may vary.

Referring now to fig. 66, a flowchart is provided illustrating exemplary operations 6600 according to various embodiments of the present disclosure. Operation 6600 may be performed by a laser printhead controller. The laser printhead controller may be similar to the laser printhead controller 6400 described herein in connection with fig. 64. For example, the laser printhead controller may similarly include processing circuitry 6401, communication module 6403, input/output module 6405, and memory 6407. The laser printhead controller may be electrically coupled to and/or in electronic communication with various components of the printing apparatus, such as one or more laser sources 6409, one or more sensors 6411, an optical assembly 6413, and a print media assembly 6415.

The exemplary method 6600 begins at step/operation 6601. At step/operation 6601, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, processing circuitry 6401 of laser printhead controller 6400 shown with respect to fig. 64) may transmit a first laser control signal in response to receiving one or more configuration values to cause a first laser source to generate a pre-excitation beam incident on a target location of a print medium. As discussed above, the first laser source may include a multimode laser configured to supply energy to the print medium up to an activation threshold at which content may be irradiated onto the print medium. An exemplary first laser source may have a power output of about 10 watts. The high quality dimension of the pre-excitation beam may be oriented to the line width of the print medium such that the energy supplied by the pre-excitation beam is in the shape of a dashed line (e.g., more concentrated in the y-dimension than in the x-dimension). However, the energy supplied by the pre-excitation beam may not produce visible marks on the print medium. In some examples, the first laser source/pre-excitation laser may be configured to be in an off state when traversing a portion of the print medium where no content is to be printed, such that the first laser source/pre-excitation laser operates at a lower frequency than the second laser source/writing laser.

After step/operation 6601, the method 6600 proceeds to step/operation 6603. At step/operation 6603, processing circuitry transmits a second laser control signal to cause a second laser source to generate a write beam incident on a target location of the print medium. In various embodiments, the second laser source may be caused to generate the write beam within 1 millisecond of the first laser source generating the pre-excitation beam. In some embodiments, the processing circuit may transmit the second laser control signal in response to determining that a condition of the print medium satisfies an activation threshold. In some embodiments, the processing circuitry may transmit a single laser control signal to cause the first laser source and the second laser source to generate respective laser beams. As described above, the second laser source may include a single mode laser configured to supply energy to the print medium above an activation threshold. An exemplary second laser source/single mode laser may have a power output of about 0.5 watts. In some examples, the write beam may illuminate a spot that is superimposed on a virtual line illuminated by the pre-excitation beam. In some examples, the first laser source may generate the pre-excitation beam at a first frequency and the second laser source may generate the write beam at a second frequency. The first frequency may be lower than the second frequency such that the second laser source/write beam operates to generate a plurality of pulses at a fast, uniform frequency to impinge the dots onto the print medium. In some examples, the resolution band of the pre-excitation beam may match the resolution band of the write beam.

Performing laser power compensation using print gray scale calibration data in a print medium

In various laser printing and laser marking applications, a well calibrated power delivery to the print medium is required in order to achieve good print quality under all environmental conditions and over the operating lifetime of the device. As described herein, the print medium is sensitive to the wavelength and optical power of the light source incident thereon. Both the optical power of the light source and the wavelength of the wave may vary with temperature and due to the variation of the light transmittance during scanning or sweeping. In addition, the laser/driver circuit efficiency may vary with respect to temperature and time. In some embodiments of the present disclosure, a calibration system is provided. In some examples, the laser power parameters are adjusted using image data (e.g., print media) and a correction look-up table. For a constant laser power output, the print medium may be in the form of an optical density that is a function of the beam sweep angle. The data may be incorporated into the memory as a look-up table or computational function and used to scale the output power of one or more laser sources based on, for example, a known polygon speed and line start pulse.

In some embodiments, the calibration operation may occur during a printing operation and with respect to the print medium as desired. As a result, a calibration system providing improved print quality can be achieved. For example, uniformity and/or accuracy of grayscale printing across an exemplary label may be enhanced. In some examples, the print medium upon which the data/content is illuminated contains information that can be analyzed and used for calibration operations. Such techniques may be used during a device design or manufacturing process. For example, a media scanner device may be used for unit calibration during a design or manufacturing process. As another example, an exemplary printing device may include a sensor, such as an image sensor for real-time calibration adjustment during operation.

Referring now to fig. 67, a flow chart illustrating exemplary operations 6700 according to various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. Operation 6700 may be performed by a laser printhead controller. The laser printhead controller may be similar to the laser printhead controller 6400 described herein in connection with fig. 64. For example, the laser printhead controller may similarly include processing circuitry 6401, communication module 6403, input/output module 6405, and memory 6407. The laser printhead controller may be electrically coupled to and/or in electronic communication with various components of the printing apparatus, such as one or more laser sources 6409, one or more sensors 6411, an optical assembly 6413, and a print media assembly 6415.

The exemplary method 6700 begins at step/operation 6701. At step/operation 6701, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, processing circuitry 6401 with respect to laser printhead controller 6400 shown in fig. 64) obtains data associated with a print medium. As described above, for a constant laser power output, the print medium may be in the form of an optical density that is a function of the beam sweep angle. In some examples, the data (e.g., image data) may be obtained using a media scanner device in electronic communication with the processing circuitry. In some examples, data (e.g., image data) may be obtained using one or more sensors, such as, but not limited to, one or more sensors 6411 in communication with the laser printhead controller 6400 shown with respect to fig. 64. In some examples, the one or more sensors may be or include a linear sensor (e.g., a linear CCD sensor), an optical camera, or the like. The example sensor may be coupled to an example printing device. For example, the example image sensor may be disposed adjacent (e.g., downstream) relative to the print media such that the image sensor may capture print media data after the content is illuminated onto the print media as the print media traverses the example printing device. By way of example, referring to fig. 1, the one or more sensors may be positioned adjacent to a surface of the printhead engine 122, as discussed herein.

After step/operation 6701, the exemplary method 6700 proceeds to step/operation 6703. At step/operation 6703, processing circuitry determines one or more desired adjustments to the operating parameters of the printing device based on the analysis of the data. For example, the processing circuitry may refer to a correction look-up table or computational function stored in a memory (such as, but not limited to, memory 6407 with respect to laser printhead controller 6400 shown in fig. 64) to determine one or more operating parameters. The one or more operating parameters may be or include a print resolution parameter. For example, the print resolution may include a particular print density (e.g., 100% black print density, 0% print density, 10% gray print density, 20% gray print density, 30% gray print density, etc.). The print resolution may be associated with various operating parameters such as laser output power, polygon mirror speed, line start pulse, etc. In this way, the processing circuitry may utilize a correction look-up table or computational function stored in memory to determine the required adjustments/compensation to the operating parameters used to generate the target print resolution. By way of example, the processing circuitry may determine a desired adjustment to timing and/or power output associated with one or more laser sources of the printing device. By way of example, the processing circuitry may determine that the 15% grayscale print density is darker than desired based at least in part on the analysis of the print medium. Thus, the processing circuitry may determine that the 15% gray print density parameter (e.g., power output and/or timing of one or more lasers configured to illuminate content at 15% gray print density) needs to be reduced. As another example, the processing circuitry may determine that the 30% grayscale print density is shallower than desired based at least in part on the analysis of the print medium. Thus, the processing circuitry may determine that the 30% grayscale print density parameter (e.g., power output and/or timing of one or more lasers configured to illuminate content at 30% grayscale print density) needs to be increased. As another example, the processing circuitry may determine that the 100% black print density is within the target print quality parameter based at least in part on the analysis of the print medium. Thus, the processing circuitry may determine that no change is required with respect to the 100% black print density parameter.

After step/operation 6703, the method proceeds to step/operation 6705. At step/operation 6705, the processing circuitry transmits control signals to cause the laser printhead to adjust one or more operating parameters of the printing apparatus. For example, the processing circuitry may cause the laser printhead to adjust one or more operating parameters of an optical component, such as, but not limited to, optical component 6413 with respect to laser printhead controller 6400 shown in fig. 64. In some examples, the processing circuitry may cause the laser printhead to adjust one or more of laser output power, polygon mirror speed, line start pulse, and the like.

Thus, using the techniques detailed above, print quality problems due to optical power variations caused by polarization and/or reflectivity characteristics of the optical components can be adjusted in real-time during design, manufacturing, and/or during printing operations.

Multiple laser firing single print line

In various examples, delivering sufficient power to the print medium surface is critical to proper operation of the printing device. The amount of optical power that can be delivered in each laser scan or sweep is limited by the available laser power and loss of the optical system (e.g., optical components), including less than 100% reflectivity on the mirror and less than 100% transmissivity in the lens. In addition, the minimum polygon motor operating speed is limited mainly by the dithering performance. Slower polygon motor speeds result in higher jitter, which is incompatible with high precision laser imaging/printing.

In some implementations, the number of write cycles required (e.g., "N" write cycles) is a predetermined value or integer based on, for example, the media type, sweep rate, required print speed, etc. In some examples, the laser printhead/laser printhead controller drives the laser source, polygon motor, and printer platen in a manner such that each horizontal print line on the surface of the print medium is illuminated (i.e., printed) N "times. In some examples, adjacent polygonal facets may be selectively used to facilitate the fastest possible printing. Wobble correction optics may be used to compensate for any cone errors and any inter-facet angle errors may be compensated for by adjusting laser timing.

Referring now to fig. 68, a flow chart illustrating exemplary operations 6800 according to various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. Operation 6800 may be performed by a laser printhead controller. The laser printhead controller may be similar to the laser printhead controller 6400 described herein in connection with fig. 64. For example, the laser printhead controller may similarly include processing circuitry 6401, communication module 6403, input/output module 6405, and memory 6407. The laser printhead controller may be electrically coupled to and/or in electronic communication with various components of the printing apparatus, such as one or more laser sources 6409, one or more sensors 6411, an optical assembly 6413, and a print media assembly 6415.

The exemplary method 6800 begins at step/operation 6801. At step/operation 6801, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, processing circuitry 6401 with respect to laser printhead controller 6400 shown in fig. 64) determines a number of write cycles required with respect to particular data/content to be printed by the printing device. As described above, the number of write cycles may be determined based at least in part on the media type, sweep rate, and desired print speed. The number of write cycles may be a value or integer (e.g., "N") corresponding to the number of iterations of the laser source required to irradiate/print the content.

After step/operation 6801, method 6800 proceeds to step/operation 6803. At step/operation 6803, processing circuitry transmits control signals to the print media assembly to control traversal of the print media. In some examples, the laser printhead controller may transmit control signals to stop the print media assembly or adjust the traverse speed of the print media.

After step/operation 6803, method 6800 proceeds to step/operation 6805. At step/operation 6805, the processing circuitry transmits a laser control signal to cause the one or more laser sources to perform a plurality of write cycles by generating one or more laser beams incident on the print medium such that the content is irradiated onto the print medium. Additionally, in some examples, adjacent polygonal facets of the optical assembly may be selectively used to optimize the printing speed.

In some embodiments, the print media assembly may be in a fixed position when the one or more lasers irradiate content on the print media assembly. In some embodiments, the print media assembly is operable to resume traversal of the print media, such as from a first width to a second width of the print media after the content is illuminated in an area corresponding to the first width of the print media. In some examples, the one or more laser sources may generate one or more laser beams incident on the print medium as the print medium traverses the printing device. For another example, performing the write-many cycle may include sequentially sweeping a first portion of the first print medium width. In some examples, after sequentially sweeping a first portion of a first print media width, a second portion of a second print media width may be scanned or swept. By way of example, the scan line of the laser beam may be swept at a rate such that the print medium traverses a portion of the spot. For example, one or more laser beams may be scanned multiple times (e.g., 10 times) during a duration in which the print medium traverses from a first width or line to a second width or line.

In some embodiments, the processing circuitry may transmit control signals to cause the print media assembly to stop traversing of the print media prior to causing the one or more lasers to perform a predetermined number of write cycles. The processing circuitry may then transmit a laser control signal to cause one or more lasers to perform a predetermined number of write cycles. After completing the multiple write cycles, the processing circuit may transmit another control signal to cause the print media assembly to begin (i.e., resume) traversal of the print media.

After step/operation 6805, method 6800 proceeds to step/operation 6807. At step/operation 6807, the processing circuit transmits a control signal to cause the optical assembly to implement the wobble correction optics. As described above, wobble correction optics may be used to compensate for taper errors, while facet-to-facet angle errors may be compensated for by adjusting the timing of one or more lasers. Thus, by combining print media assembly and optical assembly control techniques, the exemplary printing apparatus can produce high quality print media, which is also effective for print media with media coatings having higher sensitivity threshold characteristics.

Laser spot shaping beam delivery system

In many examples, the laser source/diode may have variable beam divergence that is not precisely controlled. In addition, the laser source/diode may produce a beam having an elliptical cross-section. By way of example, the output (i.e., laser beam shape) of an exemplary single-mode laser source/diode may diverge between 33 and 40 degrees. As another example, the output of an exemplary multimode laser source/diode may diverge between 8 degrees and 12 degrees. This variability means that the output of the laser source/diode cannot be accurately controlled, resulting in product variability and inconsistent performance. In some cases, the laser beam output/shape may be controlled by providing an aperture in front of the beam to truncate a portion of the laser beam output to a target size/shape. However, in cases where limited power is available (e.g., lower power laser sources/diodes), using holes can result in inefficiency and power waste.

Referring now to fig. 69, an exemplary schematic diagram depicting an optical assembly 6900 in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. In various examples, the optical assembly 6900 can be configured to control or adjust a laser beam (e.g., collimate, round, and/or focus the laser beam). As depicted in fig. 69, the optical assembly 6900 includes a collimating component 6901, a beam control component 6903, and a focusing component 6905.

As depicted in fig. 69, the optical assembly 6900 includes a collimation component 6901 configured to collimate the output of the laser source (e.g., control the resolution of the laser beam in the cross-scan dimension). In various examples, the collimating component 6901 can be or include one or more lens groups (e.g., one or more groups of lenses). The optical assembly 6900 can be configured to operate with various types of laser sources/diodes, such as, but not limited to, multimode lasers, single mode lasers, and the like. In some examples, the collimating component 6901 may be removably attached or otherwise connected/coupled to an exemplary laser assembly (e.g., including a laser source) in order to collimate an output (i.e., a laser beam) generated by the laser assembly. For example, at least one surface of the collimating component 6901 can be disposed adjacent to at least a surface of the exemplary laser assembly.

As described above, and as depicted in fig. 69, the optical assembly 6900 includes a beam control component 6903. As shown, in some examples, at least a surface of beam steering component 6903 is disposed adjacent to a surface of collimating component 6901 such that the laser beam can traverse collimating component 6901 to reach beam steering component 6903. As depicted, beam control component 6903 includes a prism pair 6902 and 6904 (e.g., anamorphic prism pair) configured to modify the size of a laser beam along one axis. For example, the beam control component 6903 may be operable to modify the shape of the laser beam by adjusting the angle between the laser beam and the exemplary prism pair. In various examples, beam control component 6903 is operable to modify an aspect ratio associated with a laser beam. For example, the beam control component 6903 is operable to modify an elliptical beam shape generated by the laser source into a circular beam shape. In various examples, the size of the laser beam may be reduced or enlarged based on the relative angular position of the prism pairs. In various examples, as depicted, the exemplary beam control component 6903 includes a control pin 6906 for simultaneously adjusting the relative positions of the prism pairs 6902 and 6904.

As described above, and as depicted in fig. 69, the optical assembly 6900 includes a focusing component 6905 configured to direct an output (e.g., a laser beam) of the optical assembly 6900 (e.g., direct the laser beam to be incident on a print medium) within an exemplary printing device. As shown, in some examples, at least one surface of the focusing element 6905 may be disposed adjacent to a surface of the beam steering element 6903 such that the laser beam traverses the beam steering element 6903 to reach the focusing element 6905. In some examples, focusing element 6905 can include one or more mirrors.

While some of the embodiments herein provide an exemplary optical assembly 6900, it is noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. For example, in some examples, an exemplary optical assembly 6900 according to the present disclosure can include other elements (one or more additional and/or alternative elements) and/or can be configured/positioned differently than shown in fig. 69.

Referring now to fig. 70, an exemplary schematic diagram depicting a cross-sectional view of an exemplary collimating component 7000 is provided, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure. In various examples, collimating component 7000 may be configured to collimate the output of the laser source (i.e., the laser beam). For example, collimating component 7000 may be configured to control the resolution of the laser beam in the cross-scan dimension. At least a surface of the collimating component 7000 may be disposed adjacent to at least a surface of the exemplary laser assembly in order to collimate the output (i.e., laser beam) generated by the laser assembly. The exemplary collimating component 7000 may be configured to collimate the output of the multimode laser (e.g., with a beam divergence variability of between 8 degrees and 12 degrees in some examples). In some examples, collimating component 7000 is operable to focus the cross-scan to approximately 1000DPI in the cross-scan dimension.

In some examples, as depicted, collimating component 7000 may be or include a cylindrical member (e.g., a barrel) including at least one plurality of lenses. As depicted in fig. 70, the exemplary collimating component 7000 includes a housing 7002, a first plurality of lenses 7001, and a second plurality of lenses 7003. In various embodiments, the first plurality of lenses 7001 and the second plurality of lenses 7003 may be disposed at least partially within the housing 7002 of the collimating component 7000.

As depicted in fig. 70, an exemplary collimating component 7000 includes a housing 7002. The exemplary housing 7002 may be or be constructed of metal or any other suitable material.

As depicted in fig. 70, collimating component 7000 includes a first plurality of lenses 7001. In some examples, the first plurality of lenses 7001 may be disposed within the collimating component 7000 and/or define a first end portion of the collimating component (e.g., adjacent to the exemplary laser assembly). As depicted, the first plurality of lenses 7001 includes three spherical lenses configured to move independently relative to the second plurality of lenses 7003. Each spherical lens may comprise glass or a similar material. Each spherical lens may be or include a Fast Axis Collimator (FAC). The exemplary collimating component 7000 is operable to output a laser beam within a particular divergence range (e.g., 10 x 10 degrees Full Width Half Maximum (FWHM)). The exemplary first plurality of lenses 7001 may be configured to accommodate a plus or minus 0.1mm laser chip offset. Accordingly, the first plurality of lenses 7001 is operable to control the resolution of the laser beam (e.g., the pre-excitation laser beam) in the cross-scan dimension.

As depicted in fig. 70, collimating component 7000 includes a second plurality of lenses 7003. In some examples, the second plurality of lenses 7003 may be disposed within the collimating component 7000 and/or define a second end portion of the collimating component (e.g., remote from the exemplary laser assembly). Accordingly, an exemplary laser beam may travel from the exemplary laser assembly to the first plurality of lenses 7001 and then to the second plurality of lenses 7003. As depicted, the second plurality of lenses 7001 includes two spherical lenses configured to move independently relative to the first plurality of lenses 7003. Each spherical lens may comprise glass or a similar material. Each spherical lens may be or include a Fast Axis Collimator (FAC). The exemplary second plurality of lenses 7003 may be configured to accommodate a plus or minus 0.1mm laser chip offset. Accordingly, the second plurality of lenses 7003 is also operable to control the resolution of the laser beams (e.g., pre-excitation laser beams) in the cross-scan dimension. After reaching the second plurality of lenses 7003, the exemplary laser beam may then enter another component of the optical assembly/printing device (e.g., an exemplary focusing component).

While some of the embodiments herein provide an exemplary collimating component 7000, it is noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. For example, in some examples, an exemplary collimating component 7000 according to the present disclosure may include other elements (one or more additional and/or alternative elements), and/or may be differently configured/positioned than shown in fig. 70.

Referring now to fig. 71, an exemplary schematic diagram depicting a cross-sectional view of an exemplary collimating component 7100 is provided, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure. In various examples, the collimating component 7100 can be configured to collimate the output of a laser source (i.e., a laser beam). For example, the collimation component 7100 can be configured to control the resolution of the laser beam in the cross-scan dimension. At least a surface of the collimating component 7100 may be disposed adjacent to at least a surface of the exemplary laser assembly in order to collimate an output (i.e., a laser beam) generated by the laser assembly. Exemplary collimating component 7100 can be configured to collimate the output of a single-mode laser (e.g., with a beam divergence variability of between 33 degrees and 40 degrees in some examples). In some examples, the collimation component 7100 is operable to focus cross-scans to approximately 1000DPI in the cross-scan dimension.

In some examples, the collimating component 7100 can be or include a cylindrical member comprising at least one plurality of lenses. Exemplary housing 7002 may be or include metal or any other suitable material. As depicted in fig. 71, an exemplary collimating component 7100 includes a housing 7002, a first plurality of lenses 7101, and a second plurality of lenses 7103. In various embodiments, the first plurality of lenses 7101 and the second plurality of lenses 7103 may be disposed at least partially within a housing 7102 of the collimating component 7100.

As depicted in fig. 71, the collimating component 7100 includes a first plurality of lenses 7101. In some examples, the first plurality of lenses 7101 may be disposed within the collimating component 7100 and/or define a first end portion of the collimating component (e.g., adjacent to the exemplary laser assembly). As depicted, the first plurality of lenses 7101 includes three spherical lenses configured to move independently relative to the second plurality of lenses 7103. Each spherical lens may comprise glass or a similar material. Each spherical lens may be or include a Fast Axis Collimator (FAC). The exemplary collimating component 7100 is operable to output a laser beam within a particular divergence range (e.g., 35 x 5 degrees FWHM). The exemplary first plurality of lenses 7101 may be configured to accommodate laser chip offsets of plus or minus 0.1 mm. Thus, the first plurality of lenses 7101 is operable to control the resolution of a laser beam (e.g., a write laser beam) in the cross-scan dimension.

As depicted in fig. 71, the collimating component 7100 includes a second plurality of lenses 7103. In some examples, the second plurality of lenses 7103 may be disposed within the collimating component 7100 and/or define a second end portion of the collimating component (e.g., remote from the exemplary laser assembly). Thus, an exemplary laser beam may travel from the exemplary laser assembly to the first plurality of lenses 7101 and then to the second plurality of lenses 7103. As depicted, the second plurality of lenses 7101 includes two spherical lenses configured to move independently relative to the first plurality of lenses 7103. Each spherical lens may comprise glass or a similar material. Each spherical lens may be or include a Fast Axis Collimator (FAC). The exemplary second plurality of lenses 7103 may be configured to tolerate a laser chip offset of plus or minus 0.1 mm. Thus, the second plurality of lenses 7103 is also operable to control the resolution of a laser beam (e.g., a write laser beam) in the cross-scan dimension. The slow axis of the exemplary collimating component 7100 can be collimated and expanded to produce approximately 200DPI in the scan dimension directly through the first plurality of lenses 7101 and the second plurality of lenses 7103. After reaching the second plurality of lenses 7103, the exemplary laser beam may then enter another component of the optical assembly/printing device (e.g., an exemplary focusing component).

While some of the embodiments herein provide an exemplary collimating component 7100, it is noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. For example, in some examples, an exemplary collimating component 7100 according to the present disclosure may include other elements (one or more additional and/or alternative elements) and/or may be configured/positioned differently than shown in fig. 71.

Referring now to fig. 72, an exemplary schematic diagram depicting a side view of at least a portion of an exemplary collimating component 7200 is provided, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure. In various examples, the collimating component 7200 can be configured to collimate the output of the laser source (i.e., the laser beam). Exemplary collimating component 7200 can be disposed at least partially within a housing (e.g., cylindrical member, barrel, etc.). For example, the collimation component 7200 can be configured to control the resolution of the laser beam in the cross-scan dimension. At least a surface of the collimating component 7200 can be disposed adjacent to at least a surface of the exemplary laser assembly in order to collimate the output (i.e., laser beam) generated by the laser assembly. Exemplary collimating component 7200 can be configured to collimate the output of a multimode laser (e.g., with a beam divergence variability of between 8 degrees and 12 degrees in some examples). In some examples, the collimation component 7200 can be operative to focus the cross-scan to approximately 1000DPI in the cross-scan dimension. As depicted in fig. 72, an exemplary collimating component 7200 includes a first plurality of lenses 7201 and a second plurality of lenses 7203.

As depicted in fig. 72, the collimating component 7200 includes a first plurality of lenses 7201. In some examples, the first plurality of lenses 7201 may be disposed within the collimating component 7200 and/or define a first end portion of the collimating component (e.g., adjacent to the exemplary laser assembly). In other words, the first plurality of lenses 7201 may be disposed at a first distance relative to the exemplary laser assembly. The first plurality of lenses 7201 may be configured to move independently (i.e., as a group) relative to the second plurality of lenses 7203. For example, the first plurality of lenses 7201 may be configured to move horizontally along the exemplary laser beam path 7202. As depicted, the first plurality of lenses 7201 includes a first spherical lens 7201A, a second spherical lens 7201B, and a third spherical lens 7201C disposed in a parallel configuration relative to one another. Each of the spherical lenses 7201A, 7201B and 7201C may comprise glass or similar materials. In some examples, each spherical lens 7201A, 7201B, and 7201C may have a diameter between 5mm and 10 mm. As further depicted in fig. 72, each spherical lens 7201A, 7201B, and 7201C may have a different size, shape, and/or be configured differently from one another. In some examples, each spherical lens 7201A, 7201B, and 7201C may be or include a Fast Axis Collimator (FAC). The exemplary collimating component 7200 is operable to output a laser beam within a particular divergence range (e.g., 10 x 10 degrees Full Width Half Maximum (FWHM)). Examples of each spherical lens 7201A, 7201B and 7201C may be configured to tolerate a laser chip offset of plus or minus 0.1 mm. In some examples, the first plurality of lenses 7201 is operable to control a resolution of the laser beam (e.g., the pre-excitation laser beam) in the cross-scan dimension.

As depicted in fig. 72, the collimating component 7200 includes a second plurality of lenses 7203. In some examples, the second plurality of lenses 7203 may be disposed within the collimating component 7200 and/or define a second end portion of the collimating component (e.g., remote from the exemplary laser assembly). As shown, the exemplary second plurality of lenses 7203 may be disposed about 10-12mm from the first plurality of lenses 7201. In other words, the second plurality of lenses 7202 may be disposed at a second distance relative to the exemplary laser assembly such that the second plurality of lenses 7202 are disposed farther from the laser assembly than the first plurality of lenses 7201. Thus, an exemplary laser beam may travel from the exemplary laser assembly to the first plurality of lenses 7201 and then to the second plurality of lenses 7203. As depicted, the second plurality of lenses 7203 includes a first spherical lens 7203A and a second spherical lens 7203B disposed in a parallel configuration relative to each other. Each spherical lens 7203A and 7203B may be configured to move independently (i.e., as a group) relative to the first plurality of lenses 7201. For example, the second plurality of lenses 7202 may be configured to move horizontally along the exemplary laser beam path 7202. Each spherical lens 7203A and 7203B may comprise glass or similar material. In some examples, each spherical lens 7203A and 7203B may have a diameter between 5mm and 10 mm. As depicted in fig. 72, each spherical lens 7203A and 7203B may have a different size, shape, and/or be configured differently from each other. Each spherical lens 7203A and 7203B may be or include a Fast Axis Collimator (FAC). The exemplary second plurality of lenses 7203 may be configured to tolerate a laser chip offset of plus or minus 0.1 mm. Thus, the second plurality of lenses 7203 is also operable to control the resolution of the laser beam (e.g., pre-excitation laser beam) in the cross-scan dimension. Upon reaching the second plurality of lenses 7203, the exemplary laser beam may then enter another component/element of the optical assembly/printing device (e.g., an exemplary focusing component).

While some of the embodiments herein provide an exemplary portion of collimating component 7200, it is noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. For example, in some examples, exemplary collimating component 7200 according to the present disclosure may include other elements (one or more additional and/or alternative elements) and/or may be differently configured/positioned than shown in fig. 72.

Referring now to fig. 73, an exemplary schematic diagram depicting a side view of at least a portion of an exemplary collimating component 7300 is provided, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure. In various examples, the collimation component 7300 can be configured to collimate the output of the laser source (i.e., the laser beam). Exemplary collimation component 7300 can be disposed at least partially within a housing (e.g., cylindrical member, barrel, etc.). For example, the collimation component 7300 can be configured to control the resolution of the laser beam in the cross-scan dimension. At least a surface of the collimating component 7300 may be disposed adjacent to at least a surface of the exemplary laser assembly in order to collimate the output (i.e., laser beam) generated by the laser assembly. Exemplary collimation component 7300 can be configured to collimate the output of a multimode laser (e.g., having a beam divergence variability of between 8 degrees and 12 degrees in some examples). In some examples, collimation component 7300 is operable to focus cross-scans to approximately 1000DPI in the cross-scan dimension. As depicted in fig. 73, exemplary collimating component 7300 includes a first plurality of lenses 7301 and a second plurality of lenses 7303.

As depicted in fig. 73, the collimating component 7300 includes a first plurality of lenses 7301. In some examples, the first plurality of lenses 7301 may be disposed within the collimating component 7300 and/or define a first end portion of the collimating component (e.g., adjacent to the exemplary laser assembly). In other words, the first plurality of lenses 7301 may be disposed at a first distance relative to the exemplary laser assembly. The first plurality of lenses 7301 may be configured to move independently (i.e., as a group) relative to the second plurality of lenses 7303. For example, the first plurality of lenses 7301 may be configured to move horizontally along the exemplary laser beam path 7302. As depicted, the first plurality of lenses 7301 includes a first spherical lens 7301A, a second spherical lens 7301B, and a third spherical lens 7301C disposed in a parallel configuration relative to one another. Each of the spherical lenses 7301A, 7301B and 7301C may comprise glass or similar materials. In some examples, each spherical lens 7301A, 7301B, and 7301C may have a diameter between 5mm and 10 mm. As further depicted in fig. 73, each spherical lens 7301A, 7301B, and 7301C may have a different size, shape, and/or be configured differently from one another. In some examples, each spherical lens 7301A, 7301B, and 7301C may be or include a Fast Axis Collimator (FAC). The exemplary collimation component 7300 is operable to output a laser beam that is within a specific divergence range (e.g., 10 x 10 degree Full Width Half Maximum (FWHM)). Examples of each spherical lens 7301A, 7301B, and 7301C may be configured to accommodate a plus or minus 0.1mm laser chip offset. In some examples, the first plurality of lenses 7301 is operable to control a resolution of the laser beam (e.g., the pre-excitation laser beam) in the cross-scan dimension.

As depicted in fig. 73, the collimating component 7300 includes a second plurality of lenses 7303. In some examples, a second plurality of lenses 7303 may be disposed within the collimating component 7300 and/or define a second end portion of the collimating component (e.g., remote from the exemplary laser assembly). As shown, the exemplary second plurality of lenses 7303 may be disposed about 10-12mm from the first plurality of lenses 7301. In other words, the second plurality of lenses 7303 may be disposed at a second distance relative to the exemplary laser assembly such that the second plurality of lenses 7303 are disposed farther from the laser assembly than the first plurality of lenses 7301. Thus, an exemplary laser beam may travel from the exemplary laser assembly to the first plurality of lenses 7301 and then to the second plurality of lenses 7303. As depicted, the second plurality of lenses 7303 includes a first spherical lens 7303A and a second spherical lens 7303B disposed in a parallel configuration relative to each other. Each spherical lens 7303A and 7303B may be configured to move independently (i.e., as a group) relative to the first plurality of lenses 7301. For example, the second plurality of lenses 7303 may be configured to move horizontally along the exemplary laser beam path 7302. Each spherical lens 7303A and 7303B may comprise glass or similar materials. In some examples, each spherical lens 7303A and 7303B may have a diameter between 5mm and 10 mm. As depicted in fig. 73, each spherical lens 7303A and 7303B may have a different size, shape, and/or be configured differently from each other. Each spherical lens 7303A and 7303B may be or include a Fast Axis Collimator (FAC). The exemplary second plurality of lenses 7303 may be configured to tolerate a laser chip offset of plus or minus 0.1 mm. Accordingly, the second plurality of lenses 7303 is also operable to control the resolution of the laser beam (e.g., pre-excitation laser beam) in the cross-scan dimension. Upon reaching the second plurality of lenses 7303, the exemplary laser beam may then enter another component/element of the optical assembly/printing device (e.g., an exemplary focusing component).

While some of the embodiments herein provide an exemplary portion of collimating component 7300, it is noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. For example, in some examples, exemplary collimation component 7300 according to the present disclosure may include other elements (one or more additional and/or alternative elements) and/or may be differently configured/positioned than as illustrated in fig. 73.

Referring now to fig. 74, an exemplary schematic diagram depicting a top cross-sectional view of an optical assembly 7400 according to various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. In various examples, the optical assembly 7400 can be configured to collimate, round, and/or focus a laser beam. As depicted in fig. 74, the optical assembly 7400 includes a collimation component 7401 and a focusing component 7413. The example optical assembly 7400 is operable to collimate an output (i.e., a laser beam) generated by an example laser assembly (e.g., a multimode laser). In some examples, at least one surface of the collimating component 7401 may be disposed adjacent to at least a surface of the exemplary laser assembly.

As depicted in fig. 74, the optical assembly 7400 includes a collimation component 7401 that is configured to control the resolution of the laser beam (e.g., the pre-excitation laser beam) in the cross-scan dimension. The collimating component 7401 may be similar to the collimating component 7200 described above in connection with fig. 72. As depicted, the collimating component 7401 includes a cylindrical member/barrel. In some examples, as depicted, the collimating component 7401 is disposed at least partially within the housing 7402 of the optical assembly 7400. In various examples, the collimating component 7401 may be or include one or more lens groups (e.g., one or more groups of lenses). As depicted, the collimating component 7401 includes a first plurality of lenses 7403 and a second plurality of lenses 7405. In some examples, as further depicted, the first plurality of lenses 7403 includes three spherical lenses and the second plurality of lenses 7405 includes two spherical lenses.

In some examples, the first plurality of lenses 7403 may be disposed within the collimating component 7401 and/or define a first end portion of the collimating component (e.g., adjacent to the exemplary laser assembly). In other words, the first plurality of lenses 7403 may be disposed at a first distance relative to the exemplary laser assembly. The first plurality of lenses 7403 may be configured to move independently (i.e., as a group) relative to the second plurality of lenses 7405. For example, the first plurality of lenses 7403 may be configured to move horizontally along the exemplary laser beam path 7404.

As depicted in fig. 74, the collimating component 7401 includes a second plurality of lenses 7405. In some examples, the second plurality of lenses 7405 may be disposed within the collimating component 7401 and/or define a second end portion of the collimating component (e.g., remote from the exemplary laser assembly). In other words, the second plurality of lenses 7405 may be disposed at a second distance relative to the example laser assembly such that the second plurality of lenses 7405 are disposed farther from the laser assembly than the first plurality of lenses 7403. Thus, an exemplary laser beam may travel from the exemplary laser assembly to the first plurality of lenses 7403 and then to the second plurality of lenses 7405. The second plurality of lenses 7405 may be configured to move independently (i.e., as a group) relative to the first plurality of lenses 7403. For example, the second plurality of lenses 7405 may be configured to move horizontally along the exemplary laser beam path 7404. Upon reaching the second plurality of lenses 7405, the exemplary laser beam may then enter another component/element of the optical assembly/printing device (e.g., in some examples, focusing component 7413).

As described above, and as depicted in fig. 74, the optical assembly 7400 includes a focusing element 7413 configured to direct an output (e.g., a laser beam) of the optical assembly 7400 (e.g., direct a laser beam to be incident on a print medium) within an exemplary printing device. As shown, in some examples, at least one surface of the focusing element 7413 may be disposed adjacent to a surface of the collimating element 7401 such that the laser beam may traverse the collimating element 7401 to reach the focusing element 7413. In some examples, as depicted, the focusing component 7413 can include a focusing lens 7415, one or more mirrors, and the like.

While some of the embodiments herein provide an exemplary optical assembly 7400, it is noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. For example, in some examples, an exemplary optical assembly 7400 according to the present disclosure may include other elements (one or more additional and/or alternative elements) and/or may be differently configured/positioned than shown in fig. 74.

Referring now to fig. 75, an exemplary schematic diagram depicting a top cross-sectional view of an optical assembly 7500 in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. The exemplary optical assembly 7500 may be similar or identical to the optical assembly 7400 described above in connection with fig. 74. In various examples, the optical assembly 7500 can be configured to collimate, round, and/or focus the laser beam. As depicted in fig. 75, the optical assembly 7500 includes a collimating component 7501 and a focusing component 7513. The example optical assembly 7500 is operable to collimate an output (i.e., a laser beam) generated by an example laser assembly (e.g., a multimode laser). In some examples, at least one surface of the collimating component 7501 may be disposed adjacent to at least a surface of the exemplary laser assembly.

As depicted in fig. 75, the optical assembly 7500 includes a collimation component 7501 configured to control the resolution of the laser beam (e.g., pre-excitation laser beam) in the cross-scan dimension. The collimating component 7501 may be similar to the collimating component 7200 described above in connection with fig. 72. As depicted, the collimating component 7501 includes a cylindrical member/barrel. In some examples, as depicted, the collimating component 7501 is disposed at least partially within the housing 7502 of the optical assembly 7500. In various examples, the collimating component 7501 may be or include one or more lens groups (e.g., one or more groups of lenses). As depicted, the collimating component 7501 includes a first plurality of lenses 7503 and a second plurality of lenses 7505. In some examples, as further depicted, the first plurality of lenses 7503 includes three spherical lenses and the second plurality of lenses 7505 includes two spherical lenses.

In some examples, the first plurality of lenses 7503 may be disposed within the collimating component 7501 and/or define a first end portion of the collimating component (e.g., adjacent to the exemplary laser assembly). In other words, the first plurality of lenses 7503 may be disposed at a first distance relative to the exemplary laser assembly. The first plurality of lenses 7503 may be configured to move independently (i.e., as a group) relative to the second plurality of lenses 7505. For example, the first plurality of lenses 7503 may be configured to move horizontally along an exemplary laser beam path 7504.

As depicted in fig. 75, the collimating component 7501 includes a second plurality of lenses 7505. In some examples, the second plurality of lenses 7505 may be disposed within the collimating component 7501 and/or define a second end portion of the collimating component (e.g., remote from the exemplary laser assembly). In other words, the second plurality of lenses 7505 may be disposed at a second distance relative to the exemplary laser assembly such that the second plurality of lenses 7505 are disposed farther from the laser assembly than the first plurality of lenses 7503. Thus, an exemplary laser beam may travel from the exemplary laser assembly to the first plurality of lenses 7503 and then to the second plurality of lenses 7505. The second plurality of lenses 7505 may be configured to move independently (i.e., as a group) relative to the first plurality of lenses 7503. In various examples, the collimating component 7501 can be configured to move within the housing 7502 of the optical assembly 7500 in order to change the relative positions of the first plurality of lenses 7503 and the second plurality of lenses 7505. As depicted in fig. 75, the collimating component 7501 can be configured to retract in order to modify the distance between the first plurality of lenses 7503 and the second plurality of lenses 7505. Referring again to fig. 75, an exemplary collimating component 7501 is depicted in an extended state as compared to the collimating component 7501 depicted in fig. 75 in a retracted state. Accordingly, the first plurality of lenses 7503 and/or the second plurality of lenses 7505 may be configured to move horizontally along the example laser beam path 7504. In various examples, after reaching the second plurality of lenses 7505, the exemplary laser beam may then enter another component/element of the optical assembly/printing device (e.g., focusing component 7513 in some examples).

As described above, and as depicted in fig. 75, the optical assembly 7500 includes a focusing component 7513 configured to direct an output (e.g., a laser beam) of the optical assembly 7500 (e.g., direct the laser beam to be incident on a print medium) within an exemplary printing device. As shown, in some examples, at least one surface of the focusing component 7513 may be disposed adjacent to a surface of the collimating component 7501 such that the laser beam may traverse the collimating component 7501 to reach the focusing component 7513. In some examples, as depicted, the focusing component 7513 can include a focusing lens 7515, one or more mirrors, and the like.

While some of the embodiments herein provide an exemplary optical component 7500, it is noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. For example, in some examples, an exemplary optical assembly 7500 according to the present disclosure may include other elements (one or more additional and/or alternative elements) and/or may be configured/positioned differently than shown in fig. 75.

Referring now to fig. 76, an exemplary schematic diagram depicting a top cross-sectional view of an optical assembly 7600 in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. In various examples, the optical assembly 7600 can be configured to collimate, round, and/or focus the laser beam. The exemplary optical assembly 7600 is operable to modify a laser beam that may diverge within a particular range in order to provide a laser beam of constant beam size. As depicted in fig. 76, the optical assembly 7600 includes a collimating component 7601, a beam control component 7607, and a focusing component 7613. The example optical assembly 7600 is operable to collimate an output (i.e., a laser beam) generated by an example laser assembly (e.g., a single-mode laser). In some examples, at least one surface of the collimating component 7601 may be disposed adjacent to at least a surface of the exemplary laser assembly.

As depicted in fig. 76, the optical assembly 7600 includes a collimation component 7601 configured to control the resolution of the laser beam (e.g., pre-excitation laser beam) in the cross-scan dimension. The collimating component 7601 may be similar to the collimating component 7300 described above in connection with fig. 73. As depicted, the collimating component 7601 includes a cylindrical member/barrel. In some examples, as depicted, the collimating component 7601 is disposed at least partially within the housing 7602 of the optical assembly 7600. In various examples, the collimating component 7601 can be or include one or more lens groups (e.g., one or more groups of lenses). As depicted, the collimating component 7601 includes a first plurality of lenses 7603 and a second plurality of lenses 7605. In some examples, as further depicted, the first plurality of lenses 7603 includes three spherical lenses and the second plurality of lenses 7605 includes two spherical lenses.

In some examples, the first plurality of lenses 7603 may be disposed within the collimating component 7601 and/or define a first end portion of the collimating component (e.g., adjacent to the exemplary laser assembly). In other words, the first plurality of lenses 7603 may be disposed at a first distance relative to the exemplary laser assembly. The first plurality of lenses 7603 may be configured to move independently (i.e., as a group) relative to the second plurality of lenses 7605. For example, the first plurality of lenses 7603 may be configured to move horizontally along the exemplary laser beam path 7604.

As depicted in fig. 76, the collimating component 7601 includes a second plurality of lenses 7605. In some examples, the second plurality of lenses 7605 may be disposed within the collimating component 7601 and/or define a second end portion of the collimating component (e.g., remote from the exemplary laser assembly). In other words, the second plurality of lenses 7605 may be disposed at a second distance relative to the exemplary laser assembly such that the second plurality of lenses 7605 are disposed farther from the laser assembly than the first plurality of lenses 7603. Thus, an exemplary laser beam may travel from the exemplary laser assembly to the first plurality of lenses 7603 and then to the second plurality of lenses 7605. The second plurality of lenses 7605 may be configured to move independently (i.e., as a group) with respect to the first plurality of lenses 7603. In various examples, after reaching the second plurality of lenses 7605, the exemplary laser beam may then enter another component/element of the optical assembly/printing device (e.g., beam control component 7607 in some examples).

As described above, and as depicted in fig. 76, the optical assembly 7600 includes a beam control component 7607. The exemplary beam control component 7607 is operable to modify a laser beam to produce a laser beam of a particular aspect ratio (e.g., a circular aspect ratio of 1:1) while directing the laser beam in a constant direction. As shown, in some examples, at least a surface of the beam steering component 7607 is disposed adjacent to a surface of the collimating component 7601 such that the laser beam can traverse the collimating component 7601 to reach the beam steering component 7607. As depicted, the beam control component 7607 includes a first prism element 7609 and a second prism element 7611 (e.g., defining anamorphic prism pairs) configured to modify a dimension of the laser beam along one axis (e.g., expand the size of the laser beam in a horizontal dimension). For example, the beam control component 7607 is operable to modify the shape of the laser beam based on the relative angular positions of the exemplary first prism element 7609 and the second prism element 7611. For example, the beam control component 7607 may be operable to modify an elliptical beam shape generated by a laser source into a circular beam shape. In various examples, as depicted, the exemplary beam control component 7607 includes a control pin 7608 to facilitate adjusting the relative position of the first prism element 7609 and the second prism element 7611. In some examples, the beam control component 7607 may be configured to automatically adjust the relative positions of the first prism element 7609 and the second prism element 7611 in response to detecting the divergence of the laser beam.

As described above, and as depicted in fig. 76, the optical assembly 7600 includes a focusing component 7613 configured to direct an output (e.g., a laser beam) of the optical assembly 7600 (e.g., direct the laser beam to be incident on a print medium) within an exemplary printing device. As shown, in some examples, at least one surface of the focusing component 7613 may be disposed adjacent to a surface of the beam control component 7607 such that the laser beam may traverse the beam control component 7607 to reach the focusing component 7613. In some examples, as depicted, the focusing component 7613 can include a focusing lens 7615, one or more mirrors, and/or the like.

While some of the embodiments herein provide an exemplary optical component 7600, it is noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. For example, in some examples, an exemplary optical assembly 7600 according to the present disclosure may include other elements (one or more additional and/or alternative elements) and/or may be configured/positioned differently than shown in fig. 76.

Referring now to fig. 77, an example schematic diagram depicting a perspective view of an example beam control component 7700 is provided, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure. In various examples, beam control component 7700 is operable to control a laser beam that diverges within a particular range in order to provide a laser beam of constant beam size (i.e., to perform aspect ratio control). In some examples, beam control component 7700 can be configured to control or modify the output of a single mode laser. As depicted in fig. 77, the beam control component 7700 includes a first prism element 7701 and a second prism element 7703. In some examples, at least one surface of beam steering component 7700 can be disposed adjacent to an exemplary collimating component. Additionally, in some examples, at least one surface of beam steering component 7700 can be disposed adjacent to an exemplary focusing component.

In some examples, and as depicted in fig. 77, the beam control component 7700 includes a first prism element 7701 and a second prism element 7703 that define an anamorphic prism pair. As depicted in fig. 77, the first prism element 7701 and the second prism element 7703 may be optically identical. In various examples, the first prism element 7701 and the second prism element 7703 can be disposed at least partially within a housing 7702 (e.g., a housing of an exemplary optical assembly/printing device). The first prism element 7701 and the second prism element 7703 can operate to control (e.g., expand or compress) the laser beam so as to produce a laser beam of a particular aspect ratio (e.g., a 1:1 circular aspect ratio) while directing the laser beam in a constant direction. For example, the beam control component 7700 is operable to modify the shape of the laser beam based on the relative angular positions of the exemplary first prism element 7701 and the second prism element 7703. For example, the beam control component 7700 is operable to modify an elliptical beam shape generated by the laser source to a circular beam shape. By way of example, the first prism element 7701 may deflect an exemplary laser beam in a first direction and the second prism element 7703 may deflect an exemplary laser beam in an opposite direction. In this way, each of the first prism element 7701 and the second prism element 7703 can modify the dimensions of the exemplary laser beam. When the beam incident angles of the first prism element 7701 and the second prism element 7703 are set to equal and opposite directions, the resulting beam is parallel to the incident beam such that the net beam angle deviation is zero and the residual beam deviates from the optical axis. In various examples, as depicted, the exemplary beam control component 7707 includes a control pin 7705 configured to facilitate adjusting the relative positions of the first prism element 7701 and the second prism element 7703. In various examples, the control pin 7705 simultaneously controls the movement of the first prism element 7701 and the second prism element 7703 such that they are always aligned and thus provide a near constant beam offset at any expanded setting. As described above, the beam control component 7707 may be configured to adjust the relative positions of the first prism element 7701 and the second prism element 7703 manually or automatically (e.g., dynamically) in response to detecting the divergence of the laser beam. The beam steering component 7700 can further include a beam measuring element (e.g., disposed adjacent to an exit aperture of the beam steering component 7700). Thus, based on the detected measurements associated with the laser beam, the relative positions of the first prism element 7701 and the second prism element 7703 can be adjusted and tuned, either manually or automatically, based on real-time feedback until a target beam size and target aspect ratio are achieved. The example control pin 7705 is operable to orient the first prism element 7701 and the second prism element 7703 relative to each other to direct the example laser beam in a constant direction. As depicted in fig. 77, the control pin 7705 is disposed in the first position such that the first prism element 7701 and the second prism element 7703 are at a maximum relative position with respect to each other. In various examples, the control pin 7705 can facilitate orienting the first prism element 7701 and the second prism element 7703 in a plurality of relative positions with respect to each other.

While some of the embodiments herein provide an exemplary beam control component 7700, it should be noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. For example, in some examples, beam steering component 7700 according to the present disclosure can include other elements (one or more additional and/or alternative elements) and/or can be configured/positioned differently than shown in fig. 77.

Referring now to fig. 78, an example schematic diagram depicting a perspective view of an example beam steering component 7800 is provided, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure. The beam steering component 7800 may be similar or identical to the beam steering component 7700 described above in connection with fig. 77. In various examples, the beam control component 7800 is operable to control a laser beam that diverges within a particular range in order to provide a laser beam of constant beam size (i.e., perform aspect ratio control). In some examples, beam control component 7800 can be configured to control or modify the output of a single mode laser. As depicted in fig. 78, beam steering component 7800 includes a first prism element 7801 and a second prism element 7803. In some examples, at least one surface of beam steering component 7800 may be disposed adjacent to an exemplary collimating component. Additionally, in some examples, at least one surface of beam steering component 7800 may be disposed adjacent to an exemplary focusing component.

As described above, and as depicted in fig. 78, beam steering component 7800 includes first prism element 7801 and second prism element 7803 defining anamorphic prism pairs. As depicted in fig. 78, the first prism element 7801 and the second prism element 7803 may be optically identical. In various examples, the first prism element 7801 and the second prism element 7803 may be disposed at least partially within a housing 7802 (e.g., a housing of an example optical assembly/printing device). The first prism element 7801 and the second prism element 7803 can operate to control (e.g., expand or compress) the laser beam so as to generate a laser beam of a particular aspect ratio (e.g., a 1:1 circular aspect ratio) while directing the laser beam in a constant direction. For example, the beam control component 7800 is operable to modify the shape of the laser beam based on the relative angular positions of the exemplary first prism element 7801 and the second prism element 7803. For example, the beam control component 7800 is operable to modify an elliptical beam shape generated by the laser source to a circular beam shape. By way of example, the first prism element 7801 may deflect an exemplary laser beam in a first direction and the second prism element 7803 may deflect an exemplary laser beam in an opposite direction. In this way, each of the first prism element 7801 and the second prism element 7803 may modify the size of the exemplary laser beam. When the beam incident angles of the first prism element 7801 and the second prism element 7803 are set to equal and opposite directions, the resulting beam is parallel to the incident beam such that the net beam angle deviation is zero and the residual beam deviates from the optical axis. In various examples, as depicted, the exemplary beam control component 7807 includes a control pin 7805 configured to facilitate adjusting the relative positions of the first prism element 7801 and the second prism element 7803. In various examples, the control pin 7805 simultaneously controls the movement of the first prism element 7801 and the second prism element 7803 such that they are always aligned and thus provide a near constant beam offset at any expanded setting. As described above, the beam control component 7800 may be configured to adjust the relative positions of the first prism element 7801 and the second prism element 7803 manually or automatically (e.g., dynamically) in response to detecting the divergence of the laser beam. The beam steering component 7800 can further include a beam measuring element (e.g., disposed adjacent to an exit aperture of the beam steering component 7800). Thus, based on the detected measurements associated with the laser beam, the relative positions of the first prism element 7801 and the second prism element 7803 may be manually or automatically adjusted and tuned based on real-time feedback until a target beam size and target aspect ratio are achieved. The example control pin 7805 is operable to orient the first prism element 7801 and the second prism element 7803 relative to each other to direct the example laser beam in a constant direction. As depicted in fig. 78, the control pin 7805 is disposed in the second position such that the first prism element 7801 and the second prism element 7803 are at a minimum relative position with respect to each other. In various examples, the control pin 7805 may facilitate orienting the first prism element 7801 and the second prism element 7803 in a plurality of relative positions with respect to each other.

While some of the embodiments herein provide an exemplary beam steering component 7800, it should be noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. For example, in some examples, beam steering component 7800 according to the present disclosure may include other elements (one or more additional and/or alternative elements) and/or may be configured/positioned differently than shown in fig. 78. For example, beam steering component 7800 may include one prism element or more than two prism elements.

Improving laser absorption efficiency by reducing light transmittance

In various examples, the laser markable coating may be used in conjunction with a laser source to create a mark (e.g., a bar code) on a print medium. An exemplary laser markable coating can include at least one color former (e.g., leuco dye), at least one developer (e.g., proton donor), and at least one photothermal converter. An exemplary photo-thermal converter may be a material that converts electromagnetic radiation (EMF), particularly Infrared (IR) laser light, into thermal energy. Such laser markable coatings suffer from technical difficulties and challenges.

In some examples, multiple color formers may be mixed together to provide a target hue/color upon laser activation. In such a case, the exemplary color former, developer, and photothermal conversion agent may need to be kept separate as discrete particles (e.g., in an unreacted and colorless state) so that they do not prematurely react with each other (e.g., until laser radiation is incident thereon). However, in some examples, color uniformity and rapid activation may be difficult to achieve by separating the color former, developer, and photothermal conversion agent.

In some examples, the use of higher melting temperatures may result in better color stability, but may unduly slow laser marking speeds. In addition, in many examples, it is not possible to maintain the exemplary color former, developer, and photothermal conversion agent in a completely colorless state in which the color develops only in response to exposure to IR laser light. In many examples, the color former, developer, and/or photothermal conversion agent can comprise a natural color. By way of example, the photothermal conversion agent may include an IR absorbing dye, which in some examples may be blue, green, yellow, brown, or black.

Referring now to fig. 79, an exemplary schematic diagram depicting a side cross-sectional view of a print medium 7900 in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. In response to receiving electromagnetic radiation (e.g., IR energy 7902), the example print medium 7900 may react by converting the absorbed electromagnetic radiation (e.g., IR energy) into thermal energy to impinge a mark on the print medium 7900. As shown in fig. 79, print medium 7900 includes a plurality of layers/substrates defining a unitary body. In some examples, print medium 7900 can have a thickness dimension of less than 0.2 mm. As depicted in fig. 79, an exemplary print medium 7900 includes a laser markable coating 7901 and a substrate 7903.

As depicted in fig. 79, an exemplary print medium 7900 includes a laser markable coating 7901 defining a top surface of the print medium 7900. Exemplary laser markable coating 7901 may include a variety of reactive components. For example, the laser-markable coating 7901 can include at least one color former (e.g., leuco dye), at least one developer (e.g., proton donor), and at least one photothermal converter. In response to electromagnetic radiation, the example laser markable coating 7901 may convert the electromagnetic radiation into thermal energy to impinge a mark onto a print medium.

As depicted in fig. 79, the exemplary printing device 7900 includes a substrate 7903 defining a bottom surface of the printing medium 7900. In various examples, the substrate 7903 may be or include a layer of treated fibers such as, but not limited to, wood pulp, rice, organic materials (e.g., plants), and the like.

In some examples, the exemplary print medium 7900 may be exposed to electromagnetic radiation (e.g., IR energy 7902). By way of example, the print medium 7900 may be exposed to IR energy 7902 having a wavelength of 1064 nanometers or 1.064 microns. In such examples, the first portion of energy (in some examples, approximately 25% of the IR energy 7902) may be backscattered or reflected back from the initial direction of the laser at some angle greater than 90 degrees and generally toward the direction of the laser source. Thus, the portion of the energy emitted by the laser source (i.e., 25% of the IR energy 7902) may not be absorbed by the print medium 7900 and may not participate in the conversion of the laser markable coating 7901 (i.e., the reactive component) to generate a mark (e.g., an image). Additionally, a second portion of the energy (in some examples, approximately 25% of the IR energy 7902) may be transmitted such that it bypasses the laser markable coating 7901 (e.g., either directly in line with the path of the incident IR energy 7902 or deflected at some angle less than 90 degrees from the original direction of the laser source). Thus, this second portion of the energy may also not be absorbed by the print medium 7900 and may not participate in the conversion of the laser markable coating 7901 (i.e., the reactive component) to generate a mark (e.g., an image). In addition, the third portion of energy (in some examples, approximately 50% of the IR energy 7902) may be undetectable. In other words, approximately 50% of the IR energy 7902 may be undetectable (e.g., identified as striking a side of the print medium 7900 or exiting a bottom surface of the print medium 7900). Thus, only a third portion of the IR energy 7902 is absorbed by the print medium 7900 and available for conversion to thermal energy, thus facilitating the reaction required by the laser markable coating 7901 (i.e., reactive component) of the print medium 7900 to produce a mark (e.g., an image). As described above, a loss of approximately 50% of the IR energy 7902 provided by the exemplary laser source results in a suboptimal use of the available energy.

The systems, methods, and techniques described herein provide print media with laser-markable coatings that are stable in a variety of environments, regardless of storage conditions and/or exposure to incident light and/or heat. In some examples, the laser markable coating material may not need to be in a colorless, near colorless, or color neutral state prior to activation. In addition, activation of the exemplary laser markable coating material may occur at a higher optimal rate. Furthermore, the total cost of use for the customer will be significantly lower than in existing solutions. For example, exemplary customers may reduce costs associated with consumption of materials including ink, diluent solvent, cleaning solvent, sponge, and cleaning materials. Furthermore, the customer may not be burdened with security training, personal protection equipment, and environmental reporting required by existing solutions. In addition, methods and systems are provided herein that result in less waste of incident radiation (e.g., IR energy). In some examples, the total amount of IR energy absorbed by the target medium may be significantly increased while providing faster operation and generating marks with higher optical densities.

Referring now to fig. 80, an exemplary schematic diagram depicting a side cross-sectional view of a print medium 8000 according to various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. In response to receiving electromagnetic radiation (e.g., IR energy), the example print medium 8000 may react by converting the absorbed electromagnetic radiation (e.g., IR energy) into thermal energy to illuminate the indicia onto the print medium 8000. As shown in fig. 80, print medium 8000 includes a plurality of layers/substrates that define a unitary body. In some examples, print medium 8000 may have a thickness dimension of less than 0.2 mm. As depicted in fig. 80, exemplary print medium 8000 includes a laser markable coating 8001, a reflective layer 8003, an absorbing layer 8005, and a substrate 8007.

As depicted in fig. 80, exemplary print medium 8000 includes a laser markable coating 8001 defining a top surface of print medium 8000. Exemplary laser markable coating 8001 may include a variety of reactive components. For example, laser markable coating 8001 can include at least one color former (e.g., leuco dye), at least one developer (e.g., proton donor), and at least one photothermal converter. In response to receiving electromagnetic radiation (e.g., IR energy 8002), the example laser markable coating 8001 may convert the electromagnetic radiation into thermal energy to impinge a mark onto the print medium 8000.

As depicted in fig. 80, in some examples, print medium 8000 may include a reflective layer 8003 defining an intermediate layer of print medium 8000. For example, as shown, reflective layer 8003 may be disposed adjacent to the bottom surface of laser markable coating 8001. The reflective layer 8003 is operable to prevent transmission of IR energy 8002 through the bottom surface of the print medium 8000 by reflecting the IR energy 8002 toward the laser markable coating that absorbs the IR energy. In various examples, the reflective layer 8003 may not be disposed directly adjacent to the laser markable coating 8001, and may be disposed adjacent to any intermediate layers of the print media 8000. In various examples, the reflective layer 8003 may be or include a metal layer and/or metal particles. In some examples, the reflective layer 8003 may include vacuum metallized aluminum metal. Reflective layer 8003 may include aluminum, nickel, bronze, steel, combinations thereof, and the like. In some examples, reflective layer 8003 may include hexagonal boron nitride (h-BN).

As further depicted in fig. 80, in some examples, print medium 8000 includes an absorbent layer 8005 defining another intermediate layer of print medium 8000. For example, as shown, the absorber layer 8005 may be disposed adjacent to the bottom surface of the reflector layer 8003. However, it is noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. In other examples, the absorbent layer 8005 may be positioned differently than shown in fig. 80. The absorber layer 8005 is operable to absorb a portion of the IR energy 8002 in order to improve the reactivity of the exemplary print media 8000. For example, the thermal energy generated by absorbing a portion of the IR energy 8002 can improve the reactivity (e.g., reaction rate) of the laser-markable coating 8001. In this way, the absorber layer 8005 is operable to improve the optical density associated with the marks generated on the laser markable coating 8001. In some examples, the absorber layer 8005 can include a metal oxide, a ceramic, or the like. In one example, the absorber layer 8005 can include titanium dioxide.

As depicted in fig. 80, exemplary printing device 8000 includes a substrate 8007 defining a bottom surface of print medium 8000. In some examples, as depicted, the substrate 8007 can be disposed adjacent to a bottom surface of the absorber layer 8005. In various examples, substrate 8007 may be or include a layer of treated fibers such as, but not limited to, wood pulp, rice, organic materials (e.g., plants), and the like.

Although some of the embodiments herein provide an exemplary print medium 8000, it is noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. For example, in some examples, exemplary print media 8000 according to the present disclosure may include other elements (one or more additional and/or alternative elements) and/or may be differently configured/positioned than shown in fig. 80.

Darkness and contrast adjustment

As described above, various embodiments of the present disclosure may utilize a laser printhead to perform laser printing on a print medium. For example, various embodiments of the present disclosure may utilize laser technology to mark a special purpose print medium having a reactive coating tuned to react to the printer laser. In some embodiments, when printing on the same media type, there are manufacturing variations in the reactive coating that make print quality unstable even when a constant laser power is applied. In addition, print quality may also vary due to the media substrate, meaning that print quality may vary even though the laser power is the same and even though it is exactly the same as the reactive coating of one print medium with another print medium. Thus, there is a need to fine tune the operating parameters associated with printheads in order to account for print quality differences within the same media type as well as between different media types. In embodiments where the printing device utilizes thermal printing techniques, the fine tuning process may be accomplished by adjusting contrast and darkness parameters that control the duration of time that the thermal print head is turned on and off. In embodiments where the printing device utilizes laser printing techniques (including but not limited to pulsed lasers, continuous lasers, etc.), the present disclosure provides exemplary methods and algorithms for adjusting contrast and darkness.

Various embodiments of the present disclosure may overcome technical challenges associated with adjusting contrast and darkness in printing devices utilizing laser printing techniques. For example, some embodiments of the present disclosure may adjust darkness and contrast within a laser printhead (e.g., by controller 2008 of printhead 302 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20), rather than by the CPU of the printing device (e.g., processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27), which may reduce processing time and free up CPU resources, so the printing device may process print jobs more efficiently than a thermal printer. Some embodiments of the present disclosure may provide a set of methods of adjusting darkness and contrast that improve print quality to produce class a barcodes and improved text and drawing printouts. In some embodiments, the set of methods may include an algorithm, a look-up table, or a combination of both. Some embodiments of the present disclosure may directly adjust the power level of the output power from a laser printhead in order to modify darkness or contrast in the printed output, which may be applicable to printheads utilizing continuous or pulsed lasers. Some embodiments of the present disclosure may directly adjust the on-duration (e.g., duty cycle) of a laser printhead when printing dots in order to modify darkness or contrast, which may be applicable to printheads utilizing pulsed lasers. In contrast, a printing device utilizing thermal printing technology adjusts the on-duration only when printing an entire line (rather than printing dots by a printing device utilizing laser printing technology).

In this disclosure, the term "darkness setting input" refers to an input provided by a user (e.g., through various user interfaces described herein, such as, but not limited to, UI 140 described above in connection with fig. 1) that indicates a desired darkness level in a printout produced by a laser printhead. In response to the darkness setting input indicating an increase in darkness, the laser printhead produces an overall printed output that is darker than the printed output prior to the increase in darkness, details of which are described herein. In response to the darkness setting input indicating a darkness reduction, the laser printhead produces an overall printed output that is shallower than the printed output prior to the darkness reduction, details of which are described herein.

In this disclosure, the term "contrast setting input" refers to an input provided by a user (e.g., through various user interfaces described herein, such as, but not limited to, UI 140 described above in connection with fig. 1) that indicates a desired level of contrast in a printout produced by a laser printhead. In response to the contrast setting input indicating an increase in contrast, the laser printhead produces any dark gray regions with darker printouts and any light gray regions with lighter/whiter printouts, the details of which are described herein. In response to the contrast setting input indicating a contrast reduction, the laser printhead produces any dark gray regions with a lighter printout and any light gray regions with a darker printout, the details of which are described herein.

As described above, in examples where the printing apparatus utilizes thermal printing techniques, any contrast/darkness adjustment will be made by the printer CPU via image processing techniques or by calculating a modified on time for the entire line from the darkness/contrast settings. In some embodiments, the printer CPU may receive the print data and create the first image buffer based on the print data. The printer CPU may then adjust by applying a darkness algorithm, applying a contrast algorithm, and rendering a new image buffer or adjusting the on-time of the printhead. For example, the printer CPU may modify the pixel values up or down when applying the darkness algorithm, and may determine the minimum and maximum pixel values before applying the contrast algorithm. Once the adjustment is complete, the printer CPU may provide the print data to a laser printhead, which in turn may provide the print data to a laser power control system (e.g., laser power control system 2006 described above in connection with fig. 20).

As described above, in a printing apparatus using a thermal printing technique, darkness and contrast of a print output depend on a previous point, a current point, and a future point to be printed in a column, and a duration of the entire segment (for example, an on time of a print line). In some embodiments, a line is made up of four segments, meaning that the printing device prints four times on the same line before printing the next line. The calculation behind the on-duration may be based on the test cases to identify the best match for any type of bar code/printout; however, this method is not applicable to all types of printouts and bar codes. In addition, efficient processing using image processing techniques may be time consuming and process intensive for the printer CPU when performing print operations and other tasks, and thus such techniques may not be suitable for many printing devices. Furthermore, the thermal management algorithm used in thermal printing devices cannot be used in laser printing devices because of the different printing techniques. For example, the thermal management algorithm used in the thermal printing device may be dedicated to line-by-line printing, while the laser printing device prints point-by-point, as described above.

Exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure may overcome technical challenges associated with adjusting contrast and darkness in printing devices utilizing laser printing techniques. Referring now to FIG. 81, an exemplary method 8100 is illustrated. In particular, exemplary method 8100 illustrates exemplary steps/operations for adjusting a power level in response to a darkness setting input and/or a contrast setting input. In some embodiments, the contrast and darkness setting modifications are made by a controller of the printhead of the printing apparatus circuit (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 of printhead 302 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20), which may improve the printing operation efficiency because the main printer CPU does not handle any intensive darkness/contrast adjustment.

In the example shown in fig. 81, the example method 8100 begins at block 8101 and then proceeds to step/operation 8103. At step/operation 8103, processing circuitry (e.g., a controller of a printhead of a printing device, such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 of printhead 302 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20) may receive print data.

In some examples, the print data may be in the form of an image buffer. In some embodiments, a processor of a printing device (e.g., a main CPU of the printing device) may receive raw print data including data representing a bar code, text, image, etc., to be printed on a print medium. A processor of the printing device (e.g., a main CPU of the printing device) may generate an image buffer based at least in part on the raw print data and provide temporary storage for the raw print data. The processor of the printing device may provide an image buffer to a controller of the printhead (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 of printhead 302 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20) before the printhead begins printing the bar code, text, image, etc., represented by the raw print data.

In some implementations, the print data can indicate at least a first power level. In this disclosure, the term "power level" refers to the amount of power provided to the laser source when performing a printing operation. In some embodiments, the power level may be expressed as a percentage of the maximum power that may be provided to the laser source. For example, when the power level is 100%, the maximum power is provided to the laser source, which in turn produces a full black spot. When the power level is 0%, minimal or no power is provided to the laser source, which produces a full white point.

In some embodiments, the first power level is associated with a first point to be printed on the print medium by the printhead. In examples where no darkness or contrast adjustment is made, the power level provided to the laser source in the printhead is equal to the first power level. For example, if the first power level is equal to 40%, then when no darkness or contrast adjustment is made, the power level provided to the laser source is equal to 40%, and the laser source prints the first dot at 40% of the maximum power. If the first power level is equal to 72%, then the power level provided to the laser source is equal to 72% when no darkness or contrast adjustment is made, and the laser source prints the first dot at 72% of the maximum power. This relationship between the first power level and the power level provided to the laser source when no darkness or contrast adjustment is made is illustrated by curve 8202 in an exemplary graph 8200 shown in fig. 82. In the exemplary chart 8200 shown in fig. 82, the laser source prints a full white point when a 0% power level is provided to the laser source; when a 100% power level is provided to the laser source, the laser source prints a full black dot. This relationship between the first power level and the power level provided to the laser source is also shown in the following exemplary algorithm when no darkness or contrast adjustment is made:

Power(y)＝x

In the above exemplary algorithm, power (y) is the Power level provided to the laser source, and x is the first Power level.

Referring back to fig. 81, after step/operation 8103, the exemplary method 8100 proceeds to step/operation 8105. At step/operation 8105, processing circuitry (e.g., a controller of a printhead of a printing device, such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 of printhead 302 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20) may receive a darkness setting input.

In some implementations, the darkness setting input may be received by a controller of the printhead. As described above, the darkness setting input may indicate a desired darkness level in the printout. In some embodiments, the darkness setting input may be expressed as a percentage between-100% and +100%. For example, -100% darkness setting input indicates that darkness in the printout is reduced to a minimum value, and +100% darkness setting input indicates that darkness in the printout is increased to a maximum value. In some embodiments, the darkness setting input indicates an increase in darkness and the darkness setting input indicates a decrease in darkness. In some embodiments, there is no change in darkness when the darkness setting input is equal to zero.

Referring back to fig. 81, after step/operation 8105, exemplary method 8100 proceeds to step/operation 8107. At step/operation 8107, a processing circuit (e.g., a controller of a printhead of a printing device, such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 of printhead 302 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20) may adjust the power level.

In some embodiments, the controller of the printhead may adjust the power level when the printhead is in a continuous laser printing mode (e.g., the laser source continuously emits a laser beam). In some embodiments, the controller of the printhead may adjust the power level when the printhead is in a pulsed laser printing mode (e.g., the laser source starts and stops firing laser beams based on a regular cadence).

In some implementations, the controller of the printhead can adjust the first power level to the second power level based at least in part on the darkness setting input. For example, the controller may adjust the power level based on the following exemplary algorithm:

in the above algorithm, x is a first power level that is between 0% (inclusive) and 100% (inclusive). Dark is a Darkness setting input that is adjustable by a user, between-100% (inclusive) and 100% (inclusive). Ratio% is a darkness step Ratio that is predetermined and fixed by the printing device based on the step between two darkness levels. In other words, adjusting the first power level to the second power level is further based on the darkness step ratio. In some embodiments, the darkness step ratio is 25%. In some embodiments, the darkness step ratio is less than 25%. In some embodiments, the darkness step ratio is greater than 25%.

In the above algorithm, the second power level P (y) is clipped/normalized between 0% or 100% using the min calculation and the max calculation in case the calculated value is lower than 0% or higher than 100%. The following is an exemplary calculation of the second power level P (y) in a hypothetical use case, in which case the first power level x is equal to 60%, the Darkness step Ratio is equal to 25%, and the Darkness setting input dark is equal to +15%:

FIG. 83 is an exemplary graph 8300 illustrating an exemplary relationship between a first power level and a second power level in response to receiving a plurality of darkness setting inputs.

Specifically, curve 8301 illustrates an exemplary relationship between the first power level and the second power level in response to receiving a darkness setting input indicating +100%. A curve 8303 shows an exemplary relationship between the first power level and the second power level in response to receiving a darkness setting input indicating +75%. Curve 8305 shows an exemplary relationship between the first power level and the second power level in response to receiving a darkness setting input indicating +50%. Curve 8307 shows an exemplary relationship between the first power level and the second power level in response to receiving a darkness setting input indicating +25%. Curve 8309 shows an exemplary relationship between the first power level and the second power level in response to receiving a darkness setting input indicating 0%. Curve 8311 shows an exemplary relationship between the first power level and the second power level in response to receiving a darkness setting input indicating-25%. Curve 8313 shows an exemplary relationship between the first power level and the second power level in response to receiving a darkness setting input indicating-50%. Curve 8315 shows an exemplary relationship between the first power level and the second power level in response to receiving a darkness setting input indicating-75%. Curve 8317 shows an exemplary relationship between the first power level and the second power level in response to receiving a darkness setting input indicative of-100%.

FIG. 84 illustrates an exemplary image of an exemplary printout. Fig. 85 shows an exemplary image of the exemplary printout of fig. 83 after darkness has increased. Fig. 86 shows an exemplary image of the exemplary printout of fig. 83 after a reduction in darkness.

As shown in the examples of fig. 83-86, in response to receiving a darkness increase (e.g., a darkness setting input) associated with a darkness setting input, a controller of the printhead increases the first power level to the second power level. In other words, the second power level is higher than the first power level, thereby making the overall print output darker. In response to receiving a darkness reduction (e.g., a darkness setting input) associated with the darkness setting input, the controller of the printhead reduces the first power level to a second power level. In other words, the second power level is lower than the first power level, thereby making the overall print output shallower.

Referring back to fig. 81, after step/operation 8107, the exemplary method 8100 proceeds to step/operation 8109. At step/operation 8109, a processing circuit (e.g., a controller of a printhead of a printing device, such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 of printhead 302 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20) may receive a contrast setting input.

In some implementations, the contrast setting input may be received by a controller of the printhead. As described above, the contrast setting input may indicate a desired contrast level in the printout. In some embodiments, the contrast setting input may be expressed as a percentage between-100% and +100%. For example, -100% contrast setting input indicates that the contrast in the printout decreases to a minimum value, and +100% contrast setting input indicates that the contrast in the printout increases to a maximum value. In some embodiments, a positive contrast setting input indicates an increase in contrast and a negative contrast setting input indicates a decrease in contrast. In some embodiments, when the contrast setting input is equal to zero, the contrast does not change. In some embodiments, the contrast setting input may modify the slope and/or curve between white to black, thereby making the print output greyish (contrast reduced) or more black-and-white (contrast increased).

Referring back to fig. 81, after step/operation 8109, the exemplary method 8100 proceeds to step/operation 8111. At step/operation 8111, a processing circuit (e.g., a controller of a printhead of a printing device, such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 of printhead 302 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20) may adjust the power level.

In some implementations, the controller of the printhead can adjust the second power level to a third power level based at least in part on the contrast setting input. For example, the controller may adjust the power level based on the following exemplary algorithm:

in the above algorithm, x is a second power level that is between 0% (inclusive) and 100% (inclusive). Contrast is a Contrast setting input that can be adjusted by a user, between-100% (inclusive) and 100% (inclusive). Ratio% is a contrast step Ratio that is predetermined and fixed by the printing device based on the steepness of the slope between the two contrast levels. In other words, adjusting the second power level to the third power level is further based on the contrast step ratio. In some embodiments, the contrast step ratio is 25%. In some embodiments, the contrast step ratio is less than 25%. In some embodiments, the contrast step ratio is greater than 25%. A is a predetermined fixed amplitude value of the curvature. In some embodiments, a is set to 1. In some embodiments, a is set to other values.

In the above algorithm, the third power level P (y) is clipped/normalized between 0% or 100% using the min calculation and the max calculation in case the calculated value is lower than 0% or higher than 100%. f is a frequency value based on whether the power level is normalized. Thus, in the above algorithm, the power level is normalized, and thus f is set to 100. In examples where the power level is not normalized, f is set to a maximum power level value.

The following is an exemplary calculation of the third power level P (y) in a hypothetical use case, in which case the second power level x is equal to 60%, the Contrast step Ratio% is equal to 25%, the Contrast setting input Contrast is equal to +55%, the amplitude a is equal to 1, and the frequency f is equal to 100%:

fig. 87 shows an exemplary graph 8700 that includes a curve 8703 that indicates a relationship between a second power level and a third power level in response to receiving a contrast setting input. Specifically, the contrast setting input indicates an increase in contrast of +100%. Curve 8701 indicates the relationship between the second power level and the third power level when no contrast setting input is received.

In fig. 87, line 8705 indicates an exemplary power level threshold. In the example shown in fig. 87, the exemplary power level threshold is set to 50%. In some embodiments, an exemplary power level threshold may be less than 50%. In some embodiments, an exemplary power level threshold may be greater than 50%.

As shown in fig. 87, in response to receiving the contrast increase associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second power level meets a power level threshold (e.g., greater than 50%), the controller of the printhead increases the second power level to a third power level (e.g., the third power level is higher than the second power level). In other words, as contrast increases, the output power of a darker spot (e.g., greater than 50%) increases, making the spot even darker.

In response to receiving the contrast increase associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second power level does not meet the power level threshold (e.g., less than 50%), the controller of the printhead reduces the second power level to a third power level (e.g., the third power level is lower than the second power level). In other words, as contrast increases, the output power of a shallower point (e.g., less than 50%) decreases, making the point even shallower.

Fig. 88 shows an exemplary graph 8800 including a curve 8804 indicating a relationship between the second power level and the third power level in response to receiving a contrast setting input. Specifically, the contrast setting input indicates a contrast reduction of-100%. Curve 8802 indicates the relationship between the second power level and the third power level when no contrast setting input is received.

In fig. 88, line 8806 indicates an exemplary power level threshold. In the example shown in fig. 88, the exemplary power level threshold is set to 50%. In some embodiments, an exemplary power level threshold may be less than 50%. In some embodiments, an exemplary power level threshold may be greater than 50%.

As shown in fig. 88, in response to receiving a contrast reduction associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second power level meets a power level threshold (e.g., greater than 50%), the controller of the printhead reduces the second power level to a third power level (e.g., the third power level is lower than the second power level). In other words, when the contrast ratio decreases, the output power of a darker point (for example, higher than 50%) decreases, thereby making the point shallower.

In response to receiving the contrast reduction associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second power level does not meet the power level threshold (e.g., less than 50%), the controller of the printhead increases the second power level to a third power level (e.g., the third power level is higher than the second power level). In other words, when the contrast ratio is reduced, the output power of a shallower point (for example, less than 50%) increases, thereby making the point darker.

Fig. 89 is an exemplary graph 8900 showing an exemplary relationship between a second power level and a third power level in response to receiving a plurality of contrast setting inputs.

Specifically, line 8919 indicates that the exemplary power level threshold is at 50%. Curve 8901 shows an exemplary relationship between the second power level and the third power level in response to receiving a contrast setting input indicating +100%. Curve 8903 shows an exemplary relationship between the second power level and the third power level in response to receiving a contrast setting input indicating +75%. Curve 8905 shows an exemplary relationship between the second power level and the third power level in response to receiving a contrast setting input indicating +50%. Curve 8907 shows an exemplary relationship between the second power level and the third power level in response to receiving a contrast setting input indicating +25%. Curve 8909 shows an exemplary relationship between the second power level and the third power level in response to receiving a contrast setting input indicating 0%. Curve 8911 shows an exemplary relationship between the second power level and the third power level in response to receiving a contrast setting input indicating-25%. Curve 8913 shows an exemplary relationship between the second power level and the third power level in response to receiving a contrast setting input indicating-50%. Curve 8915 shows an exemplary relationship between the second power level and the third power level in response to receiving a contrast setting input indicating-75%. Curve 8917 shows an exemplary relationship between the second power level and the third power level in response to receiving a contrast setting input indicative of-100%.

Fig. 90 shows an exemplary image of an exemplary printout. Fig. 91 illustrates an exemplary image of the exemplary printout of fig. 90 after a contrast increase. Fig. 92 shows an exemplary image of the exemplary printout of fig. 90 after a reduction in contrast.

Referring back to fig. 81, after step/operation 8111, the exemplary method 8100 proceeds to step/operation 8115. At step/operation 8115, processing circuitry (e.g., a controller of a printhead of a printing device, such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 of printhead 302 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20) may provide input power.

In some embodiments, the controller of the printhead may provide a third power level to the laser power control system of the printhead. As described above, the third power level has been adjusted based on the darkness setting input and the contrast setting input. The laser power control system of the printhead is configured to cause the laser subsystem of the printhead to print the first dot at a third power level. In this way, the printing device prints the first dot at a desired darkness level and a desired contrast level provided by the user via the darkness setting input and the contrast setting input, respectively.

Referring back to fig. 81, after step/operation 8115, the exemplary method 8100 proceeds to step/operation 8117 and ends.

In some embodiments, after step/operation 8111 and before step/operation 8115, exemplary method 8100 may proceed to step/operation 8113. At step/operation 8117, a processing circuit (e.g., a controller of a printhead of a printing device, such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 of printhead 302 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20) may apply a smoothing/sharpening algorithm.

Referring now to fig. 93, an exemplary method 9300 is shown. In particular, exemplary method 9300 illustrates exemplary steps/operations for adjusting a power level in response to a smoothness setting input and/or a sharpness setting input.

In various embodiments of the present disclosure, by modifying darkness and contrast, it is possible to see artifacts in the edges of black and white areas of separate prints, which artifacts are typically seen between bars of a bar code. Thus, after adjusting the power level based on the darkness setting input and/or the contrast setting input, the exemplary methods of the present disclosure may further adjust the power level to increase the smoothness or sharpness of the edges.

In the example shown in fig. 93, the example method 9300 begins at block 9301 and then proceeds to step/operation 9303. At step/operation 9303, processing circuitry (e.g., a controller of a printhead of a printing device, such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 of printhead 302 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20) may determine a plurality of points.

For example, a controller of a printhead of a printing apparatus may determine a first point, a second point, and a third point from an image buffer or from print data. Each of the first, second, and third dots is to be printed on a print medium by a printing device. In some embodiments, the second point is positioned between the first point and the third point. For example, a first point may be located to the left, a second point may be located in the middle, and a third point may be located to the right.

Referring back to fig. 93, after step/operation 9303, the exemplary method 9300 proceeds to step/operation 9305. At step/operation 9305, processing circuitry (e.g., a controller of a printhead of a printing device, such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 of printhead 302 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20) may determine a plurality of power levels associated with the plurality of points.

Continuing with the example above, the controller may determine a first power level associated with the first point, a second power level associated with the second point, and a third power level associated with the third point. As described above, each of the first power level, the second power level, and the third power level have been adjusted based on the darkness setting input and/or the contrast setting input (e.g., based on at least the exemplary method described in fig. 81).

Referring back to fig. 93, after step/operation 9305, exemplary method 9300 proceeds to step/operation 9307. At step/operation 9307, processing circuitry (e.g., a controller of a printhead of a printing device, such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 of printhead 302 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20) may receive a smoothness setting input or a sharpness setting input.

In this disclosure, the term "smoothness setting input" refers to an input provided by a user (e.g., through various user interfaces described herein, such as, but not limited to, UI 140 described above in connection with fig. 1) that indicates a user request to increase smoothness of an edge in a printout. In other words, the smoothness setting input indicates that the user requests to decrease the interval between black and white in the printout and provides a softer fade between the black and white areas.

In this disclosure, the term "sharpness setting input" refers to input provided by a user (e.g., various user interfaces such as, but not limited to, UI 140 described above in connection with fig. 1) that indicates a user request to increase the sharpness of an edge in a printout. In other words, the sharpness setting input indicates that the user requests to increase the interval between black and white in the printout and to decrease the gradation between the black and white areas.

Referring back to fig. 93, after step/operation 9307, the exemplary method 9300 proceeds to step/operation 9309. At step/operation 9309, processing circuitry (e.g., a controller of a printhead of a printing device, such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 of printhead 302 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20) can adjust at least one power level.

In some implementations, the controller may adjust the second power level based at least in part on the first power level and the third power level in response to receiving the smoothness setting input or the sharpness setting input. For example, the controller may calculate convolutions over three points (e.g., left, current/middle, and right) and apply the array multiplication.

For example, in response to receiving the smoothness setting input, the controller may adjust the power level based on the following exemplary algorithm:

in the above exampleIn dot _first Is the power level, dot associated with the first point _second Is the power level associated with the second point before the smoothness setting input is received, dot' _second Is the power level associated with the second point after receiving the smoothness setting input, and dot _third Is the power level associated with the third point. In some implementations, in response to receiving the smoothness setting input, the printing device may be based on the power level dot' _second To print the second dot. In some embodiments, the above kernel matrix may be different from the above exemplary algorithm. In some embodiments, the kernel matrix may be extended to 3×3 instead of 1×3.

As another example, in response to receiving the sharpness setting input, the controller may adjust the power level based on the following exemplary algorithm:

in the above example, dots _first Is the power level, dot associated with the first point _second Is the power level associated with the second point before receiving the sharpness setting input, dot' _second Is the power level associated with the second point after receiving the sharpness setting input, and dot _third Is the power level associated with the third point. In some implementations, in response to receiving the sharpness setting input, the printing device may be based on the power level dot' _second To print the second dot. In some embodiments, the above kernel matrix may be different from the above exemplary algorithm. In some embodiments, the kernel matrix may be extended to 3×3 instead of 1×3.

Referring back to fig. 93, after step/operation 9309, the exemplary method 9300 proceeds to step/operation 9311 and ends.

While the above description provides exemplary methods and algorithms for adjusting power levels based on darkness setting inputs, contrast setting inputs, smoothness setting inputs, and/or sharpness setting inputs, it is noted that the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the above description. In some examples, a controller of a printhead of a printing apparatus may adjust a duty cycle of the printhead in response to a darkness setting input, a contrast setting input, a smoothness setting input, and/or a sharpness setting input.

In contrast to printing devices utilizing thermal printing techniques, which adjust the printing duration of an entire line, exemplary printing devices utilizing laser printing techniques can operate in a pulsed mode and can adjust the duty cycle of the pulses per dot. In this way, an exemplary printing device utilizing laser printing techniques achieves proper print quality and gray scale control, while a printing device utilizing thermal printing techniques may only be able to make rough adjustments so that some portion of the label will have better print quality while other portions will be worse (due to dot history control, it cannot be optimized for all types of combinations).

In this disclosure, the term "duty cycle" refers to the amount of time that the laser source is on at the time of printing a dot as compared to the total amount of time that the dot is printed. Referring now to fig. 94-96, three exemplary duty cycles are shown.

Fig. 94 shows an exemplary 50% duty cycle, wherein the laser source is on 50% of the time when printing dots, and is off 50% of the time when printing dots. In some examples, the resulting average power equates the printed dots to 50% ash. Fig. 95 shows an exemplary 100% duty cycle, wherein the laser source is on 100% of the time when printing dots, and is off 0% of the time when printing dots. In some examples, the resulting average power will equate the printed dots to full black. Fig. 96 shows an exemplary 0% duty cycle, wherein the laser source is on 0% of the time when printing dots, and is off 100% of the time when printing dots. In some examples, the resulting average power will equate the printed dots to full white.

Referring now to fig. 97, an exemplary method 9700 is illustrated. In particular, exemplary method 9700 illustrates exemplary steps/operations for adjusting a duty cycle in response to a darkness setting input and/or a contrast setting input. In some embodiments, the contrast and darkness setting modifications are made by a controller of the printhead of the printing apparatus circuit (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 of printhead 302 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20), which may improve the printing operation efficiency because the main printer CPU does not handle any intensive darkness/contrast adjustment.

In the example shown in fig. 97, the example method 9700 begins at block 9701 and then proceeds to step/operation 9703. At step/operation 9703, processing circuitry (e.g., a controller of a printhead of a printing device, such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 of printhead 302 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20) may receive the print data.

As described above, the print data may be in the form of an image buffer. In some embodiments, a processor of a printing device (e.g., a main CPU of the printing device) may receive raw print data including data representing a bar code, text, image, etc., to be printed on a print medium. A processor of the printing device (e.g., a main CPU of the printing device) may generate an image buffer based at least in part on the raw print data and provide temporary storage for the raw print data. The processor of the printing device may provide an image buffer to a controller of the printhead (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 of printhead 302 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20) before the printhead begins printing the bar code, text, image, etc., represented by the raw print data.

In some implementations, the print data can indicate at least a first duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first duty cycle is associated with a first dot to be printed on the print medium by the printhead. In examples where no darkness or contrast adjustment is made, the duty cycle provided to the laser source in the printhead is equal to the first duty cycle.

Referring back to fig. 97, after step/operation 9703, the exemplary method 9700 proceeds to step/operation 9705. At step/operation 9705, processing circuitry (e.g., a controller of a printhead of a printing device, such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 of printhead 302 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20) may receive a darkness setting input.

In some implementations, the darkness setting input may be received by a controller of the printhead. As described above, the darkness setting input may indicate a desired darkness level in the printout. In some embodiments, the darkness setting input may be expressed as a percentage between-100% and +100%.

Referring back to fig. 97, after step/operation 9705, the exemplary method 9700 proceeds to step/operation 9707. At step/operation 9707, a processing circuit (e.g., a controller of a printhead of a printing device, such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 of printhead 302 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20) may adjust the duty cycle.

In some implementations, the controller of the printhead can adjust the first duty cycle to the second duty cycle based at least in part on the darkness setting input. For example, the controller may adjust the duty cycle based on the following exemplary algorithm:

in the above algorithm, x is a first duty cycle that is between 0% (inclusive) and 100% (inclusive). Dark is a Darkness setting input that is adjustable by a user, between-100% (inclusive) and 100% (inclusive). Ratio% is a darkness step Ratio that is predetermined and fixed by the printing device based on the step between two darkness levels. In other words, adjusting the first duty cycle to the second duty cycle is further based on the darkness step ratio. In some embodiments, the darkness step ratio is 25%. In some embodiments, the darkness step ratio is less than 25%. In some embodiments, the darkness step ratio is greater than 25%.

In the above algorithm, in the case where the calculated value is lower than 0% or higher than 100%, the second duty ratio P (y) is clipped/normalized between 0% or 100% using the min calculation and the max calculation. The following is an exemplary calculation of the second duty cycle P (y) in a hypothetical use case, in which case the first duty cycle x is equal to 60%, the Darkness step Ratio is equal to 25%, the Darkness setting input dark is equal to +15%:

As shown in the above exemplary calculations, in response to receiving a darkness increase (e.g., a darkness setting input) associated with a darkness setting input, a controller of the printhead increases the first duty cycle to the second duty cycle. In other words, the second duty cycle is higher than the first duty cycle, thereby making the overall print output darker. In response to receiving a darkness reduction (e.g., a darkness setting input) associated with the darkness setting input, the controller of the printhead reduces the first duty cycle to a second duty cycle. In other words, the second duty cycle is lower than the first duty cycle, thereby making the overall print output shallower.

Referring back to fig. 97, after step/operation 9707, the exemplary method 9700 proceeds to step/operation 9709. At step/operation 9709, a processing circuit (e.g., a controller of a printhead of a printing device, such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 of printhead 302 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20) may receive the contrast setting input.

In some implementations, the contrast setting input may be received by a controller of the printhead. As described above, the contrast setting input may indicate a desired contrast level in the printout. In some embodiments, the contrast setting input may be expressed as a percentage between-100% and +100%.

Referring back to fig. 97, after step/operation 9709, the exemplary method 9700 proceeds to step/operation 9711. At step/operation 9711, a processing circuit (e.g., a controller of a printhead of a printing device, such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 of printhead 302 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20) may adjust the duty cycle.

In some implementations, the controller of the printhead can adjust the second duty cycle to a third duty cycle based at least in part on the contrast setting input. For example, the controller may adjust the duty cycle based on the following exemplary algorithm:

in the above algorithm, x is a second duty cycle that is between 0% (inclusive) and 100% (inclusive). Contrast is a Contrast setting input that can be adjusted by a user, between-100% (inclusive) and 100% (inclusive). Ratio% is a contrast step Ratio that is predetermined and fixed by the printing device based on the steepness of the slope between the two contrast levels. In other words, adjusting the second duty cycle to the third duty cycle is further based on the contrast step ratio. In some embodiments, the contrast step ratio is 25%. In some embodiments, the contrast step ratio is less than 25%. In some embodiments, the contrast step ratio is greater than 25%. A is a predetermined fixed amplitude value of the curvature. In some embodiments, A is set to 1 and in some embodiments, A is set to other values

In the above algorithm, in the case where the calculated value is lower than 0% or higher than 100%, the third duty ratio P (y) is clipped/normalized between 0% or 100% using the min calculation and the max calculation. f is a frequency value based on whether the duty cycle is normalized. Therefore, in the above algorithm, the duty ratio is normalized, and thus f is set to 100. In an example where the duty cycle is not normalized, f is set to the maximum duty cycle value.

The following is an exemplary calculation of the third duty cycle P (y) in a hypothetical use case, in which case the second duty cycle x is equal to 60%, the Contrast step Ratio% is equal to 25%, the Contrast setting input Contrast is equal to +55%, the amplitude a is equal to 1, and the frequency f is equal to 100%:

similar to those described above, in response to receiving the contrast increase associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second duty cycle meets a duty cycle threshold (e.g., greater than 50%), the controller of the printhead increases the second duty cycle to a third duty cycle (e.g., the third duty cycle is higher than the second duty cycle). In other words, as contrast increases, the duty cycle of a darker spot (e.g., greater than 50%) increases, making the spot even darker. In response to receiving the contrast increase associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second duty cycle does not satisfy the duty cycle threshold (e.g., less than 50%), the controller of the printhead decreases the second duty cycle to a third duty cycle (e.g., the third duty cycle is lower than the second duty cycle). In other words, as contrast increases, the duty cycle of a shallower dot (e.g., less than 50%) decreases, making the dot even shallower.

Similar to those described above, in response to receiving the contrast reduction associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second duty cycle meets a duty cycle threshold (e.g., greater than 50%), the controller of the printhead reduces the second duty cycle to a third duty cycle (e.g., the third duty cycle is lower than the second duty cycle). In other words, when the contrast is reduced, the duty cycle of a darker spot (e.g., greater than 50%) is reduced, thereby making the spot shallower. In response to receiving the contrast reduction associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second duty cycle does not satisfy the duty cycle threshold (e.g., less than 50%), the controller of the printhead increases the second duty cycle to a third duty cycle (e.g., the third duty cycle is higher than the second duty cycle). In other words, when the contrast ratio is reduced, the duty cycle of a shallower dot (for example, less than 50%) increases, thereby making the dot darker.

Referring back to fig. 97, after step/operation 9711, the exemplary method 9700 proceeds to step/operation 9713. At step/operation 9713, processing circuitry (e.g., a controller of a printhead of a printing device, such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 of printhead 302 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20) may provide a duty cycle.

In some embodiments, the controller of the printhead may provide a third duty cycle to the laser power control system of the printhead. As described above, the third duty cycle has been adjusted based on the darkness setting input and the contrast setting input. The laser power control system of the printhead is configured to cause the laser subsystem of the printhead to print the first dot at a third duty cycle. In this way, the printing device prints the first dot at a desired darkness level and a desired contrast level provided by the user via the darkness setting input and the contrast setting input, respectively.

Referring back to fig. 97, after step/operation 9713, the exemplary method 9700 proceeds to step/operation 9715 and ends.

While the above description provides exemplary algorithms for adjusting darkness and/or contrast, it is noted that the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the above description. For example, exemplary embodiments may implement one or more look-up tables in addition to or as an alternative to the exemplary algorithms.

As described above, when implementing the exemplary algorithm, the power level associated with each point will be input to the darkness algorithm and then to the contrast algorithm to calculate the resulting output power, with little or no prior calculation. The last calculated power level is sent to the laser power control subsystem for printing the current spot.

In implementations implementing one or more look-up tables, the entire look-up table for darkness adjustment and/or for contrast adjustment will be pre-computed for each of the possible power levels and/or duty cycles. In other embodiments, the processor may calculate the entire input range from 0 to 100% for each look-up table. When an input (e.g., a first power level or a first duty cycle) is provided to the controller of the printhead, the controller may directly take the resulting output without any calculation.

In some implementations, the processor may calculate a look-up table of darkness adjustment for the power level based on the examples described above, including but not limited to those described in connection with at least fig. 81. In some implementations, the processor may calculate a lookup table for contrast adjustment of the power level based on the examples described above, including but not limited to those described in connection with at least fig. 81. In some implementations, the processor may calculate a look-up table for darkness adjustment and contrast adjustment for the power level based on the examples described above, including but not limited to those described in connection with at least fig. 81.

In some implementations, the processor may calculate a look-up table for darkness adjustment for the duty cycle based on the examples described above, including but not limited to those described in connection with at least fig. 97. In some implementations, the processor may calculate a look-up table for contrast adjustment of the duty cycle based on the examples described above, including but not limited to those described in connection with at least fig. 97. In some implementations, the processor may calculate a look-up table for darkness adjustment and contrast adjustment for the duty cycle based on the examples described above, including but not limited to those described in connection with at least fig. 97.

For example, an exemplary simplified look-up table for indicating a +50% darkness setting input is provided below. The look-up table may be applicable to both power level and duty cycle. For example, if the first power level or duty cycle is 30%, the second power level or duty cycle is 42.5%. As another example, if the first power level or duty cycle is 60%, the second power level or duty cycle is 72.5%. In both examples, the total power will increase to make the dots darker.

Exemplary darkness setting lookup tables

As such, according to various embodiments of the present disclosure, the controller of the printhead may adjust the first power level to the second power level based on the darkness setting look-up table. Additionally or alternatively, the controller of the printhead may further adjust the second power level to a third power level based on a contrast setting look-up table.

In some embodiments, a combination of both the exemplary algorithm and the look-up table may be used. For example, the controller of the printhead may adjust the first power level to the second power level based on a darkness setting look-up table, and may adjust the second power level to the third power level based on the exemplary algorithm described above in connection with at least fig. 81. As another example, the controller of the printhead may adjust the first power level to the second power level based on the exemplary algorithm described above in connection with at least fig. 81, and may adjust the second power level to the third power level based on a contrast setting look-up table. As another example, the controller of the printhead may adjust the first duty cycle to the second duty cycle based on a darkness setting look-up table, and may adjust the second duty cycle to the third duty cycle based on the exemplary algorithm described above in connection with at least fig. 97. As another example, the controller of the printhead may adjust the first duty cycle to the second duty cycle based on the exemplary algorithm described above in connection with at least fig. 97, and may adjust the second duty cycle to the third duty cycle based on the contrast setting look-up table.

Accordingly, various embodiments of the present disclosure provide improvements in darkness and contrast setting adjustment in printing devices utilizing laser printing techniques. For example, the computations and operations associated with darkness and contrast setting adjustments are handled by the laser printhead itself for faster processing and to keep the main printer CPU free of computations. Various examples of darkness and contrast algorithms are provided to adjust either or both of the output power level and/or duty cycle for each dot to be printed to improve print quality on a print medium by accurately controlling the gray level of each individual dot. Various exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure are applicable not only to laser printers in a continuous laser mode, but also to laser printers in a pulsed laser mode. Various exemplary methods of the present disclosure may be accomplished by mathematical algorithms, via one or more look-up tables, or a combination of both.

LPH intelligent printing head

In many examples, the thermal print head may be a passive component without built-in intelligence. The exemplary thermal print head may be configured to react only to control/data signals sent by the exemplary printer. In addition, many thermal printheads may be incompatible with ILIS media.

According to various embodiments of the present disclosure, systems, methods, and apparatus are provided that have intelligence to provide a variety of advantageous features. In some examples, print raster, vector, support reprinting, error handling, printer synchronization, and active printer communication capabilities are provided.

In some embodiments, the printhead may include a plurality of components/elements. For example, the printhead may include a microcontroller unit, FPGA, double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDR SDRAM) memory, bi-directional communication bus, etc.

In some examples, a printhead may be provided for supporting raster/vector printing, full synchronization with the printer, and media feeding with laser scanning functionality. The example printhead may provide bi-directional communication with the example printer via a Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) bus and control signals. In some examples, using an SPI bus, a printer may provide firmware updates for an exemplary microcontroller unit and/or FPGA. In one example, the firmware update may be implemented at the start-up of the printhead. A checksum feature may be implemented to ensure that the firmware is not corrupted and to provide a means to revert to the previous firmware in the event of an upgrade failure. In some examples, the two-way communication may facilitate printhead setup, printhead alerting (e.g., alerting the printer of error/interrupt functions), firmware upgrades, motor and laser synchronization, and the like. In contrast to many existing solutions, an exemplary printhead may be configured to store additional data (e.g., multiple lines of data). Thus, the exemplary printhead may utilize RAM memory to provide automatic reprinting capability (e.g., entire label) without the need to obtain/retrieve data from the exemplary printer. Additionally, the example printhead may provide real-time error monitoring and error reporting conditions (e.g., temperature changes, power rail out-of-range, critical laser errors, verifying whether an authentic ILIS medium is inserted, performing self-diagnostics, etc.) to the example printer. An exemplary printhead may implement firmware upgrades in the field for continued printhead improvement. In some examples, the printhead may incorporate a safety interlock feature to turn off the laser when an unsafe condition is detected. In addition, the printheads may be configured to detect when non-ILIT media is inserted into the printer, support color and grayscale printers, and the like.

In some examples, the microcontroller unit may be configured as a master controller to program various PLLs (which are used for polygon motor speed control and laser spot clocks), set/configure printheads for any print label, and/or provide active monitoring of error conditions.

In some examples, the FPGA may be configured to receive print data and convert each dot to a power value in order to facilitate black/white printing or grayscale printing. Additionally, the exemplary FPGA can coordinate the synchronization between the polygon motor, laser scan clock, and printer motor steps to ensure that all portions are optimally synchronized without any delay, which may result in skewed printout in some examples. In addition, the FPGA may bridge communications between the printer CPU and the printhead microcontroller unit, provide additional safety interlock processing, and the like. The exemplary system may support both raster printing and vector printing, as well as the ability to reprint a complete label without retrieving data from the printer side. As described above, in some examples, the printhead may be equipped with DDR SDRAM memory.

As discussed herein, vector printing may follow a calculated path instead of printing line by line. Thus, the ability to store print image data in the internal memory further supports the vector print function. In addition, in the event that an error occurs on the current label and reprinting is requested (in vector mode or raster mode), the printhead may be directly fetched from memory to reprint the most recently printed label and/or multiple most recently printed labels.

Identifying and calculating media start offset positions for laser-enabled bar code printers using ML

In some examples, the starting position of the media for the laser-enabled printing device may be incorrectly positioned such that the printed label may be out of standard and/or unusable.

In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, systems, methods, and techniques are provided for automatically determining a media start offset position of a printing device.

First, a manually adjusted starting position offset may be provided. For example, values associated with the positions of the exemplary media, motor, and/or hexagonal mirror may be provided. Then, in addition to the manually adjusted home position shift, data associated with vibrations and movements of the printing apparatus due to external environments (e.g., factory vibrations, belt movements, sound vibrations, etc.) and internal environments (e.g., motors, media characteristics (including weight), etc.) may be captured. By way of example, if the motor is attempting to pull a heavier media, the vibration of the exemplary printing device may increase, which may result in displacement of the laser offset. Based on the captured data/measured parameters, training data may be generated. In various examples, the training data may be used to train a machine learning algorithm. The machine learning algorithm may be configured to automatically adjust the starting position offset, which in turn may internally adjust the exemplary hexagonal mirror and media positions. In some examples, the machine learning algorithm may identify patterns. For example, a machine learning algorithm may be trained to identify a ratio of incident vibrations relative to a starting position offset and generate a predicted output corresponding to a target starting position offset from which printing may begin. The machine learning algorithm may be or include a hierarchical clustering algorithm configured to identify similarities and patterns associated with captured data/measured parameters (e.g., detected vibrations) and automatically adjust the starting position offset accordingly.

Exciting drum for enabling use of low power laser in laser-based bar code printing

As described herein, in some examples, a high power laser beam may be utilized to pre-energize/heat an exemplary medium before a lower power laser beam (e.g., a write laser beam) irradiates marks on the exemplary medium.

According to various embodiments of the present disclosure, an energized drum roller may be provided. The energized drum roller may be configured to heat the media to a threshold level such that less power is required to pre-energize/heat the media. Thus, a lower power laser beam may be used as the pre-excitation beam, thereby reducing the overall power consumption of the printing apparatus.

Automatic laser power adjustment based on media type for laser bar code printer to avoid hazards

In some examples, the power output of an exemplary laser source may need to be constant. If non-standard media is used with the exemplary printing device, damage (e.g., fire) may result.

According to various embodiments of the present disclosure, a light beam based sensor is provided. An exemplary beam-based sensor may be used to determine a media type and may be operable to control a power output of a laser source focused on an exemplary medium based at least in part on the detected media type. In this way, potential damage to the medium and its surroundings can be avoided.

Focusing test method for laser printing head

In order to obtain a target DPI and provide good print quality, the laser focus may need to be precisely set and set within a target range when mounted on a printing device.

According to various embodiments of the present disclosure, an automated process for determining a laser focus of a printhead is provided. In some examples, the automated process may measure and verify that the focus setting is within the target range. In some examples, the printed pattern may be used to determine a corresponding reflectance value for a particular laser focus. In some examples, an exemplary print pattern may facilitate measuring DPI and dimensional deviations from a target value or range. In various examples, the laser focus may be determined using a validator scanner, a reflectance sensor, one or more RGB sensors, one or more monochromatic light sources, or an ambient light source.

In some examples, the beam generated by an exemplary laser source may be focused at a focal point in order to print a small dot. The power of the laser printhead may be defined at that location for a particular laser reaction medium. The dot size may gradually increase as printing occurs out of focus. This may also reduce the point reflectivity values as the power is spread over a larger area. The term reflectivity may refer to the amount of light reflected and may be expressed/measured as a percentage.

In some examples, a first printed pattern comprising a plurality of dots arranged in a matrix format may be used to measure laser focus. The dot size may be defined by the minimum resolution of the laser printhead and the distance between the dots (e.g., between two center points of two corresponding dots), and may be determined based on reflectance values of a set of printed dots. In various examples, the dots may be apparent when printed at the focus and may appear larger when printed out of focus. Thus, as printing occurs farther from a particular focal point, the dot size may increase. The reflectance values of the plurality of printed dots may vary as the dot size varies. For example, the reflectance value printed at the focus will reach a maximum due to the wide white space between the dots. As the dot size becomes larger, the area of the white gap may shrink, thereby decreasing the reflectivity. The correlation graph may be determined based on reflectance values printed at different locations relative to the focal point. This in turn may be used to determine the location of the focal point or to determine whether the focal point is within a target range.

In some examples, an exemplary printing device may utilize an RGB sensor with ambient light in order to detect a laser reaction medium. An exemplary RGB sensor may detect the reflected light and generate one or more signals corresponding to the reflected light. The one or more signals may be mapped to different reflectivity values. As another example, a CMOS sensor with a red light source may be utilized to capture the gray level of a printed image. As another example, a second print pattern may be used to ensure accurate adjustment of focus (e.g., by using a series of alternating bars and spaces of equal width). In some examples, the second print pattern may be printed vertically, horizontally, or in both directions. Additionally and/or alternatively, a checkerboard pattern including equally sized black and white squares may be used. If the focus is outside the target range, the print area will be wider than the spacing area. Acquisition of the reflectivity of the print pattern may be performed by sensing devices/elements (e.g., validator scanners, reflective sensors, or RGB sensors) placed in front of the printer and behind the print line. The sensing device/element may generate a corresponding reflectivity waveform. Algorithms may be used to analyze the signals provided by the sensing devices/elements to determine the size of each element. Based on the delta difference between the space width and the bar width, the system can determine whether the focus is properly set. In some examples, the delta difference may be determined according to the following equation:

Delta = average (bar) -average (interval)

When delta is below a certain threshold (e.g., 0.2 dot size), the focus may be set. A mechanical clamp may be used to adjust the focus to modify the position of the printhead based on the determined delta difference. Using the techniques described herein, the laser focus can be measured and set to provide optimal print resolution and print quality.

Alignment of a printhead scanning beam with a moving medium

In many examples, the complexity of the optical components in the high power laser printheads can lead to variability in the positioning and orientation of the scanning laser beam. It may be desirable to compensate for this variability to effectively maintain performance, simplify manufacturability, and ensure repeatability/consistency of print quality.

Using the systems, methods, and techniques disclosed herein, easier manufacturability, performance repeatability, higher throughput on a production line, and higher consistency in product performance from unit to unit can be achieved.

In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, techniques are provided for controlling focus, line position, and line skew in printheads such that fine tuning operations may be eliminated and/or significantly reduced. As described herein, an exemplary optical assembly may include a focusing component that includes one or more mirrors (e.g., a stationary folding mirror, a rotating polygonal mirror, and a scanning lens disposed downstream relative to the collimating optics). In some examples, at least one of the exemplary mirrors may be adjustable in multiple degrees of freedom to achieve a desired alignment. In some examples, a folding mirror with a reflection angle closest to the normal may be utilized. For example, a mirror having an incident angle of about 10 degrees may be used.

In various embodiments, an exemplary mirror may comprise an elongated narrow rectangle configured to relay a single scan line from a preceding mirror to a subsequent mirror. In some examples, mounts may be placed behind an exemplary mirror to secure the mirror (e.g., using glue or other adhesive). In some examples, the mount may be a rectangular metal member. An example mount may include receptacle contacts in a plurality of corners (e.g., three of the four corners of an example rectangular mount). In addition, a plurality of screws having a ball head may be inserted into the socket joint and threaded into the printhead housing. To adjust the exemplary mirror, the positions of the plurality of screws (e.g., three screws) may be adjusted to change the position of the exemplary mirror by shortening or lengthening the path length to the exemplary print medium. In some examples, one of the plurality of screws may be vertically aligned and one of the plurality of screws may be horizontally aligned to act as a pivot point. The vertically aligned screw may be adjusted to shift the aiming of the scan line up and down to aim the latter mirror and the exit aperture. In some examples, the horizontally aligned screws may be adjusted to slightly tilt the rows. At the same time, the line may be moved left or right, but the laser switch timing may be shifted to compensate so that the print line remains horizontally oriented. In various examples, the adjustment may be monitored in real-time by a line width analyzer to verify that the target is hit. Thus, the unit may be integrated into the printing apparatus without further adjustment.

Medium jam detection

In many examples, it may be necessary to stop the laser power supply when a media jam occurs in order to avoid laser light shining directly on the print platen. In some examples, when misaligned, the media may incorrectly feed (i.e., wind up) the example platen roller.

In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, systems, methods, and techniques are provided for preventing direct exposure of a print platen to a laser beam (e.g., in the event of media jams).

In some examples, a media jam sensor may be provided to detect media jam events during a printing operation. An exemplary media blocking sensor may be or include a transmissive optical sensor and an encoder disk. An exemplary encoder disk may be coupled to an exemplary platen roller within which the encoder disk will rotate under the influence of the platen roller during movement of the media. The transmission sensor may detect and record movement of the exemplary medium and provide feedback to the exemplary processor. If a media jam event is detected (e.g., if media is incorrectly fed into the platen roller), a slowing or abrupt stop of the encoder count may be detected. In some examples, encoder Δ may be calculated according to the following equation:

Encoder delta = encoder count _i+n Encoder count _i

In various examples, if the encoder delta value falls below a media blocking threshold, a media blocking event may be identified. In one example, if the encoder delta value drops below half the average encoder delta value, a media blocking event may be identified. In some examples, the media blocking threshold may be defined according to the following equation:

low inductance, high frequency, high power laser drive circuit

As described herein, an exemplary printing device can activate a reaction medium at a target print speed rate using a high power laser source. In various examples, a high frequency laser operating at a frequency of 1MHz or higher may be used to print high resolution images/text at high speed. This presents challenges in achieving high laser on/off speeds because high power laser sources can be physically large and are typically used for lower speed applications that do not require high frequencies, such as welding.

In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, systems and techniques are provided for facilitating high speed operation. In some examples, the circuitry, component selection, placement, and PCB routing may be optimized to minimize inductance in the high current laser drive loop. The following equation describes the ohm's law with respect to the inductor:

In the above formula, V is the instantaneous voltage across the inductor; l is a measure of inductance (henry); and is also provided withIs the instantaneous rate of current change (amperes/second).

Thus, in one example, a variation in the current (di) of the nominal 14A and a fixed voltage of about 2V may turn on the exemplary laser source at full power. To allow for low rise/fall times (dt) and high frequencies, the inductance (L) must be low (e.g., on the order of nanohenries). Such a high switching current path or "loop" starts from the laser power supply and continues through the PCB to the laser source/diode. In some examples, the loop may continue through the GaN transistor, the sense resistor, and eventually to the ground reference plane back to power ground. An exemplary GaN transistor may be used based at least in part on its small package inductance characteristics. In various examples, component placement may be optimized for low inductance. In addition, the PCB routing may utilize a wide, short, thick copper plane for connection. A plurality of vias organized in an array may be used for interlayer connectivity, if desired.

Internal timeout timer for laser-enabled control

As described herein, in many examples, fault detection may be required to prevent laser operation when an abnormal condition is detected.

According to various embodiments of the present disclosure, a printing device (e.g., a printer side including a processor and/or FPGA) may be configured to detect an abnormal condition, and a printhead (e.g., a printhead processor and/or printhead FPGA) may be configured to detect an abnormal condition simultaneously. In the event of a failure of any of the components of the exemplary printing device, laser operation may automatically pause until the problem is corrected.

In some examples, suspension detection may be provided by utilizing heartbeat signals exchanged between the various elements (e.g., by a printer-side processor and/or FPGA and a printhead processor and/or FPGA). When the heartbeat signal is not present (e.g., not detected by any of the processor and/or FPGA), laser control may be automatically disabled to ensure that it is always in a safe state. In addition, the user may be alerted. For example, a message may be displayed on a printer user interface. In other examples, signaling devices such as audio signals or LEDs may be used to alert the user.

Automated detection of defects in laser printing optics

In various examples, as described above, the laser beam may traverse an optical assembly (e.g., a set of optics, lenses, and/or mirrors) before reaching the print medium. If the optical component (e.g., optics, lenses, or mirrors) has any defects, scratches, or aberrations due to manufacturing issues or due to rough handling in the field (e.g., due to dropping or vibration), the printed output generated by the exemplary printing device may have visible defects, which may be noticeable to the end user in some cases.

According to various embodiments of the present disclosure, a line scanner may be incorporated into the output path of an exemplary printing device. In some examples, a line scanner may scan an image of a printed label. When coupled with an image processing algorithm, the printer firmware may analyze the image of the printed label to detect aberrations or defects in the optical component. Such a condition may be indicated to the end user via a user interface message or prompt. Accordingly, maintenance and/or replacement of the optical components may be arranged as desired, thereby minimizing potential downtime and loss of productivity.

Y-axis adjustment (calibration) mechanism for a laser printer printhead

In various examples, directing a laser beam from an aperture of a printhead to a target location may present a number of technical challenges.

In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, systems, methods, and techniques are provided for directing a laser beam to impinge on a target location. In some examples, the upper and lower printhead mechanisms/housings may have offset positions in the y-axis orientation. Thus, a mechanism for y-axis adjustment is provided for calibration purposes. In some embodiments, the adjustment feature may be disposed between the upper and lower printing mechanisms/housings. Exemplary adjustment features may include a slot opening panel that is adjustable by a set of lead screw/nut assemblies. An exemplary slot opening panel can be adjusted to +/-2.5mm along the y-axis in order to accurately align the laser beam exiting the aperture of the printhead.

Horizontal rotary tearing strip

In some examples, the printing device may employ an automatic feed technique to feed media through the printing device. Over time, excessive dust may accumulate in the interior region of the tear strip and may cause media blockage. In many examples, an end user may not have access to the narrow path between the printhead and the tear bar in order to manually guide the media through the path.

In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, methods, systems, and techniques are provided for minimizing media blockage occurring in a media path. In some examples, a removable (e.g., rotating) tear strip may be provided. The user may remove the media (e.g., label) from the printing mechanism and return the removable tear strip to its original position once the media is in place. In this way, the end user may accurately and quickly manually guide the exemplary media. The angle of the holes along the bottom portion of the exemplary media path may be further enlarged and may facilitate cleaning of the tear strip.

North Pole preheater temperature and power compensation algorithm

In various examples, as described above, to achieve a high target printing speed for the printing device, the media may be preheated (i.e., heated) to a target temperature using a preheat laser. In some examples, the faster the media traverses a portion of the printing device during a printing operation, the higher the temperature that the exemplary preheat laser will require due to the heat transfer capability. Thus, for each print speed, the associated target preheat temperature must be reached and maintained in order to meet print quality standards and avoid overfire or underburn of the media. In some examples, additional time may be required to heat or cool the medium to the target temperature. Thus, additional devices may be required to accelerate the process and ensure that the end user does not have to wait long for the printing device to begin a printing operation. In various examples, maintaining a target temperature relative to a medium, a preheat laser, or other components of a printing device may present a number of technical challenges.

In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, systems, methods, and techniques are provided for bringing a preheat laser to a target temperature and subsequently bringing the media and/or surrounding printing mechanisms to the target temperature based on input variables such as media print speed and existing media temperature. In some embodiments, the exemplary media temperature and the exemplary preheat laser temperature may be maintained at constant values throughout the printing operation. In some embodiments, power compensation techniques may be utilized to accelerate the printing process when the current media/preheat laser temperature has not reached a target value. In some embodiments, a method is provided for preventing burn marks by retracting at least a portion of unprinted media to a safe position when the printing device is not in use.

Referring now to fig. 98, an exemplary method 9800 is illustrated. In particular, exemplary method 9800 illustrates exemplary steps/operations for bringing the media/preheat laser temperature to a target temperature value/range in order to optimize print quality at a particular print speed.

In the example shown in fig. 98, an exemplary method 9800 begins at step/operation 9801. At step/operation 9801, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, controller 2008 shown and described above in connection with fig. 20, processor 2702 shown and described above in connection with fig. 27, control unit 138 shown and described above in connection with fig. 29, and/or a processor electrically coupled to the exemplary printing device) may receive print data. In various examples, the print data may include instructions for printing content onto at least a portion of the media (e.g., printing a label) of the exemplary printing device 100.

After receiving the print job data at step/operation 9801, the processing circuitry determines a target print speed at step/operation 9803 at which the exemplary printing apparatus 100 is to be used to print content onto a medium (e.g., print a label). In some examples, the target print speed may be determined based at least in part on the print data or received in conjunction with the print data.

After determining the print speed at step/operation 9803, the processing circuit determines a target media temperature and/or a target preheat laser temperature associated with the target print speed at step/operation 9805. It should be appreciated that the target media temperature and the target preheat laser temperature are related parameters that may vary according to known offsets, and that they are further associated with a target print speed. In other words, if the preheat laser temperature is known, other temperatures associated with other system elements/components may be determined by adding known offset values. Thus, in various examples, the processing circuitry may monitor the medium temperature, the preheat laser temperature, and/or another temperature associated with the example printing device 100 (e.g., a printing mechanism temperature). Thus, the terms preheat laser temperature, media temperature, and print mechanism temperature are used interchangeably herein.

In some examples, the processing circuitry is based at least in part on determining the target media temperature and/or the target preheat laser temperature by reference to a stored look-up table that describes a mapping between print speed/media traverse speed, target media temperature, and/or target preheat laser temperature. In various embodiments, the target medium temperature and/or the target pre-heat laser temperature may each comprise a value or range (e.g., 40 degrees celsius, between 40 and 45 degrees celsius, combinations thereof, etc.). The following table illustrates an exemplary lookup table for determining a target medium temperature by a processing circuit.

Printing speed	Target medium temperature	Target preheat laser temperature
			1ips	Media_temp_1	Pre-heat_temp_1
2ips	Media_temp_2	Pre-heat_temp_2
			3ips	Media_temp_3	Pre-heat_temp_3
…	…	…

Table 6: illustrating the operating speed, target media temperature, and target preheat laser temperature that printing apparatus 100 will use Look-up table of mappings between degrees。

After step/operation 9805, the processing circuit determines the current media temperature at step/operation 9807. In some examples, the processing circuit determines the medium temperature via one or more sensing elements/sensors (e.g., a sensor array) operatively coupled to the medium and/or positioned adjacent to the medium. In some examples, the one or more sensors may be or include an infrared sensor, a resistance-based sensor, or the like configured to determine a surface temperature of at least a portion of the medium. Additionally and/or alternatively, in some examples, the processing circuitry determines a temperature of a heating element (e.g., one or more lasers) of the printing device via one or more sensors, such as a Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD), positioned adjacent to and operatively coupled to a surface of the example heating element. In some examples, at step/operation 9809, if the media temperature is already within some predetermined range of target temperature values, the processing circuitry determines that the system/exemplary printing device 100 is ready to begin a printing operation. In such examples, the method 9800 proceeds to step/operation 9821 and the printing device 100 immediately prints the content onto the media. By way of example, the target temperature range may be within a predetermined threshold range (e.g., +/-3 degrees celsius) from the target temperature value. By way of example, if the target temperature value is 40 degrees celsius, the predetermined threshold range is +/-3 degrees celsius, and the current media temperature is 39 degrees celsius, the processing circuit determines that the current media temperature is within the predetermined threshold range and proceeds to step/operation 9821.

However, if at step/operation 9809 the media temperature is not within the predetermined threshold range of the target temperature value, the processing circuit may proceed to step/operation 9811. By way of example, if the target temperature value is 40 degrees celsius, the predetermined threshold range is +/-3 degrees celsius, and the current media temperature is 35 degrees celsius, the processing circuit determines that the current media temperature is not within the predetermined threshold and proceeds to step/operation 9811.

At step/operation 9811, the processing circuitry determines whether laser compensation can be achieved by varying the power of the write laser. In some examples, the processing circuit determines whether laser compensation may be achieved based at least in part on whether the current media temperature is within a predetermined range of the target temperature value or target temperature range (e.g., near the target temperature value/range, such as-5 degrees celsius). For another example, referring to fig. 99 discussed below, the processing circuitry may determine that laser compensation may be achieved if the current media temperature is a higher threshold temperature value 9902 or a lower threshold temperature value 9904 of +/-10%.

For example, the processing circuit may determine whether an overdrive write laser is required if the medium temperature is too cold (e.g., below a threshold temperature value/range), or whether an underdrive write laser is required if the medium temperature is too warm/hot. In the event that the processing circuitry determines that laser compensation can be achieved by varying the power of the write laser, the method 9800 proceeds to step/operation 9813. At step/operation 9813, after determining that laser compensation can be achieved, the processing circuitry determines (via the one or more sensing elements/sensors operatively coupled to the media) whether the media is too cold (e.g., below a threshold temperature value/range). In the event that the processing circuitry determines that the media is supercooled (e.g., below a threshold temperature value/range), the method 9800 proceeds to step/operation 9823. At step/operation 9823, the processing circuitry provides (e.g., generates, transmits) control instructions to increase/overdrive the power of the write laser. Then, after increasing the power of the preheat laser, the method proceeds to step/operation 9821, and the processing circuitry provides control instructions to cause the printing device 100 to print content onto the media.

In some examples, at step/operation 9827, the processing circuitry determines whether to continue the printing operation (e.g., print a new label). In the event that the processing circuitry determines that no further printing operations are required and that a portion of the media (e.g., a previous label) has just been printed, the heater element may still be warm because it may not have reached a safe cooling temperature. In such examples, an exemplary medium (e.g., a drum) may be parked/positioned at the tear strip and adjacent to the exemplary heating element (e.g., directly above/below). This may result in unwanted burn marks being incident on at least a portion of the unprinted media. To prevent this, when no media is being printed, at step/operation 9829, the exemplary processing circuitry may provide control instructions to retract at least a portion of the unprinted media into the feed roller, thereby ensuring that the media is not directly exposed to the higher temperature and thus preventing any burn marks from being generated thereon.

Returning to step/operation 9813, in the event that the media temperature is not too cold (e.g., above a threshold temperature value/range), the processing circuitry provides a control indication to reduce/underdrive the power of the write laser. After the write laser is powered down at step/operation 9825, the method proceeds to step/operation 9821 and the processing circuitry provides control instructions to cause the printing apparatus 100 to print content onto a medium.

Returning to step/operation 9811, in the event that the processing circuitry determines that laser compensation (e.g., associated with one or more writing lasers) cannot be utilized, the method 9800 proceeds to step/operation 9815. At step/operation 9815, the processing circuit determines whether the media temperature is below a target temperature range. In the event that the medium temperature is below the target temperature range, the method 9800 proceeds to step/operation 9817 and the processing circuitry provides (e.g., generates, sends) control instructions to raise the operating temperature of the preheat laser. In some embodiments, after increasing the operating temperature of the preheat laser at step/operation 9817, the method proceeds to step/operation 9809, and the processing circuit further determines whether the medium temperature is within the target temperature range. Subsequently, the processing circuit provides control instructions to cause the printing apparatus 100 to print the content onto the medium.

Returning to step/operation 9815, in the event that the processing circuitry determines that the media temperature is above the target temperature range, the processing circuitry provides (e.g., generates, sends) a control indication to cause the printing apparatus 100 to wait a predetermined amount of time to allow the media to cool. After waiting a predetermined amount of time, the method proceeds to step/operation 9809 and the processing circuit further determines whether the media temperature is within the target temperature range. Subsequently, the processing circuit provides control instructions to cause the printing apparatus 100 to print the content onto the medium.

Referring now to fig. 99, an exemplary graph 9900 depicting an exemplary target temperature range in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. As described above, in various embodiments, the exemplary target temperature range may be associated with a medium, a preheat of the exemplary printing device 100, and/or any other printing mechanism.

As depicted in fig. 99, the x-axis represents a plurality of time instances. As shown, the y-axis represents a plurality of temperature values. In various embodiments, the processing circuitry is operable to regulate the media temperature in order to ensure optimal printing operation of the exemplary printing device 100. For example, to print new content (e.g., labels), the processing circuitry may begin by increasing the preheat laser temperature, which translates to increasing the media temperature. As depicted in fig. 99, the target temperature may include a target temperature value 9901 at which an optimal printing operation may be achieved at a particular printing speed. As further depicted in fig. 99, the target temperature may further include a range defined by a lower threshold temperature value 9904 and a higher threshold temperature value 9902.

After reaching the target medium temperature (e.g., the target temperature value 9901 or a target temperature range defined by a lower threshold temperature value 9904 and a higher threshold temperature value 9902), the processing circuitry is operable to maintain a constant target medium temperature. For example, in the event that the media temperature reaches or exceeds the higher threshold temperature value 9902, the processing circuitry may provide a control indication to deactivate the preheat laser for a short/predetermined amount of time until the target media temperature drops below the higher threshold temperature value 9902. As another example, in the event that the media temperature reaches or falls below the lower threshold temperature value 9904, the processing circuitry may provide a control indication to activate the preheat laser for a short/predetermined amount of time until the target media temperature is above the lower threshold temperature value 9904. The oscillation cycle may continue until new print data is no longer received or until the print speed or target temperature associated with the print data/print job is modified.

Referring now to fig. 100A, an exemplary graph 10000A depicting exemplary measurements associated with a first preheat laser (represented by line 10001A) and a second preheat laser (represented by line 10003A) based on the operation of an exemplary processing circuit is provided.

As shown in fig. 100A, the x-axis represents a plurality of time instances. As depicted, the y-axis represents a plurality of detected temperature values associated with a first preheat laser (represented by line 10001A) and a second preheat laser (represented by line 10003A). As shown in fig. 100A, in response to receiving a control indication of the exemplary processing circuitry, the preheat laser temperature of each of the first preheat laser (represented by line 10001A) and the second preheat laser (represented by line 10003A) rises rapidly to a given level (as depicted, between 0 and about 270 along the x-axis). The preheat laser temperature of each of the first preheat laser (represented by line 10001A) and the second preheat laser (represented by line 10003A) then enters a steady state mode (between about 270 and 480 along the x-axis as depicted) during which the preheat laser temperature oscillates so as to maintain a near constant value over a predetermined range.

Referring now to fig. 100B, an exemplary graph 10000B depicting exemplary measurements associated with a first medium (represented by line 10001B) and a second medium (represented by line 10003B) based on the operation of an exemplary processing circuit is provided.

As shown in fig. 100B, the x-axis represents a plurality of time instances. As depicted, the y-axis represents a plurality of detected temperature values associated with a first medium (represented by line 10001B) and a second medium (represented by line 10003B). As shown in fig. 100B, in response to receiving a control indication of the exemplary processing circuit, the medium temperature of each of the first medium (represented by line 10001B) and the second medium (represented by line 10003B) rises rapidly to a given level (as depicted, between 0 and about 345 along the x-axis). Then, the medium temperature of each of the first medium (represented by line 10001B) and the second medium (represented by line 10003B) reaches a steady state temperature (as depicted, the x-axis is between about 345 and 480).

Referring now to fig. 100C, an exemplary graph 10000C depicting exemplary measurements associated with a first preheat laser (represented by line 10001C) and a second preheat laser (represented by line 10003C) based on the operation of an exemplary processing circuit is provided.

As shown in fig. 100C, the x-axis represents a plurality of time instances. As shown, the y-axis represents a plurality of detected temperature values associated with a first preheat laser (represented by line 10001C) and a second preheat laser (represented by line 10003C). As shown in fig. 100C, during steady state mode, as the exemplary processing circuit operates to maintain the temperature value within a predetermined temperature range, the preheat laser temperature of each of the first preheat laser (represented by line 10001C) and the second preheat laser (represented by line 10003C) oscillates periodically (e.g., from a first peak at about 1250 to a second peak at about 1400 along the x-axis as depicted).

Referring now to fig. 100D, an exemplary graph 10000D depicting exemplary measurements associated with a first medium (represented by line 10001D) and a second medium (represented by line 10003D) based on the operation of an exemplary processing circuit is provided. As shown in fig. 100D, the x-axis represents a plurality of time instances. As depicted, the y-axis represents a plurality of detected temperature values associated with a first medium (represented by line 10001D) and a second medium (represented by line 10003D). As shown in fig. 100D, during steady state mode, as the exemplary processing circuit operates to maintain the temperature value within a predetermined temperature range, the medium temperature of each of the first medium (represented by line 10001D) and the second medium (represented by line 10003D) periodically oscillates (e.g., from a first peak at about 1340 to a second peak at about 1500 along the x-axis as depicted).

Accordingly, figures 100A, 100B, 100C, and 100D illustrate that the exemplary processing circuitry will operate to maintain a constant temperature relative to the medium and/or the preheat laser that is within a predetermined temperature range defined by a lower threshold temperature value and an upper threshold temperature value.

Referring now to fig. 101, a first exemplary graph 10101 depicting exemplary measurements associated with an exemplary medium during power compensation operation of the exemplary processing circuit/printing device 100 and a second exemplary graph 10103 depicting measurements associated with an exemplary writing laser are provided.

As shown in fig. 101, the x-axis represents a plurality of time instances. As depicted, the y-axis of the first graph 10101 represents a plurality of detected temperature values associated with the medium and the y-axis of the second graph 10103 represents a plurality of detected temperature values associated with the write laser.

In some examples, as discussed above in connection with fig. 98, it is not always necessary to wait for the media to reach the target temperature in order to accelerate the printing of the media. In some embodiments, when the media temperature is slightly below/near the target temperature (e.g., lower threshold temperature value), it is possible to increase the write laser output power and overdrive it in order to optimize the printing operation and target printing parameters (e.g., quality, darkness level). Similarly, when the media temperature is slightly above the target temperature (e.g., a higher threshold temperature value), the write laser output power may be reduced and underactuated in order to optimize the printing operation and target printing parameters.

As depicted in fig. 101, during the first stage 10102 of the printing operation, the medium temperature rises rapidly, while the write laser does not perform the printing operation. As further depicted in fig. 101, during the second stage 10104 of the printing operation, the actual media temperature is slightly below the target temperature (e.g., a lower threshold temperature value). Thus, as depicted, at the end of the first phase, the write laser will enter an overdrive mode with the medium temperature still below the target temperature. Subsequently, as the media temperature approaches the target temperature during the second phase 10104, the overdrive write laser power will decrease and return to the normal output write laser power level at the end of the second phase 10104 and through the third phase 10106. Correspondingly, during the third stage 10106, the medium reaches the target temperature.

Similarly, as described above, when the medium temperature is higher than the target temperature (e.g., higher threshold temperature value) and thus too hot for optimal operation, the output write laser power may be reduced in order to prevent overfire and achieve proper print quality. Correspondingly, as the medium cools, the write laser output power will slowly increase back to the normal output power level.

Moving regulation of medium temperature in a preheating chamber using a heat sink

As discussed herein, in some examples, a printing device (e.g., a laser industrial printer) may utilize a preheater/preheat beam to heat a print medium (e.g., a label) prior to a printing operation/generating marks on the print medium. In some embodiments, at least a portion of the exemplary media may be at least partially disposed within the heating chamber prior to commencing a printing operation. In some embodiments, the heating chamber may include at least one heat sink element configured to heat the print medium as it traverses at least a portion of the printing device/heating chamber.

In some examples, a first portion of the exemplary media (e.g., defining a portion of a print media web) may be disposed/positioned within the heating chamber for preheating prior to a printing operation. Subsequently, a first portion of the exemplary print medium may exit/traverse the heating chamber and a second portion of the exemplary print medium may be disposed/positioned within the heating chamber. In such examples, the heating chamber may warm up/heat up in order to preheat the print medium. Additionally, in some examples, the heating chamber may remain warm/hot for a period of time when the preheating operation is terminated/stopped (e.g., when the current source to the heating element is turned off). Thus, in the event that a first portion of the exemplary print medium has left the heating chamber and a second portion of the exemplary print medium is disposed/positioned within the heating chamber, the second portion of the exemplary print medium may begin heating/reacting to residual heat/heat in the heating chamber before reactivating the heating chamber for a subsequent warm-up operation. This may result in unwanted burn marks being incident on the second portion of the print medium. In some examples, the affected portion of the print medium (e.g., adjacent to the print label) may need to be rejected/replaced before the printing operation begins, which may result in wasted print medium, due to unwanted burn-out.

According to various embodiments of the present disclosure, exemplary apparatus, methods, and techniques are provided for controlling a warm-up operation (e.g., temperature within an exemplary heating chamber of an exemplary printing device). In some embodiments, the exemplary printing device includes at least one movable heat sink element configured to control a predetermined gap associated with the print media path in order to prevent the exemplary print media from unnecessarily warming up/heating when disposed in the heating chamber (e.g., prior to beginning a warm-up and/or printing operation).

Referring now to fig. 102, an exemplary functional block diagram depicting at least a portion of an exemplary printing device 10200 according to various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. As depicted in fig. 102, the exemplary printing apparatus 10200 includes at least a printer control unit 10201, a print control component 10203, a preheat control unit 10205, a heater control unit 10207, at least one writing laser 10209, a temperature sensor 10211, a roller 10213, a preheat chamber 10215, a first movable heat sink element 10204, and a second movable heat sink element 10206. In various embodiments, the example printing device 10200 is configured to heat/preheat a print medium prior to performing a printing operation. In various embodiments, the example roller 10213 operates to move, drive, and/or guide the print medium from a first position within the printing device 10200 to a second position (e.g., along a print path) (e.g., from the preheat chamber 10215 to the laser writing position 10217, and then out of the printing device 10200 after a printing operation).

As depicted in fig. 102, the printer control unit 10201 may generate one or more control instructions/signals to cause the preheat control unit 10205 to preheat at least a portion of the print medium (e.g., print medium 10202A, 10202B, and/or 10202C). As described above, the exemplary printing apparatus 10200 includes the preheat chamber 10215. As further depicted, the first movable heat sink element 10204 and the second movable heat sink element 10206 are at least partially positioned, disposed, and/or contained within the preheating chamber 10215. In various examples, the first and second movable heat sink elements 10204, 10206 may each be or include a heating element, heating coil, heating plate, light source, etc. configured to emit radiant energy/heat in response to control instructions/signals provided by the preheat control unit 10205 operating in conjunction with the printer control unit 10201. The first and second movable heat sink elements 10204, 10206 may be driven by one or more actuators and/or operatively coupled to one or more movable arms/movable components. As shown, the first movable heat sink element 10204 is positioned/disposed adjacent to a top surface of the exemplary print medium (e.g., print media 10202A, 10202B, and 10202C) at a first distance such that a predetermined gap exists between the top surface of the exemplary print medium and the first movable heat sink element 10204. As further depicted, the second movable heat sink element 10206 is positioned/disposed adjacent to a bottom surface of the exemplary print medium (e.g., print media 10202A, 10202B, and 10202C) at a first distance such that a predetermined gap exists between a top surface of the exemplary print medium and the second movable heat sink element 10206. In various embodiments, each of the first and second movable heat sink elements 10204, 10206 may be driven by one or more actuators/power sources (e.g., one or more current sources). In various examples, the preheat control unit 10205 (operating in conjunction with the printer control unit 10201) is configured to transmit one or more control instructions/signals to cause the first and second movable heat sink elements 10204, 10206 to preheat/heat at least a portion of the print medium as the print medium (e.g., print media 10202A, 10202B, and 10202C) traverses a position (e.g., preheat chamber 10215) associated with the first and second movable heat sink elements 10204, 10206 and moves in the direction of the laser writing position 10217.

In some embodiments, after preheating at least a portion of the print medium (e.g., to a target temperature, as detected by the temperature sensor 10211 feedback loop), the printer control unit 10201 and/or the print control component 10203 (e.g., one or more actuators) performs a printing operation. For example, the printer control unit 10201 transmits control instructions/signals to cause at least one writing laser 10209 to write/irradiate one or more marks on at least a portion of a preheated print medium (e.g., print media 10202A, 10202B, and 10202C).

As depicted in fig. 102, the printer control unit 10201 and the print control component 10203 (e.g., one or more actuators) are operatively coupled to each other and to the roller 10213. In some embodiments, the printer control unit 10201 may transmit control instructions/signals to the print control component 10203 (e.g., one or more actuators) to cause the rollers 10213 to drive (e.g., roll, pull, stretch, etc.) the print medium along a print path. In other words, the roller 10213 may drive the print medium to move from the preheat chamber 10215 (adjacent the first and second movable heat sink elements 10204, 10206) to the laser writing position 10217 (adjacent the at least one writing laser 10209). Subsequently, the printer control unit 10201 may transmit control instructions/signals to the print control component 10203 (e.g., one or more actuators) to cause the rollers 10213 to drive (e.g., roll, pull, stretch, etc.) print media (e.g., print labels) along a print path away from the printing device 10200. By way of example, a first portion of print medium 10202A may enter preheat chamber 10215, laser writing location 10217, and then exit printing device 10200. Similarly, a second portion 10202B of the print medium may enter the preheat chamber 10215, the laser writing location 10217, and then exit the printing device 10200. Finally, a third portion 10202C of the print medium may enter the preheat chamber 10215, the laser writing location 10217, and then exit the printing device 10200.

Referring now to fig. 10300, another exemplary functional block diagram depicting at least a portion of an exemplary printing device 10300 according to various embodiments of the disclosure is provided. The printing device 10300 can be similar or identical to the printing device 10200 described above in connection with fig. 102.

As depicted in fig. 103, the exemplary printing apparatus 10300 includes at least a printer control unit 10301, a print control component 10303, a preheat control unit 10305, a heater control unit 10307, at least one writing laser 10309, a temperature sensor 10311, a roller 10313, a preheat chamber 10315, a first movable heat sink element 10304, and a second movable heat sink element 10306. In various embodiments, the example printing device 10300 is configured to heat/preheat a print medium prior to performing a printing operation. In various embodiments, the example roller 10313 operates to move, drive, and/or guide the print medium from a first position within the printing device 10300 to a second position (e.g., along a print path) (e.g., from the preheat chamber 10315 to the laser writing position 10317, and then out of the printing device 10300 after a printing operation).

As depicted in fig. 103, the printer control unit 10301 may generate one or more control instructions/signals to cause the preheating control unit 10305 to preheat at least a portion of the print media (e.g., print media 10302A, 10302B, and 10302C). As described above, the exemplary printing apparatus 10300 includes a preheat chamber 10315. As further depicted, the first and second movable heat sink elements 10304, 10306 are at least partially positioned, disposed, and/or contained within the preheat chamber 10315. In various examples, the first and second movable heat sink elements 10304, 10306 can each be or include a heating element, heating coil, heating plate, light source, etc., configured to emit radiant energy/heat in response to control instructions/signals provided by the preheat control unit 10305 operating in conjunction with the printer control unit 10301. The first and second movable heat sink elements 10304, 10306 can be driven by one or more actuators and/or operatively coupled to one or more movable arms/movable components.

As described above, after preheating at least a portion of the print medium (e.g., to a target temperature, as detected by the temperature sensor 10311 feedback loop), the printer control unit 10301 and/or the print control component 10303 (e.g., one or more actuators) perform a printing operation. For example, the printer control unit 10301 transmits control instructions/signals to cause at least one writing laser 10309 to write/irradiate one or more marks on at least a portion of the preheated print media (e.g., print media 10302A, 10302B, and 10302C).

As shown, the first movable heat sink element 10304 is positioned/disposed adjacent to the top surface of the exemplary print medium (e.g., print media 10302A, 10302B, and 10302C) at a first/particular distance such that a predetermined gap exists between the top surface of the exemplary print medium and the first movable heat sink element 10304. As further depicted, the second movable heat sink element 10306 is positioned/disposed adjacent to the bottom surface of the exemplary print medium (e.g., print media 10302A, 10302B, and 10302C) at a second distance (relative to the first distance depicted in fig. 102) such that a predetermined gap (which is different from the gap depicted in fig. 102) exists between the top surface of the exemplary print medium and the second movable heat sink element 10306. In various embodiments, each of the first and second movable heat sink elements 10304, 10306 may be driven by an actuator control unit 10307B that includes one or more actuators/power sources (e.g., one or more current sources).

In various embodiments, in response to detecting that a printing operation has terminated with respect to at least a portion of the print medium (e.g., a first portion of print medium 10302A), the printer control unit 10301 can generate one or more control instructions/signals to move the first and second movable heat sink elements 10304, 10306 from a first position to a second position (e.g., away from a portion of the print medium disposed within the preheat chamber 10315). For example, the first movable heat sink element 10304 and/or the second movable heat sink element 10306 can each include one or more arms (e.g., driven by the actuator control unit 10307B) configured to move vertically relative to the print medium in order to mitigate the effect of waste heat within the preheat chamber 10315 on subsequent portions of the print medium (e.g., to prevent burn out). In other words, the first and/or second movable heat sink elements 10304, 10306 may each be moved from the first position to the second position in order to increase the respective gap/distance between the first and/or second movable heat sink elements 10304, 10306 and the position of the print medium. Accordingly, the printer control unit 10301 is operable with the actuator control unit 10307B to control the preheat temperature within the preheat chamber 10315 and prevent unwanted combustion marks from occurring on the print medium.

As depicted in fig. 103, the printer control unit 10301 and the print control component 10303 (e.g., one or more actuators) are operatively coupled to each other and to the roller 10313. In some embodiments, the printer control unit 10301 can transmit control instructions/signals to the print control component 10303 (e.g., one or more actuators) to cause the rollers 10313 to drive (e.g., roll, pull, stretch, etc.) the print medium along the print path. In other words, the roller 10313 may drive the print medium to move from the preheat chamber 10315 (adjacent the first and second movable heat sink elements 10304, 10306) to the laser writing position 10317 (adjacent the at least one writing laser 10309). Thus, in response to detecting that a portion of the print medium is in the print-stop position and/or has moved away from the laser-write position 10217, the printer control unit 10301 can transmit control instructions/signals to the print control component 10303 (e.g., one or more actuators) to move the first movable heat sink element 10304 and/or the second movable heat sink element 10306 away from the print medium disposed within the preheat chamber 10315.

In various examples, the above-described techniques may facilitate faster cooling when a printing operation is stopped and/or with the print medium stationary. In addition, another control parameter is provided for regulating the temperature of the print medium. For example, as discussed herein, as the print medium traverses the heating chamber, at least one movable heat sink element may move (e.g., up and down) to control a predetermined gap in the media path. This solution can be easily implemented and solves the problem of unwanted burn marks.

Laser-written pre-emphasis for improving print contrast

As discussed herein, in some examples, an exemplary printing device may include at least one laser source/diode to generate a laser beam that is continuously scanned/swept across a print medium. In some examples, when the laser is on, movement of the laser beam may cause the laser beam to traverse across the target print spot. In some examples, as the laser and associated laser beam move, the first portion of the print medium may no longer be exposed to the laser (beginning), which may result in partial printing or lower contrast edges at the beginning/beginning of the printing operation.

According to various embodiments of the present disclosure, exemplary apparatus, methods, and techniques are provided for preventing partial printing and improving print contrast during printing operations. In some embodiments, the exemplary method includes pre-emphasizing (e.g., scaling, changing, modulating, increasing, etc.) the amount of current flowing through the exemplary laser source/diode when marking the laser beam onto the print medium in order to improve signal integrity and print quality. In other words, the exemplary method may include increasing the power/current amount at the beginning of each printed dot for a period of time less than the total dot time (i.e., the period of time required to illuminate/generate the dot) at the beginning of the printed dot. In some examples, the amount of power or current drawn by the laser source/diode may be 10% more or 50% more at the beginning of each print point. This additional current may enable the laser source/diode to turn on faster and provide additional optical power at the beginning of the printed dot, which may improve the overall print contrast at the beginning of the printed dot/line when the previous dot is not printed. In addition, such current amplification may also be used at the end of the print line/dot to improve edge contrast when printing is stopped.

Referring now to fig. 104, an exemplary graph 10400 depicting exemplary measurement results based on operation of an exemplary laser source/diode is provided. As depicted in fig. 104, the x-axis represents a plurality of time instances (measured in seconds). As shown, the y-axis represents the voltage output (represented by line 10401) associated with the initial square wave signal. As further shown, the y-axis also represents the voltage output (represented by line 10403) associated with the pre-emphasis drive signal. In some examples, as shown, the pre-emphasis drive signal generates a first voltage peak at about 0.4s along the x-axis, corresponding to the beginning of the first print point. In addition, the pre-emphasis drive signal generates a second voltage peak along the x-axis at about 3.1s, corresponding to the beginning of the second print dot.

Thus, fig. 104 illustrates a technique for pre-emphasizing the amount of power/current drawn by an exemplary laser source/diode at the beginning of each print dot. The techniques may also enhance the print edge contrast when the exemplary laser source/diode is initially turned on for a print operation.

Laser fault protection system based on photodiode detector

In some examples, the printing device/LPH system may include one or more class 4 lasers for printing content onto the laser-sensitive print medium. Thus, prevention of unintentional laser emission is of paramount importance for safety. In many examples, these lasers can present significant safety risks, including potential eye and burn hazards. Additionally, in some examples, unintended rotation (e.g., caused by a short circuit on the control circuit board) may cause the laser to inadvertently turn on, which may lead to a fire accident.

In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, exemplary apparatus, methods, and techniques are provided for detecting unintentional laser activation and immediately disabling laser drive circuitry and power supply. In some embodiments, the exemplary laser fault protection system may be implemented entirely as a hardware and/or firmware solution to prevent inadvertent laser ignition. In some examples, the at least one dedicated photodiode may be positioned proximate to the at least one laser such that the at least one laser is on when any of the lasers is lasing and even lasing at low power. In some implementations, a comparator with a suitably low "on" threshold completes the light detection circuit. The laser detector output signal may be compared to a digital logic output from an FPGA that goes high only when at least one laser is intended to be on for printing or SOL detection purposes. A mismatch indicating that at least one laser is on when it should not be on may trigger the digital logic device to drive the positive input of the driver operational amplifier low and also disable the laser power source, thereby turning the laser off. The techniques disclosed herein prevent errors that may occur in firmware or hardware, including shorts that may cause at least one laser to inadvertently turn on. For example, a gate-to-drain short of gallium nitride (GaN) may cause the laser to fire or oscillate on/off, but will be detected by an exemplary photodiode. Thus, the laser power disable logic is operable to turn off at least one laser. In some implementations, a latch circuit may be utilized to keep the fault indication latched, where the latch may only be reset with a power cycle. In some embodiments, a counter may be implemented to track these events and store the count in non-volatile memory. In some embodiments, the printing device/LPH may be permanently disabled once the repeat failure count threshold is reached. In some examples, signal timing tuning may permit a certain amount of relaxation in order to avoid false triggers, but may still shut down very quickly in the event of a legitimate failure.

Digital-to-analog in an auto-tune laser printer systemMethod for compensating value of converter (DAC)

In some embodiments, an exemplary printing device or laser printing system may include a digital-to-analog converter (DAC) for controlling timing/power delivery to one or more lasers. For example, a DAC may be used to scale the output voltage. By way of example, an exemplary DAC may include multiple channels, with each channel of the DAC being used to control a particular laser. In this way, the printing apparatus can be configured to perform gradation printing by scaling the maximum output power as needed according to various parameters including the printing speed, the medium reactivity, the medium temperature, and the like.

In some examples, the exemplary DAC may be part of a current control system for driving at least one laser. For example, the output of the exemplary DAC may first be provided to a differential amplifier and then to a drive operational amplifier to drive the laser. However, in some examples, the DAC may utilize an inaccurate internal reference, resulting in a power output below the desired/target set point (up to 16% below the target set point in some examples). Additionally, in some examples, components of the current control system (e.g., the differential amplifier and the drive op amp) may add error to the laser drive output that needs to be calibrated.

In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, exemplary apparatus, methods, and techniques are provided for automatically tuning DAC compensation values in a laser printing system. In contrast to known methods, the techniques described herein may use a single measurement point (e.g., the full scale output of a dedicated DAC used to drive the laser) to quickly and automatically tune the laser printing device. This single measurement may then be used to compensate for the gain of the DAC output to ensure that the DAC output can be driven across its full scale. In some implementations, DAC calibration may be performed by tuning the DAC gain and RSET values. Thus, the techniques disclosed herein relate to automatically tuning DAC GAIN and RSET values by measuring the analog voltage downstream of the DAC output at system start-up, and compensating for the internal accuracy of the DAC whenever the system is powered up, thus addressing the need for initial calibration and subsequent calibration operations to account for any drift over time.

Referring now to fig. 105, an exemplary flowchart illustrating an exemplary method 10500 in accordance with examples of the present disclosure is provided.

In some examples, method 10500 may be performed by a processing circuit, such as, but not limited to, a microcontroller unit (MCU), ASIC, or CPU. In some examples, the processing circuitry may be electrically coupled to and/or in electronic communication with other circuitry of the example printing device, memory, such as, for example, random Access Memory (RAM) for storing computer program instructions, and/or the like.

In some examples, one or more of the programs described in fig. 105 may be embodied by computer program instructions that may be stored by a memory (such as a non-transitory memory) of a system employing embodiments of the present disclosure and executed by a processing circuit (such as a processor) of the system. These computer program instructions may direct a system to function in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the memory circuit produce an article of manufacture including instructions which implement the function specified in the flowchart step/operation. In addition, the system may include one or more other circuits. The various circuits of the system may be electrically coupled to and/or in each other to transmit and/or receive energy, data, and/or information.

In some examples, the embodiments may take the form of a computer program product on a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing computer-readable program instructions (e.g., computer software). Any suitable computer readable storage medium may be utilized including non-transitory hard disks, CD-ROMs, flash memory, optical storage devices, or magnetic storage devices.

The exemplary method 10500 begins at step/operation 10501. At step/operation 10501, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, an MCU) provides (e.g., generates, transmits) control instructions to disable one or more lasers of the exemplary printing device. Since the method 10500 does not require any laser emission, step/operation 10501 may be performed to ensure that the one or more lasers are not turned on when the method 10500 is performed. In some examples, the laser offset value (e.g., for the auxiliary DAC (AUXDAC) output) may be adjusted and stored in non-volatile memory prior to or in conjunction with step/operation 10501.

After step/operation 10501, the method 10500 proceeds to step/operation 10503. At step/operation 10503, the processing circuit/MCU may adjust the DAC register (e.g., DAC register 07 (qrst)) to a full range output value (in some examples, near or as close as possible to the full range output value), e.g., 700mV, at the output from the differential amplifier without exceeding the full range value. In some examples, this is measured by the analog-to-digital converter (ADC) of the processing circuit/MCU (bit 7 of qrst must remain "1". Qrst is located at position 5:0 and is a two's complement).

After step/operation 10503, the method 10500 proceeds to step/operation 10505. At step/operation 10505, the processing circuit/MCU continues to adjust the DAC register 06 (qdacgan bit) to increase or decrease the gain value as needed to increase or decrease the output from the differential amplifier (e.g., to 200.0 mV). In some embodiments, the differential amplifier output may be measured by an ADC of an exemplary MCU. Thus, in various embodiments, the processing circuit/MCU may drive the output value of the DAC to/near full scale, measure the output and perform compensation operations using internal gain and resistor registers within the DAC. In various examples, the DAC output may pass through a differential amplifier circuit and then to a laser drive circuit. The processing circuit/MCU may measure the voltage output from the exemplary differential amplifier circuit and compare that output to the DAC output voltage when the commanded output is at the expected system full scale output voltage. The processing circuit/MCU may then use an algorithm to tune the DAC compensation values until the differential amplifier circuit output is as close as possible to the target value for the given available delta compensation value.

After step/operation 10505, the method 10500 proceeds to step/operation 10507. At step/operation 10507, the processing circuit/MCU stores the gain value (e.g., in non-volatile memory). In various implementations, the processing circuit/MCU may repeat steps/operations 10501, 10503, and 10505 for all system DAC outputs. By way of example, an exemplary DAC may be associated with one of a plurality of lasers and two corresponding outputs.

After step/operation 10507, the method 10500 proceeds to step/operation 10509. At step/operation 10509, the processing circuit/MCU (optionally) periodically re-compensates, for example, if a long/threshold period of time has elapsed since the printing device has been power cycled, or if the processing circuit detects an ambient temperature (e.g., an abnormally hot or cold ambient temperature) outside of a predetermined range that may affect the DAC and/or differential amplifier output.

After step/operation 10509, the method 10500 proceeds to step/operation 10511. At step/operation 10511, the processing circuit/MCU provides control instructions to activate the printing device/lasers and operate optimally. Thus, any drift in the DAC output and/or the differential amplifier output may be compensated for while eliminating the need to manually tune these values at the time of manufacture.

Multimode laser with cross-scan beam amplification in a printer

As described in detail herein, an exemplary printing device may include a plurality of multimode lasers and/or single mode lasers that generate laser beams for printing/shining content onto a print medium. In some embodiments, the laser/scanning lens optics of the printing device may be divided into groups, as described herein. By way of example, the first group may be a scan dimension group or an f- θ lens group, and the second group may be a cross-scan dimension group or a magnifying lens group. In some implementations, optical power may be removed from the f- θ lens group in the cross-scan dimension. For example, an exemplary printing device may include a plurality of multimode lasers (e.g., four multimode lasers).

According to various embodiments of the present disclosure, exemplary devices, methods, and techniques for providing a multimode laser printing device are provided. In various embodiments, the exemplary printing apparatus is optimally configured to simultaneously write multiple lines on a print medium and achieve a wobble correction operation. The term "wobble" may refer to a measure of the variation of angular deviation of a laser beam in the cross-scan dimension (e.g., as it leaves a polygon mirror). Correcting the wobble allows the beam angle to deviate without moving the spot at the print medium. Advantageously, the exemplary printing apparatus may also be associated with reduced beam alignment complexity and operational sensitivity. Additionally, in some examples, the use of integrated laser components may simplify manufacturing and repair and replacement of failed components.

Referring now to fig. 106, a schematic diagram depicting an exemplary diagram of a portion of a printing device 10600 in accordance with an example of the present disclosure is provided. The printing device 10600 can be at least partially disposed, contained, and/or disposed within a housing (e.g., body, structure). Specifically, as depicted, the example printing apparatus 10600 includes an integrated laser component 10601, a controller component 10602 (e.g., a laser drive board), a first thermoelectric cooling element 10605A, a second thermoelectric cooling element 10605B, and at least one laser 10607 (e.g., a multimode laser). In various embodiments, the integrated laser component 10601, the controller component 10602 (e.g., a laser drive board), the first thermoelectric cooler element 10605A, the second thermoelectric cooler element 10605B, and the at least one laser 10607 are in electronic communication with one another such that data and/or information may be transmitted and/or received between the various components/elements.

As described above, the exemplary printing apparatus 10600 includes an integrated laser component 10601. In some examples, as depicted, the integrated laser component 10601 defines/includes a housing. In various embodiments, integrated laser component 10601 includes a collimation assembly operatively coupled to at least one laser. An exemplary housing may be or include any suitable metal (e.g., such as aluminum or brass), and may be configured to at least partially contain/house one or more lasers (e.g., at least one laser 10607) and beam shaping optics. As shown in fig. 106, an exemplary integrated laser component 10601 is operatively coupled to a controller component 10602 (e.g., a laser drive board and/or Printed Circuit Board Assembly (PCBA)). In addition, at least a surface of the integrated laser component 10601 is positioned adjacent to a controller component 10602 (e.g., a laser drive plate). Exemplary integrated laser component 10601 may be or include a collimation assembly that includes a plurality of lenses. Specifically, as shown, the integrated laser component 10601 includes a first lens 10603A, a second lens 10603B, a third lens 10603C, and a fourth lens 10603D arranged in a 2×2 array. Additionally, in various embodiments, the exemplary integrated laser component 10601 is disposed adjacent to at least one laser 10607 (e.g., a multimode laser). In addition, as depicted in fig. 106, the at least one laser 10607 includes a plurality of lasers, particularly four multimode lasers arranged/configured in a 2 x 2 array. In some examples, the integrated laser component 10601 and the at least one laser 10607 define a unitary/single assembly. In some examples, each lens 10603A, 10603B, 10603C, and 10603D of the integrated lens component 10601 is operatively coupled to a respective laser (e.g., a first multimode laser, a second multimode laser, a third multimode laser, and a fourth multimode laser). In some examples, at least a portion of at least one laser 10607 may be at least partially disposed within a housing of integrated laser component 10601.

In some embodiments, at least one laser 10607 (e.g., a first multimode laser, a second multimode laser, a third multimode laser, and a fourth multimode laser) is oriented such that the multimode dimensions of the at least one laser 10607 (e.g., the first multimode laser, the second multimode laser, the third multimode laser, and the fourth multimode laser) are in a cross-scan dimension.

Referring now to fig. 107, a schematic diagram depicting an exemplary diagram of a portion of a printing device 10700 in accordance with an example of the present disclosure is provided. The exemplary printing device 10700 can be similar or identical to the printing device 10600 discussed above in connection with fig. 106. As shown, the printing device 10700 may be at least partially disposed, contained, and/or disposed within a body/housing. Specifically, as depicted, the exemplary printing device 10700 includes an integrated laser component 10701, a controller component 10702 (e.g., a laser drive board), a first thermoelectric cooling element 10705A, a second thermoelectric cooling element 10705B, at least one laser 10707, a mirror 10708, and a lens element 10704 (e.g., a cross-scan magnifying lens element). In various embodiments, each of the components/elements of the printing device 10700 are in electronic communication with each other such that data and/or information may be transmitted and/or received between the various components/elements.

As described above, the exemplary printing apparatus 10700 includes an integrated laser component 10701. In some examples, as depicted, the integrated laser component 10701 includes a housing. The exemplary housing may be or include any suitable metal and may be configured to at least partially contain/house one or more lasers and beam shaping optics. As shown in fig. 107, an exemplary integrated laser component 10701 is operatively coupled to a controller component 10702 (e.g., a laser drive board or PCBA). In particular, as depicted, the exemplary integrated laser component 10701 may be a collimation assembly that includes a first lens 10703A, a second lens 10703B, a third lens 10703C, and a fourth lens 10703D arranged in a 2 x 2 array. As further depicted, in various examples, the integrated laser component 10701 includes/is operatively coupled to at least one laser 10707 (e.g., four multimode lasers each associated with a respective lens 10703A, 10703B, 10703C, and 10703D). As depicted, at least one laser 10707 is disposed/positioned at least partially between the first thermoelectric cooling element 10705A and the second thermoelectric cooling element 10705B. In some embodiments, at least one laser 10707 (e.g., four multimode lasers) is oriented such that the multimode dimensions are in a cross-scan dimension (e.g., 90 degrees relative to the scan dimension). As further depicted in fig. 107, the example printing apparatus 10700 includes one or more optical components. In particular, the exemplary printing apparatus 10700 includes a polygonal mirror 10706, a mirror 10708 (e.g., a post-collimation front polygonal (PCPP) mirror), and a lens element 10704 (e.g., a cross-scan magnifying cylindrical lens). In some embodiments, a lens element 10704 (e.g., a cross-scan magnifying cylindrical lens) is disposed adjacent to the location of the print medium (e.g., one inch from the surface of the print medium) so as to provide a magnification factor on the order of less than 1 or 0.1. This can be used to reduce the focused spot size to the target resolution (e.g., 200 DPI).

In some implementations, each laser of integrated laser component 10701 is focused on mirror 10708 (e.g., a single PCPP mirror). Mirror 10708 can reflect an incident light beam onto polygon mirror 10706 coincident in the cross-scan dimension to form an object to be imaged. In addition, a lens element 10704 (e.g., a cross-scan magnifying cylindrical lens) can image the laser spot from the surface of the polygon mirror 10706 and then onto the surface of the print medium in order to provide sufficient magnification to reduce the spot size at the print medium and achieve wobble correction. In various examples, placing the object on the surface of the polygon mirror 10706 prior to providing the image to the print medium also addresses wobble correction. For example, at the exit aperture of the printhead, the large beam is reduced to a smaller size (e.g., magnification factor x 0.1) at the media due to the relative positions of the polygon mirror 10706 and the print media.

As further shown in fig. 107, the exemplary printing apparatus 10700 includes a first thermoelectric cooling element 10705A and a second thermoelectric cooling element 10705B that operate to regulate the temperature of the integrated laser component 10701. In some examples, at least a portion of the integrated laser component 10701/at least one laser 10707 is disposed adjacent to/at least partially between the first thermoelectric cooler element 10705A and the second thermoelectric cooler element 10705B.

As described above, in some embodiments, in order to print content using a printing device that includes multiple multimode lasers, it may be desirable to compress the laser beam (e.g., emitted by an integrated laser component) to achieve a target print resolution. This may require considerable magnification in the cross-scan dimension to reduce the image size, and may be accomplished using lens elements (e.g., magnifying cylindrical lenses) positioned adjacent/near the print medium.

Referring now to fig. 108, a schematic diagram depicting an exemplary diagram of a portion of a printing device 10800 according to an example of the present disclosure is provided.

As shown, the printing device 10800 can be at least partially disposed, contained, and/or disposed within a body/housing. Specifically, as depicted, the exemplary printing device 10800 includes an integrated laser component/at least one laser source 10801, a controller component 10802 (e.g., a laser drive board). As depicted in fig. 108, the example printing device 10800 includes one or more optical components. In particular, the example printing apparatus 10800 includes a polygonal mirror 10806, a mirror 10808 (e.g., a PCPP mirror), and a lens element 10804 (e.g., a magnifying bi-cylindrical lens). In various embodiments, each of the components/elements of the printing device 10800 are in electronic communication with each other such that data and/or information can be transmitted and/or received between the various components/elements.

As described above, the exemplary printing apparatus 10800 includes an integrated laser component/at least one laser source 10801 (including at least one multimode laser). In some examples, as depicted, the integrated laser component/at least one laser source 10801 includes/defines a housing. An exemplary housing may be or include any suitable metal and may be configured to at least partially contain/house one or more lasers (e.g., a plurality of multimode lasers). As shown in fig. 108, an exemplary integrated laser component/at least one laser source 10801 (e.g., at least one multimode laser) is operatively coupled to a controller component 10802 (e.g., a laser drive board or PCBA). In some embodiments, the exemplary printing device 10800 includes a lens element 10804 (e.g., a magnifying bi-cylindrical lens) disposed adjacent a location of the print medium (e.g., one inch from a surface of the print medium) so as to provide a magnification factor of less than 1.

In some embodiments, the integrated laser component/at least one laser source 10801 (e.g., at least one multimode laser) is configured to focus the output beam onto a mirror 10808 (e.g., a single PCPP mirror). The mirror 10808 can then reflect the incident light beam onto the polygonal mirror 10806 in the cross-scan dimension, forming the object to be imaged. In some embodiments, two of the laser beams (e.g., generated by the first pair/set of multimode lasers) may be configured on a high path, while the other two of the laser beams (e.g., generated by the second pair/set of multimode lasers) may be configured on a low path in order to minimize optical size. Referring again to fig. 108, an exemplary path is depicted of two possible symmetrical paths (originating from an integrated laser component/at least one laser source 10801, mirrored about a symmetry line 10811, and ending at a lens element 10804 leading to a print mechanism aperture 10813). In various embodiments, the exemplary printing device 10800 can be configured such that the laser beam is incident on a partial height, full height, or center point of the lens element 10804.

In some embodiments, a lens element 10804 (e.g., a cross-scan magnifying cylindrical lens) may image the laser spot from the surface of the polygonal mirror 10806 and then onto the surface of the print medium in order to provide sufficient magnification/target magnification to reduce the spot size at the print medium while also achieving wobble correction. In various examples, placing the object on the surface of the polygon mirror 10806 before providing the image to the print media also addresses wobble correction. For example, at the exit aperture of the printhead, the large beam is reduced to a smaller size (e.g., magnification factor x 0.1) at the print medium due to the relative positions of the polygon mirror 10806 and the print medium.

In some embodiments, an exemplary printing device may be configured to use a folded beam path. Referring now to fig. 109, a schematic diagram depicting an exemplary diagram of a portion of a printing device 10900 in accordance with an example of the present disclosure is provided.

As shown in fig. 109, an example printing device 10900 may be at least partially disposed, contained, and/or disposed within a body/housing. Specifically, as depicted, the example printing device 10900 includes a controller component 10902 (e.g., a laser drive board) and one or more optical components. Specifically, the example printing apparatus 10900 includes a polygonal mirror 10906, a lens element 10904 (e.g., a magnifying cylindrical lens), and a plurality of mirrors (as depicted, a first mirror 10912A, a second mirror 10912B, a third mirror 10912C, and a fourth mirror 10912D). In some examples, multiple mirrors 10912A, 10912B, 10912C, and 10912D may direct (e.g., direct, convey) the laser beams to a common alignment target. In various embodiments, each of the components/elements of the printing device 10900 are in electronic communication with each other such that data and/or information can be transmitted and/or received between the various components/elements.

In some implementations, the output beam of the laser source (e.g., the integrated laser component/at least one laser source 10801 discussed above in connection with fig. 108) may be incident on a polygonal mirror 10906 and then sequentially focused/directed to each of a plurality of mirrors 10912A, 10912B, 10912C, and 10912D in sequence. The output of the plurality of mirrors 10912A, 10912B, 10912C, and 10912D may then be directed onto the lens element 10904 before terminating at the print mechanism hole 10913. In some examples, the print mechanism aperture 10913 may be 2mm in size. In some embodiments, a lens element 10904 (e.g., a double cylinder magnifying lens) can be positioned between the f-theta lens and the print medium, in some examples, adjacent/near the print medium.

As described above, an exemplary lens element 10904 (e.g., a magnifying cylindrical lens) may be disposed adjacent to a location of the print medium (e.g., one inch from a surface of the print medium) in order to reduce the focused spot size to a target resolution (e.g., 200 DPI).

Referring now to fig. 110, an exemplary graph 11000 depicting exemplary measurements based on operation of an exemplary device is provided. As depicted in fig. 110, the x-axis represents the relative distance from the laser source to the print medium, measured in millimeters.

As shown, the y-axis represents the beam width (measured in microns) associated with the first multimode laser beam at the print medium (represented by line 11001 and line 11005). As depicted, the beam width generated by the first multimode laser is capable of achieving a target resolution of 120 microns at the print medium (located at about 12.5mm on the graph).

As further shown, the y-axis also represents the beam width (measured in microns) associated with the single-mode dimension of the laser beam at the print medium (represented by line 11003). As shown, the beam width generated by the first multimode laser is capable of achieving and maintaining a target resolution of about 120 microns in a single-mode dimension (e.g., scan dimension) at a relative distance of between 10 and 15mm from the print medium.

Thus, fig. 110 illustrates that both the single mode and multimode dimensions of a multimode laser can be used to print content at a target resolution (e.g., 120 microns or 200 DPI).

Multiple laser beam delivery module with common beam subsystem

In some examples, high power may be necessary in order to write/irradiate content directly onto sensitive print media. In some examples, it may be difficult to provide a sufficient amount of power at reasonable cost and size using a single laser. As discussed herein, in some applications, multiple lasers may be used. The use of multiple lasers may require precise alignment and assembly methods so that the multiple lasers coordinate with one another to perform optimally.

In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, exemplary apparatus, methods, and techniques are provided for providing a multiple laser beam delivery module having a common beam subsystem.

Referring again to fig. 107, as described above, exemplary printing device 10600 can include an integrated laser component 10701. The example printing apparatus 10600 may be similar or identical to the example printing apparatus 10700 described above in connection with fig. 107.

As described above, the exemplary integrated laser component 10701 includes a collimation assembly having a 2 x 2 lens array (as depicted, lenses 10703A, 10703B, 10703C, and 10703D) operatively coupled to at least one laser 10707 (e.g., a multimode laser). In some examples, the integrated laser component 10701 defines a group of lasers that can be aligned external to the exemplary laser printhead. In various examples, at least one multimode laser 10707 may be associated with a respective collimating lens (lenses 10703A, 10703B, 10703C, and 10703D) and may be focused/collimated independently therefrom (in some examples, in combination with other lasers).

In some embodiments, the lens element 10704 (e.g., a cross-scan magnifying cylindrical lens element) is operable to focus the cross-scan dimension of at least one laser 10707 (e.g., at least one multimode laser) to the same distance, and the configuration of mirrors can direct the light beams to a common alignment target. In various examples, writing content on multiple/different print lines may be facilitated using a common target, or writing content to a single line simultaneously. In some embodiments, as depicted in fig. 107, an integrated laser component 10701/at least one laser 10707 (e.g., a group of lasers) may be mounted as a unit within an exemplary printhead, requiring a single mirror/optical path to direct the beam to an exemplary polygonal mirror (e.g., polygonal mirror 10706).

In various embodiments, the exemplary integrated laser component 10701/at least one laser 10707 may include/embed multiple instances (one instance per laser) of the same beam shaping and steering system. In some examples, each instance may include a collimating lens having a focal length set to control the beam size in the scan dimension. In some examples, each instance can include a cylindrical lens configured to focus the cross-scan dimension to a surface of a polygonal mirror (e.g., polygonal mirror 10706). In some examples, each instance may include a wedge prism (or prisms) that is adjusted to angularly deflect the light beam to the alignment target. In some examples, each instance may include a leveling prism to realign the incident beam to a condition that is approximately coplanar with other lasers of the system. In some examples, each collimating lens, cylindrical lens, and/or wedge prism may need to be adjusted in order to achieve target alignment. Thus, in various examples, each collimating lens and/or cylindrical lens may be translated in the direction of beam propagation to achieve proper focusing. In addition, each wedge prism (e.g., deflection prism) may be rotated to achieve a target/appropriate beam height (or x/y position) on a polygonal mirror (e.g., polygonal mirror 10706) after passing through the leveling prism (i.e., different laser lines are aligned with each other). Once the module is fully aligned (e.g., during manufacture), it may be positioned within an exemplary printhead/printing apparatus, and a simple alignment process (e.g., adjustment of a single mirror) may align all lasers with scanning optics (e.g., rotating polygonal mirrors).

Active medium laser printer with symmetrical optical layout and segmented scan line

As described above, an exemplary printing apparatus may include an integrated laser component (e.g., comprised of four multimode laser diodes and corresponding lenses, each arranged in a 2 x 2 array). In such examples, each laser beam generated by the plurality of multimode lasers may be inherently non-coplanar as the laser beam sweeps through the optical system. In some examples, the lack of coplanarity may require larger optics, reduced depth of focus at the print medium, reduced laser spot quality (e.g., due to aberrations), and/or difficulty forcing four beams to print the same coincident line.

According to various embodiments of the present disclosure, exemplary apparatus, methods, and techniques are provided for providing a multiple laser beam arrangement with a symmetrical optical layout and segmented scan lines.

Referring now to fig. 111, a schematic diagram depicting exemplary portions of a printing apparatus 11100 in accordance with examples of the present disclosure is provided. Exemplary portions of the printing device 11100 can be at least partially disposed, contained, and/or disposed within a housing (e.g., body, structure, container). In some examples, the example printing device 11100 can include two separate/distinct 1 x 2 arrays. As shown, the example printing apparatus 11100 includes a first laser array 11101 (e.g., a 1 x 2 laser array) and a second laser array 11103 (e.g., a 1 x 2 laser array). As shown, each of the first laser array 11101 and the second laser array 11103 may be configured to direct a laser beam through an optical element/lens configuration.

As further depicted in fig. 111, the exemplary printing apparatus 11100 includes a polygonal mirror 11102 disposed downstream relative to the first and second laser arrays 11101, 11103. As further shown, the first set of optical elements 11105 (e.g., scanning lenses) and the second set of optical elements 11107 (e.g., scanning lenses) are positioned downstream relative to the polygonal mirror 11102 such that the one or more laser beams are directed/conveyed through the polygonal mirror. As depicted, a first set of optical elements 11105 is associated with a first laser array 11101, and a second set of optical elements 11107 is associated with a second laser array 11103. In addition, as shown, each of the first laser array 11101 and the second laser array 11103 is positioned symmetrically around/relative to the scanning polygon mirror 11102. As further shown in fig. 111, the example printing apparatus 11100 further includes a common lens element 11109 (e.g., an enlarged double cylindrical lens) configured to focus the cross-scan dimension of each laser beam provided by the first and second laser arrays 11101, 11103.

In some examples, the scan line generated by the example printing apparatus 11100 may be divided/segmented into two segments, each segment covering half of the print medium/label. In some examples, separate segments may require data stitching. In some examples, it may be necessary to optically compress the sweep (e.g., from full label size down to half label size). In some embodiments, digital compensation may be used to avoid distortion of the printed image where the lasers within each of the laser arrays 11101 and 11103 scan at slightly different speeds.

In some examples, the example printing device 11100 can provide improvements in depth of focus, laser spot quality, system compactness, and/or printing efficiency (i.e., power versus speed). Additionally, the example printing apparatus 11100 can provide advantages related to thermal transport and electrical layout within printheads.

Method for printing by laser printer using preheating system

In some embodiments, as discussed herein, the laser printer system may utilize a preheater to heat/warm the print medium to a target temperature prior to laser firing. In some examples, an exemplary preheater/preheating system may require a period of time (in some examples, between 10 minutes and 15 minutes) to bring the print medium to the target temperature.

According to various embodiments of the present disclosure, exemplary apparatus, methods, and techniques for rapidly heating a print medium prior to laser firing are provided. The techniques may allow an end user to print immediately after powering up an exemplary printing device.

Referring now to fig. 112, an exemplary flow chart illustrating an exemplary method 11200 according to an example of the present disclosure is provided.

In some examples, method 11200 may be performed by a processing circuit, an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), a CPU, or the like. In some examples, the processing circuitry may be electrically coupled to and/or in electronic communication with other circuitry of the example printing device, memory, such as, for example, random Access Memory (RAM) for storing computer program instructions, and/or the like.

In some examples, one or more of the programs described in fig. 112 may be embodied by computer program instructions that may be stored by a memory (such as a non-transitory memory) of a system employing embodiments of the present disclosure and executed by a processing circuit (such as a processor) of the system. These computer program instructions may direct a system to function in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the memory circuit produce an article of manufacture including instructions which implement the function specified in the flowchart step/operation. In addition, the system may include one or more other circuits. The various circuits of the system may be electrically coupled to and/or in each other to transmit and/or receive energy, data, and/or information.

The exemplary method 11200 begins at step/operation 11201. At step/operation 11201, processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, a CPU) determines a warm-up status associated with an exemplary printing device.

After determining the preheat state at step/operation 11201, method 11200 proceeds to step/operation 11203. At step/operation 11203, the processing circuitry automatically scales the available print speed based on the preheat state. For example, the printing device may initially print at a lower speed (e.g., 1.5IPS to 2 IPS) than is typically required to complete a particular printing operation. Thus, in some examples, the printing operation may be successfully performed at a lower speed (e.g., using one laser instead of multiple lasers), where possible. As another example, at power up, if a print job is requested under 4IPS, the printing device/processing circuitry may continue printing under 1.5IPS to 2IPS, depending on the final performance capabilities of the system design/target print parameters. As the preheater heats the media, the maximum print speed will increase to match the capacity, for example, a speed of 4IPS when fully preheated.

Guiding print line media into contact with a preheater drive having two rollers

In various examples, a preheat laser or preheater may be used to preheat (i.e., heat) a print medium (e.g., a label) to a target temperature prior to or during a printing operation (e.g., generating a mark or shining content onto the print medium), as discussed herein. In some examples, the media may fail to reach or maintain the target temperature prior to the printing operation, which may result in poor print quality. By way of example, as the print medium traverses the printing device and then reaches a second location, the print medium may be preheated at the first location, at the second location using at least one writing laser to print content on the print medium. In such examples, the print medium temperature may drop (e.g., drop, decrease, etc.) between the first location and the second location, which may result in poor print quality. Additionally, in some examples, the surface temperature of a preheat component or heating element positioned at a distance from or in direct contact with the print medium may experience an undesirable temperature drop (due to heat transfer characteristics) when preheating the print medium. In such examples, the media may fail to reach or maintain the target temperature prior to or during the printing operation. In other embodiments, occasional movement of the print medium (e.g., high jitter caused by movement/vibration of various printing device components (e.g., motors)) may also cause or result in poor print quality as the print medium traverses the exemplary printing device.

Exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure may address the above-described issues, including, but not limited to, unwanted temperature drops associated with preheating/heating the print medium and jitter attributable to accidental movement of the print medium and/or printing device components.

According to various embodiments of the present disclosure, exemplary apparatus, methods, and techniques for preheating print media are provided. In some embodiments, an exemplary printing device includes a preheat assembly. The preheating assembly may include: a first drive roller and a second drive roller positioned in direct contact with a top surface of the print medium; and a rotary preheat member configured to preheat the print medium, the rotary preheat member positioned in direct contact with a bottom surface of the print medium, wherein an aperture between the first drive roller, the second drive roller, and the rotary preheat member defines a print medium path through the preheat assembly. In some embodiments, the rotary preheating assembly comprises a substantially cylindrical member configured to rotate relative to its central axis. In some embodiments, the rotary preheating assembly further comprises an infrared heating source or a conduction-based heating element defining the internal concentric members of the rotary preheating assembly. In some embodiments, the printing device prints the line between the first drive roller and the second drive roller. In some embodiments, the preheating assembly is mounted at least partially on the support bracket, and wherein the preheating assembly further comprises at least one of a tear strip and a guide element. In various examples, the exemplary printing apparatus may more accurately preheat the print medium because the configuration minimizes or eliminates unwanted temperature drops and reduces media jitter. Additionally, in various examples, the direct contact between the print medium and the preheat assembly provides a large contact surface area for efficient preheat operation.

Referring now to fig. 113, a schematic diagram depicting a preheating assembly 11300 in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. As depicted in fig. 113, exemplary preheat assembly 11300 includes at least print medium 11301, tear strip 11302, first drive roller 11304, second drive roller 11306, and preheat component 11310. In various embodiments, the exemplary preheat assembly 11300 is configured to heat/preheat a print medium. For example, in various embodiments, the exemplary preheat assembly 11300 may include a heating element, heating coil, heating plate, light source, etc., configured to emit radiant energy/heat in response to control instructions (e.g., provided by a controller component, such as but not limited to a preheat control unit, printer control unit, etc.). The preheat assembly 11300 can be a modular unit configured to be disposed at least partially within a housing of the printing device. Accordingly, the preheat assembly 11300 may be easily removed (e.g., disengaged, disassembled, etc.) from the printing device for repair or replacement. As shown, the preheat assembly 11300 is at least partially mounted on a support bracket 11308. In various examples, support bracket 11308 may be configured to be at least partially disposed or received within a cavity of an exemplary printing device. Additionally, as shown, the preheat assembly 11300 is configured to receive (e.g., direct) print medium 11301 therethrough.

As depicted in fig. 113, and as described above, the exemplary preheat assembly 11300 includes a first drive roller 11304 and a second drive roller 11306. As depicted, first drive roller 11304 and second drive roller 11306 each include a cylindrical member disposed on or defining a top portion of preheat assembly 11300. In various embodiments, the first and second drive rollers 11304, 11306 are positioned to contact the print medium 11301 as it traverses a print path adjacent (e.g., below or directly below) the first and second drive rollers 11304, 11306. As further depicted, each of the first and second drive rollers 11304, 11306 are operatively coupled to/in electronic communication with first and second drive gears 11314, 11316, respectively. Each of the first and second drive gears 11314, 11316 is operable to rotate the first and second drive rollers 11304, 11306 to move, drive, and/or guide the print medium 11301 from a first position to a second position (e.g., along a print path) within at least a portion of the example preheat assembly 11300/printing device. Because of their relative positions with respect to print medium 11401, first drive roller 11304 and second drive roller 11306 may also support print medium 11401 in place as it moves through/across preheat assembly 11300.

As further depicted in fig. 113, the exemplary preheat assembly 11300 includes a preheat component 11310. In various embodiments, the preheat component 11310 is operable to preheat at least a portion of the print medium 11301 as it traverses a print path through the example preheat component 11300/printing device. As shown, the preheat component 11310 includes a cylindrical member positioned adjacent (e.g., below or directly below) the first drive roller 11304 and the second drive roller 11306. In some embodiments, the preheat component 11310 may include a plurality of concentric members/layers, with each concentric member/layer disposed within another concentric member/layer (e.g., an inner concentric member may be disposed within an outer concentric member), as discussed in more detail below.

As depicted in fig. 113, preheat member 11310 is positioned directly below first and second drive rollers 11304, 11306 such that each of first and second drive rollers 11304, 11306, print medium 11301, and preheat member 11310 contact each other. In other words, at least a portion of print medium 11301 is disposed between first drive roller 11304, second drive roller 11306, and preheat member 11310 such that the apertures therebetween define a print path through preheat assembly 11300. Due to the relative positioning of the first drive roller 11304, the second drive roller 11306, and the preheat member 11310 (which may provide a media flatness tolerance of less than 0.4mm in some examples), media jitter and/or movement may be greatly reduced, thereby improving print quality. Additionally, in some embodiments, the print location or print line is located directly between the first drive roller 11304 and the second drive roller 11306 (e.g., one or more writing lasers may be positioned to write content to a portion of the print medium disposed between the first drive roller 11304 and the second drive roller 11306).

As further depicted in fig. 113, the exemplary preheat assembly 11300 includes a tear strip 11302. The tear strip 11302 may be used to remove (e.g., tear, cut, separate, etc.) a portion of the print medium 11301 (e.g., after printing/illuminating the content thereon). As shown, the tear strip 11302 is positioned adjacent to and downstream from the first and second drive rollers 11304, 11306. Accordingly, the print medium 11301 can traverse the print path in the direction of the tear strip 11302 from a position adjacent the first drive roller 11304 and the second drive roller 11306.

Although fig. 113 illustrates an exemplary preheat assembly 11300, it should be noted that the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the example shown in fig. 113. In some implementations, the preheat assembly 11300 may be different from the preheat assembly depicted in fig. 113. For example, a pre-heat assembly according to the present disclosure may include a single drive roller or more than two drive rollers. Similarly, a preheating assembly according to the present disclosure may include a non-cylindrical preheating component.

Referring now to fig. 114, a schematic diagram depicting a side cross-sectional view of an exemplary portion of a pre-heat assembly 11400 in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. The preheat assembly 11400 may be similar or identical to preheat assembly 11300 discussed above in connection with fig. 113.

As depicted in fig. 114, the exemplary preheat assembly 11400 includes at least a print medium 11401, a tear strip 11402, a first drive roller 11404, a second drive roller 11406, a preheat component 11410, and an inlet guide element 11416. In various embodiments, the exemplary preheat assembly 11400 is configured to heat/preheat print medium 11401. Exemplary preheat assembly 11400 may include a heating element, a heating coil, a heating plate, a light source, etc., configured to emit radiant energy/heat in response to control instructions (e.g., provided by a controller component, such as but not limited to a preheat control unit, a printer control unit, etc.). The preheat assembly 11400 may be a modular unit configured to be disposed at least partially within a housing of an exemplary printing device. As shown, the pre-heat assembly 11400 is mounted at least partially on a support bracket 11408 defining the body of the pre-heat assembly 11400. In various examples, the support bracket 11408 can be configured to be at least partially disposed or received within a cavity of an exemplary printing device. Additionally, as shown, the preheat assembly 11400 is configured to receive (e.g., direct) print media 11401 therethrough. In some examples, as depicted, the pre-heat assembly 11400 includes an inlet guide element 11416. The inlet guide element 11416 may include apertures and/or channels that define the entrance location of the print media 11401 into the preheat assembly 11400.

As further depicted in fig. 114, the exemplary preheat assembly 11400 includes a first drive roller 11404 and a second drive roller 11406. As shown, the first drive roller 11404 and the second drive roller 11406 each include a cylindrical member defining a top portion of the preheat assembly 11400. In various embodiments, the first and second drive rollers 11404, 11406 are positioned to contact the print medium 11401 as it traverses a print path adjacent (e.g., below or directly below) the first and second drive rollers 11404, 11406. Each of the first and second drive rollers 11404, 11406 is operatively coupled to at least one drive gear configured to rotate the first and second drive rollers 11404, 11406 to move, drive, and/or direct the print medium 11401 from a first position to a second position (e.g., along a print path) within at least a portion of the example preheat assembly 11400/printing device.

As further depicted in fig. 114, the exemplary preheat assembly 11400 includes a preheat component 11410. In various embodiments, the preheat component 11410 is configured to preheat the print medium 11401 as it traverses through the print path of the example preheat component 11400/printing device. Specifically, as depicted, the preheat component 11410 includes a cylindrical member positioned adjacent (e.g., below or directly below) the first drive roller 11404 and the second drive roller 11406. In various examples, the preheat component 11410 includes a plurality of concentric members/layers (e.g., a heating source 11410A and a preheat cylinder 11410B), with each concentric member/layer disposed within another concentric member/layer. Specifically, as shown, the pre-heat component 11410 includes a heating source 11410A defining the innermost concentric member of the pre-heat component 11410. In various examples, the heating source 11410A supplies heat to preheat (e.g., heat) the print medium 11401 disposed within the preheat assembly 11400. Exemplary heating sources 11410A may be or include IR lamps, IR LED lamps, laser diodes, and the like. In some embodiments, the heating source 11410A provides 980nm radiation to preheat the print medium 11401 to a target temperature (e.g., 55 ℃).

As further shown in fig. 114, the preheat component 11410 includes a preheat cylinder 11410B defining an outermost concentric member of the preheat component 11410 configured to be in direct contact with at least a portion of the print medium 11401 as it traverses the print path of the preheat component 11400. In some embodiments, the pre-heated cylinder 11410B comprises a metal (e.g., a metal with a release coating, or a metal comprising a rotating film, wherein the release coating surrounds (e.g., encapsulates) the film). At least a portion of the preheat member (e.g., preheat cylinder 11410B) may be configured to rotate relative to its central axis in order to transfer heat to print medium 11401, as discussed in more detail below. Additionally, in some embodiments, the preheat component 11410 may include at least one intermediate layer/member disposed between the heat source 11410A and the preheat cylinder 11410B. In some embodiments, the pre-heat cylinder 11410B may comprise a metal, such as stainless steel or aluminum. In some examples, the surface of the pre-heated cylinder 11410B may include a coating that allows it to withstand heat. In some embodiments, the surface of the preheat cylinder 11410B may be coated with a release coating material to prevent adhesion and support linerless or linerless printing. In some embodiments, the preheat cylinder 11410B may include a non-metallic material. By way of example, the pre-heat cylinder 11410B may include a thin cylindrical film surrounding at least a portion of the outer surface of the pre-heat cylinder 11410B. An exemplary thin cylindrical film may be coated with a release material.

As depicted in fig. 114, the preheat member 11410 is positioned directly below the first drive roller 11404 and the second drive roller 11406 such that at least a portion of the print medium 11401 is disposed between the first drive roller 11404, the second drive roller 11406, and the preheat member 11410. Thus, the aperture between the first drive roller 11404/second drive roller 1406 and the preheat member 11410 defines a print path for the print medium 11401 through the preheat assembly 11400. As described above, the first drive roller 11404 and the second drive roller 11406 can direct (e.g., guide, etc.) the print medium 11401 as it traverses through the print path of the preheat assembly 11400/printing device. In addition, as depicted, the print position or print line 11412 is located directly between the first drive roller 11404 and the second drive roller 11406. Thus, when a portion of print medium 11401 reaches print line 11412, one or more writing lasers may be used to impinge content onto a portion of print medium 11401.

As further depicted in fig. 114, the exemplary preheat assembly 11400 includes a tear strip 11402. The tear strip 11402 may be used to remove (e.g., tear, cut, separate, etc.) a portion of the print medium 11401 (e.g., after printing/illuminating the content thereon). As shown, the tear strip 11402 is positioned adjacent and downstream of the first and second drive rollers 11404, 11406. Thus, the print medium 11401 can traverse the print path from a position beginning with the inlet guide element 11416 to a position adjacent the first drive roller 11404 and the second drive roller 11406 and in the direction of the tear strip 11402.

Although fig. 114 illustrates an exemplary preheat assembly 11400, it should be noted that the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the example shown in fig. 114. In some embodiments, the preheat assembly 11400 may be different from the preheat assembly depicted in fig. 114.

Referring now to fig. 115, a schematic diagram depicting an exemplary portion of a printing apparatus 15000 including an exemplary preheat assembly 11503 is provided, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure. As depicted in fig. 115, an exemplary preheat assembly 11503 is disposed within a body/chamber of printing device 15000. As further depicted, the exemplary preheat assembly 11503 includes at least a print medium 11501, a tear bar 11502, a first drive roller 11504, a second drive roller 11506, a preheat member 11510, and an inlet guide element 11516. In various embodiments, the exemplary preheat assembly 11503 is configured to heat/preheat the print medium 11501 prior to and/or during a printing operation. As shown, preheat assembly 11503 is mounted at least partially on a support bracket 11508 that defines the body of preheat assembly 11503. As shown, the support bracket 11508 is configured to be received (e.g., mounted, inserted, etc.) within a cavity of the example printing device 11500. Additionally, as shown, preheat assembly 11503 is configured to receive (e.g., direct) print medium 11501 therethrough.

As described above, preheat assembly 11503 includes inlet guide element 11516. Inlet guide element 11516 may include holes and/or guide elements that define an inlet/path for print medium 11501 into preheat assembly 11503.

As further depicted in fig. 115, the exemplary preheat assembly 11503 includes a first drive roller 11504 and a second drive roller 11506. As depicted, the first and second drive rollers 11504, 11506 each include a cylindrical member disposed on/defining a top portion of the preheat assembly 11503. In various embodiments, the first and second drive rollers 11504, 11506 are positioned to contact the print medium 11501 as it traverses a print path adjacent (e.g., below or directly below) the first and second drive rollers 11504, 11506. In addition, the first and second drive rollers 11504, 11506 are operably coupled to/in electronic communication with at least one drive gear configured to rotate the first and second drive rollers 11504, 11506 in order to move, drive, and/or guide the print medium 11501 from a first position to a second position (e.g., along the print path 11500) within at least a portion of the example preheat assembly 11503/printing device. In addition, as depicted, the printing device 11500 can include additional drive rollers (e.g., a main drive roller 11511) that operate in conjunction with the drive rollers (e.g., the first drive roller 11504 and the second drive roller 11506) of the preheat assembly 11503 to move the print medium 11501 along a print path.

As further depicted in fig. 115, the exemplary preheat assembly 11503 includes a preheat member 11510. In various embodiments, preheat component 11510 is configured to preheat the print medium 11501 as it traverses a print path through exemplary preheat assembly 11503/printing device 11500. Specifically, as shown, the preheat component 11510 includes a cylindrical member positioned adjacent (e.g., below or directly below) the first and second drive rollers 11504, 11506. As shown, preheat member 11510 includes a heating source 11510A that defines the innermost concentric member/layer of preheat member 11510. In various examples, heating source 11510A supplies heat to preheat (e.g., heat) a portion of print medium 11501 disposed within preheat assembly 11503. As described above, exemplary heating sources 11510A may include IR lamps, IR LED lamps, laser diodes, and the like. As further shown, preheat component 11510 includes a preheat cylinder 11510B that defines an outermost concentric member of preheat component 11510 that is configured to be in direct contact with at least a portion of print medium 11501 as it traverses the print path of preheat assembly 11503. In some embodiments, preheat component 11510 may further include at least one intermediate layer/member disposed between heating source 11510A and preheat cylinder 11510B.

As depicted in fig. 115, the preheat member 11510 is positioned directly below the first and second drive rollers 11504, 11506 such that at least a portion of the print medium 11501 is disposed between the first and second drive rollers 11504, 11506 and the preheat member 11510. Thus, the aperture between the first drive roller 11504/second drive roller 1406 and the preheat member 11510 defines a print path for the print medium 11501 through the preheat assembly 11503. As described above, the first and second drive rollers 11504, 11506 can guide (e.g., guide, etc.) the print medium 11501 as it traverses a print path through the preheat assembly 11503/printing device 11500. In addition, as depicted, the print position or print line 11512 is located directly between the first and second drive rollers 11504, 11506 such that one or more writing lasers can be used to irradiate content onto the print medium 11501 at the location of the print line 11512.

As further shown in fig. 115, exemplary preheat assembly 11503 includes a tear strip 11502. The tear bar 11502 may be used to remove (e.g., tear, cut, separate, etc.) a portion of the print medium 11501 (e.g., after printing/illuminating the content thereon). As shown, the tear strip 11502 is positioned adjacent to and downstream from the first and second drive rollers 11504, 11506. Thus, the print media 11501 can traverse the print path from a position adjacent the inlet guide element 11516 to a position adjacent the first and second drive rollers 11504, 11506 (i.e., in the direction of the tear bar 11502).

Although fig. 115 illustrates an exemplary preheat assembly 11503/printing device 11500, it should be noted that the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the example illustrated in fig. 115. In some embodiments, preheat assembly 11503/printing device 11500 may be different from the preheat assembly/printing device depicted in fig. 115.

Referring now to fig. 116, a schematic diagram depicting an exemplary portion of a preheat assembly 11600 in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. As depicted in fig. 116, the exemplary preheat assembly 11600 includes at least a print medium 11601, a first drive roller 11604, a second drive roller 11606, and a preheat component 11610. In some embodiments, the preheat assembly 11600 may be similar or identical to preheat assembly 11300 discussed above in connection with fig. 113. In various embodiments, the preheat component 11600 is configured to heat/preheat the print medium 11601 prior to and/or during a printing operation and may include a heat source (e.g., an IR LED source). In various embodiments, the preheat assembly 11600 is configured to be received within a cavity of an exemplary printing device. In addition, as shown, the preheat assembly 11600 is configured to receive and guide (e.g., guide, feed, etc.) print medium 11601 therethrough.

As depicted in fig. 116, the exemplary preheat assembly 11600 includes a first drive roller 11604 and a second drive roller 11606. As shown, the first drive roller 11604 and the second drive roller 11606 each include a cylindrical member disposed on/defining a top portion of the preheat assembly 11600. In various embodiments, the first drive roller 11604 and the second drive roller 11606 are positioned to contact the print medium 11601 as the print medium traverses a print path adjacent (e.g., below or directly below) the first drive roller 11604 and the second drive roller 11606. In addition, the first drive roller 11604 and the second drive roller 11606 are operably coupled to/in electronic communication with at least one drive gear configured to rotate the first drive roller 11604 and the second drive roller 11606 in order to move, drive, and/or guide the print medium 11601 from a first position to a second position (e.g., along a print path) within at least a portion of the example preheat assembly 11600/printing device.

As further depicted in fig. 116, the preheat member 11610 is positioned directly below the first drive roller 11604 and the second drive roller 11606 such that at least a portion of the print medium 11601 is disposed between the first drive roller 11604, the second drive roller 11606, and the preheat member 11610. Thus, the aperture between the first drive roller 11604/second drive roller 1406 and the preheat member 11610 defines a print path for the print medium 11601 through the preheat assembly 11600. As described above, the first drive roller 11604 and the second drive roller 11606 can guide (e.g., guide, etc.) the print medium 11601 as it traverses through the print path of the preheat assembly 11600/printing device. In addition, as depicted, a print location or print line 11612 is located directly between the first drive roller 11604 and the second drive roller 11606 such that one or more write lasers may be used to irradiate content onto the print medium 11601 at the location of the print line 11612.

As further depicted in fig. 116, the exemplary preheat component 11600 includes a preheat component 11610. In various embodiments, the preheat component 11610 is configured to preheat a print medium as the print medium 11601 traverses a print path through an exemplary preheat component 11600/printing device. Specifically, the preheat component 11610 includes a cylindrical member positioned adjacent (e.g., below or directly below) the first drive roller 11604 and the second drive roller 11606. As shown, the preheat component 11610 includes a heating source 11610A defining the innermost concentric member of the preheat component 11610. In various examples, the heating source 11610A supplies heat to preheat (e.g., heat) a portion of the print medium 11601 disposed within the preheat assembly 11600. Exemplary heating sources 11610A may include IR lamps, IR LED lamps, laser diodes, and the like. As further shown, the preheat component 11610 includes a preheat cylinder 11610B defining an outermost concentric member of the preheat component 11610 that is configured to be in direct contact with at least a portion of the print medium 11601 as the print medium traverses the print path of the preheat component 11600. In some embodiments, the preheat component 11610 may further include at least one intermediate layer/member disposed between the heating source 11610A and the preheat cylinder 11610B.

In various examples, at least a portion of the preheat member 11610 is configured to rotate relative to its central axis so as to directly contact and preheat the print medium 11601. As depicted in fig. 116, with the preheat member 11610 in the first position 11611, a first portion (e.g., surface) of the preheat member 11610 may experience heat loss (after transferring heat to the print medium 11601). In some examples, the first portion (e.g., surface) of the pre-heating component 11610 may have a temperature between 35 ℃ and 45 ℃ when the first portion (e.g., surface) of the pre-heating component is in the first position 11611. As further depicted, with a first portion (e.g., surface) of the preheat member 11610 in the second position 11613, a first portion (e.g., surface) of the print medium 11601 can absorb heat provided by the preheat member as the preheat member 11610 rotates relative to its center point. In some examples, the first portion (e.g., surface) of the pre-heating component 11610 may have a temperature between 45 ℃ and 55 ℃ when the first portion (e.g., surface) of the pre-heating component is in the second position 11613. Subsequently, when a first portion (e.g., surface) of the preheat member 11610 is in the third position 11615, the first portion (e.g., surface) of the preheat member 11610 may reach a target temperature (e.g., between 50 ℃ and 60 ℃) prior to direct contact with the print medium 11601. Thus, as shown, the surface of the preheat member 11610 may reach/attain an optimal or target temperature prior to direct contact with a portion of the print medium 11601 disposed adjacent to the print line 11602 (e.g., disposed between the first drive roller 11604/second drive roller 11606 and the top/adjacent surface of the preheat member 11610). By utilizing a rotating preheater component, heat loss is mitigated without affecting the continuous media feed temperature, thereby providing a self-healing heat loss system. In addition, an unwanted temperature drop due to a distance or gap between the preheating part and the printing medium is not caused. Further, by substantially simultaneously preheating the print medium and printing content onto the exemplary print medium, the print medium temperature can be easily regulated and maintained.

Although fig. 116 illustrates an exemplary preheat assembly 11600/printing device, it should be noted that the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the example shown in fig. 116. In some implementations, the preheat component 11600/printing device may be different from the preheat component/printing device depicted in fig. 116.

Method of preheating a medium for printing

As discussed herein, a preheat laser or preheater may be used to preheat (i.e., heat) a print medium (e.g., a label) to a target temperature prior to or during a printing operation (e.g., generating a mark or shining content onto the print medium).

In many examples, in order to achieve high print quality, it is necessary to properly and accurately regulate the temperature of the print medium. An exemplary print medium may be in motion during a printing operation. The optimal or target temperature range for the surface of the print medium may be different depending on the speed at which the print medium is moving. In such examples, accurately regulating the temperature of the moving print medium for a variety of different print speeds can be challenging.

In some examples, as described herein, to avoid burn marks (e.g., due to overheating of an exemplary print medium), the print medium temperature must also be carefully regulated (e.g., maintained below a certain threshold temperature) when the print medium is stationary. Further, in some examples, as the print medium traverses the printing device (e.g., from a first position to a second position during a printing operation), a portion of the print medium (e.g., web, label, etc.) entering the printing position may draw or absorb heat, which may result in a significant temperature drop relative to the heating element/component or on the surface of the print medium. The temperature drop associated with a particular portion of the print medium may be greater depending on the speed at which the print medium is moving. In addition, when a completed portion of the print medium (e.g., a completed label) exits an aperture of the printing device, it may be difficult to quickly reduce the temperature of the completed portion of the print medium. Thus, in various examples, preheating, maintaining a target temperature value or range, and cooling the print medium may prove challenging.

Exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure may address the problems (e.g., unwanted temperature drops and temperature regulation challenges) associated with preheating, heating, and cooling print media. According to various embodiments of the present disclosure, exemplary apparatus, methods, and techniques for regulating the temperature of a print medium are provided. In some embodiments, an exemplary printing apparatus includes: a pre-heat component operatively coupled to at least a first sensing element; at least one heating component operatively coupled to at least a second sensing element; and a controller component in electronic communication with the preheating component, the at least first sensing element, the at least one heating component, and the at least second sensing element. In some embodiments, the at least one heating component comprises: a primary heating element positioned adjacent a top surface of the print medium, and a secondary heating element positioned adjacent a bottom surface of the print medium. In some embodiments, the controller component is configured to: detecting, via at least a first sensing element, at least a first temperature value associated with the pre-heating component; detecting, via at least a second sensing element, at least a second temperature value associated with the at least one heating component; and regulating an operating temperature or power output of the preheating component and the at least one heating component based at least in part on one or more of the at least first temperature value and the at least second temperature value. In some embodiments, the controller component comprises a proportional-integral-derivative (PID) controller. In some embodiments, the at least first temperature value and the at least second temperature value each comprise one or more of an object temperature value, a surface temperature value, and an ambient temperature value. In some implementations, each of the preheating component and the at least one heating component includes one or more of a cartridge heater, a flexible heater, an Infrared (IR) light emitting diode heater, an IR lamp, and a heater heat sink. In some embodiments, the printing device further comprises at least an additional sensing element configured to detect a temperature value associated with a surface of the print medium.

In various examples, the use of strategically located heating sources (e.g., infrared (IR), light emitting diodes, and/or conventional heating sources) in conjunction with various sensing elements (e.g., temperature sensors) facilitates precise control of print medium temperature. By way of example, sensing elements may be used in conjunction with software algorithms to monitor temperature values at specific locations of the printing device in order to regulate/control the operation of the plurality of heating components (by regulating current supply or values).

Referring now to fig. 117, a schematic diagram depicting exemplary portions of a printing device 11700 according to various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. As depicted in fig. 117, the exemplary printing device 11700 includes a preheat component 11702, a primary heating component 11704, a secondary heating component 11706, and a plurality of sensing elements, as discussed in more detail below. In some examples, components of printing device 11700 (e.g., preheat component 11702) are operably coupled to/in electronic communication with a controller component (e.g., a proportional-integral-derivative (PID) controller) that regulates the output of preheat component 11702, primary heat component 11704, and secondary heat component 11706 in order to regulate the temperature of print medium 11701.

In various embodiments, the exemplary printing device 11700 is configured to regulate the temperature of the print medium 11701 prior to and/or during a printing operation to print/illuminate content thereon. In various embodiments, as depicted, the exemplary printing device 11700 includes at least one roller 11705 that operates to move, drive, and/or guide the print medium 11701 from a first position within the printing device 11700 to a second position (e.g., along a print path) (e.g., from a position/region adjacent the preheat member 11702 to a position/region adjacent the print line 11703 in which a print operation is performed, and then out of the printing device 11700 after the print operation).

As described above, the exemplary printing apparatus 11700 includes a preheat component 11702. In various embodiments, exemplary preheat component 11702 may be or include a heating element, heating coil, heating plate, light source, etc., configured to emit radiant energy/heat in response to control instructions (e.g., provided by a controller component such as, but not limited to, a preheat control unit, a printer control unit, etc.). In some embodiments, the preheat component 11702 is positioned/disposed adjacent a top surface/print path of the print media 11701. In some embodiments, the preheat component 11702 may be or include an IR LED-based source. In some embodiments, the preheat component 11702 includes a cartridge-based or flexible heater, a convection-based or conductive heating element, or the like. By way of example, in response to detecting a temperature drop below a particular threshold temperature value and/or a particular print medium speed, the example controller component may provide a control indication to increase the heat/power output of the preheat component 11702. As further depicted in fig. 117, the preheat component 11702 is operably coupled to/in electronic communication with at least a first sensing element 11712. For example, at least a first sensing element 11712 may be positioned or disposed proximate the preheat component 11702 so as to detect a surface and/or an ambient temperature associated therewith. The at least first sensing element 11712 can be or include at least one temperature sensor (e.g., an object temperature sensor, an ambient temperature sensor, a combination thereof, etc.). In some embodiments, at least the first sensing element 11712 can include a thermistor, a resistance-based temperature sensor, a thermocouple, a thermopile, or the like.

In some examples, at least the first sensing element 11712 may monitor the preheat component temperature such that the preheat component temperature may be accurately controlled/regulated (e.g., raised or lowered). By way of example, in response to detecting (e.g., via at least the first sensing element 11712) that the pre-heat component temperature or ambient temperature in the vicinity of the pre-heat component falls below or fails to meet a predetermined temperature value or range, the controller component may provide a control indication to trigger an increase in the pre-heat component temperature (e.g., by changing the power, current output, or heat output value of the pre-heat component 11702). Similarly, in response to detecting (e.g., via at least the first sensing element 11712) that the preheat component temperature or the ambient temperature in the vicinity of (e.g., near, adjacent to, a predetermined distance from) the preheat component exceeds or is above a predetermined temperature value or range, the controller component may provide a control indication to trigger a decrease in the preheat component temperature (e.g., by changing the power, current, or heat output value of the preheat component 11702).

As further depicted in fig. 117, and as described above, the exemplary printing device 11700 includes a primary heating element 11704. In various embodiments, the primary heating component 11704 may be or include a heating element, heating coil, heating plate, light source, etc., configured to emit radiant energy/heat in response to control instructions (e.g., provided by a controller component such as, but not limited to, a heating control unit, a printer control unit, etc.). In some embodiments, as shown, the primary heating element 11704 is positioned/disposed adjacent the top surface/print path of the print medium 11701 downstream of the location of the preheat element 11702. In some embodiments, the primary heating element 11704 may be or include an IR LED that is capable of providing heat directly to a target portion of the print medium 11701 (e.g., to raise/raise the temperature of the print medium 11701) at a location proximate to the print line 11703. The exemplary IR LED may facilitate faster rates of heating ramp up and cooling while providing consistent target heating that reacts more specifically toward the print medium. In some embodiments, the primary heating component 11704 may include a cartridge-based or flexible heater, a convection-based or conductive heater, or the like.

In some embodiments, the primary heating element 11704 may be or include an IR LED that is capable of providing heat directly to a target portion of the print medium 11701 (e.g., to raise/raise the temperature of the print medium 11701) at a location proximate to the print line 11703. In some embodiments, the primary heating component 11704 may include a cartridge-based flexible heater, a convection or conduction-based heater, an IR lamp, or the like. As further depicted in fig. 117, the primary heating component 11704 is operably coupled to/in electronic communication with at least the second sensing element 11714. For example, at least a second sensing element 11714 can be positioned or disposed proximate the primary heating element 11704 in order to detect a surface and/or an ambient temperature associated therewith. The at least second sensing element 11714 can be or include at least one temperature sensor (e.g., an object temperature sensor, an ambient temperature sensor, a combination thereof, etc.). In some embodiments, at least the second sensing element 11714 can comprise a thermistor, a resistance-based temperature sensor, a thermocouple, a thermopile, or the like.

In some examples, at least the second sensing element 11714 can monitor the primary heating element temperature such that the primary heating element temperature can be accurately controlled/regulated (e.g., raised or lowered), for example, to prevent the print medium 11701 from overheating. By way of example, in response to detecting (e.g., via at least the second sensing element 11714) that the primary heating element temperature or the ambient temperature in the vicinity of the primary heating element falls below or fails to meet a predetermined temperature value or range, the controller component may provide a control indication to trigger an increase in the primary heating element temperature (e.g., by changing the power, current, or heat output value of the primary heating element 11704). Similarly, in response to detecting (e.g., via at least the second sensing element 11714) that the primary heating element temperature or the ambient temperature in the vicinity of (e.g., near, adjacent to, a predetermined distance from) the pre-heating element exceeds or is above a predetermined temperature value or range, the controller component may provide a control indication to trigger a decrease in the primary heating element temperature (e.g., by changing the power, current, or heat output value of the primary heating element 11704).

As further shown in fig. 117, the exemplary printing device 11700 includes an auxiliary heating element 11706. In various examples, the auxiliary heating component 11706 may be or include a heating element, heating coil, heating plate, light source, or the like, configured to emit radiant energy/heat in response to control instructions (e.g., provided by a controller component such as, but not limited to, a heating control unit, a printer control unit, or the like). In various examples, the auxiliary heating member 11706 is configured to provide/maintain a base print medium temperature (e.g., 40 ℃) without overheating or burning the print medium 11701. In addition, in some embodiments (e.g., after the print medium temperature reaches a base print medium temperature value/threshold (e.g., 40 ℃), the primary heating element 11704 may be triggered (e.g., by a controller element) to provide radiant energy/heat to further raise (e.g., raise) the print medium temperature from the base print medium temperature value (e.g., 40 ℃) to a target temperature value (e.g., 55 ℃). In some embodiments, as shown, the secondary heating element 11706 is positioned/disposed adjacent to the bottom surface of the print medium 11701. In the example shown in fig. 117, the secondary heating element 11706 is positioned directly below the primary heating element 11704, downstream of the location of the preheat element 11702. In some embodiments, the secondary heating element 11706 may be or include an IR LED source or IR lamp, a heat sink element, a cartridge-based or flexible heater, a convection-based or conduction-based heater, or the like.

As further depicted in fig. 117, the auxiliary heating member 11706 is operably coupled to/in electronic communication with at least the third sensing element 11716. For example, at least a third sensing element 11716 can be positioned or disposed proximate the auxiliary heating member 11706 so as to detect a surface and/or an ambient temperature associated therewith. The at least third sensing element 11716 can be or include at least one temperature sensor (e.g., an object temperature sensor, an ambient temperature sensor, a combination thereof, etc.). In some embodiments, at least the third sensing element 11716 can comprise a thermistor, a resistance-based temperature sensor, a thermocouple, a thermopile, or the like.

In some examples, at least the third sensing element 11716 can monitor the auxiliary heating member temperature such that the auxiliary heating member temperature can be accurately controlled/regulated (e.g., raised or lowered), for example, to prevent the print medium 11701 from overheating. By way of example, in response to detecting (e.g., via at least third sensing element 11716) that the auxiliary heating element temperature or the ambient temperature in the vicinity of the primary heating element falls below or fails to meet a predetermined temperature value or range, the controller component may provide a control indication to trigger an increase in the auxiliary heating element temperature (e.g., by changing the power or heat output value of auxiliary heating element 11706). In a similar manner, in response to detecting (e.g., via at least third sensing element 11716) that the auxiliary heating element temperature or the ambient temperature in the vicinity of (e.g., near, adjacent to, a predetermined distance from) the preheat element exceeds or is above a predetermined temperature value or range, the controller element may provide a control indication to trigger a reduction in the auxiliary heating element temperature (e.g., by changing the power, current, or heat output value of the auxiliary heating element 11706).

In some implementations, as depicted, the printing device 11700 can include one or more additional sensing elements. As depicted in fig. 117, the printing device 11700 includes at least a fourth sensing element 11718. As shown, at least a fourth sensing element 11718 is positioned adjacent/near the print line 11703 and other heating components (e.g., the preheat component 11702, the primary heating component 11704, and the auxiliary heating component 11706) and downstream. Additionally, in some embodiments, at least a fourth sensing element 11718 may be positioned or disposed proximate to an exit aperture of the printing device 11700. At least a fourth sensing element 11718 can monitor the print medium temperature to provide feedback for regulating the print medium base temperature. In some examples, at least a fourth sensing element 11718 can be or include at least one temperature sensor (e.g., an object temperature sensor, an ambient temperature sensor, a combination thereof, etc.). In some embodiments, at least the fourth sensing element 11718 can include a thermistor, a resistance-based temperature sensor, a thermocouple, a thermopile, or the like.

In some examples, at least a fourth sensing element 11718 may monitor the auxiliary heating member temperature such that the auxiliary heating member temperature may be accurately controlled/regulated (e.g., raised or lowered), for example, to prevent overheating of print medium 11701. By way of example, in response to detecting (e.g., via at least fourth sensing element 11718) that the print medium temperature or the ambient temperature associated with (adjacent to) a portion of print medium 11701 is above a predetermined temperature value or range (e.g., too high to be safely handled by an end user), the controller component may provide control instructions to trigger a reduction in the operating power output/temperature of one of the heating components of printing device 11700 (e.g., preheat component 11702, primary heating component 11704, and/or secondary heating component 11706), and to adjust a stored base temperature value or target temperature associated with print medium 11701.

In some embodiments, the preheat component 11702 may be triggered to preheat a portion of the print media 11701 at a first location (e.g., as it enters an entry point or entry aperture of the printing device 11700) to a base temperature. Subsequently, a portion of the print media 11701 can be driven by at least one roller 11705 to move from a first position/adjacent the preheat member 11702 to a second position proximate the print line 11703.

At the second location (before reaching the print line 11703), a portion of the print media 11701 can further absorb radiant energy/heat generated by the primary heating element 11704 and/or the secondary heating element 11706. For example, a controller component (e.g., PID) can generate one or more control directives to cause the primary heating component 11704 and/or the secondary heating component 11706 to provide radiant energy/heat, wherein the amount of radiant energy/heat generated by the primary heating component 11704 and/or the secondary heating component 11706 is determined based at least in part on the print speed of the print medium 11701. For example, high print speeds may require a higher target temperature due to heat loss that may occur in response to movement of print medium 11701 at a particular speed. In some implementations, the ambient temperature associated with at least one location of the printing device 11700 can be monitored in order to dynamically adjust the controller component (e.g., PID) set point as desired. In some examples, the printing operation may not be initiated/started until the print medium 11701 and/or the heating element (e.g., the primary heating element 11704) reaches a target temperature, which in turn may be associated with the current print medium speed.

At the third position (upon/after reaching the print line 11703), a portion of the print medium 17701 can be stationary (i.e., stopped moving within the printing device 11700) before a printing operation is initiated (e.g., writing content using at least one write laser). In the above examples, the preheat element 11702, the primary heat element 11704, and/or the secondary heat element 11706 may be set to idle at a specified temperature to prevent burn marks from forming on the print medium 11701 while the print medium is stationary/not moving. In some implementations, the primary heating element 11704 may provide radiant energy/heat during a printing operation. In some embodiments, the print rate ramp down may be adjusted to match the cooling rate associated with the primary heating element 11704 in order to ensure that no burn marks are incident on the print medium 11701 at the point where the print medium 11701 stops (e.g., a position between the position of the print line and the distal edge of the primary heating element 11704). After a printing operation, a portion of the print medium 11701 (e.g., a finished/printed label) may exit the printing device 11700 through an exit orifice disposed downstream relative to the print line 11703.

Referring now to fig. 118, an exemplary flowchart is provided that illustrates an exemplary method 11800 in accordance with examples of the present disclosure.

In some examples, method 11800 may be performed by a processing circuit, an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), a CPU, a controller component (e.g., a PID controller), or the like. In some examples, the processing circuitry may be electrically coupled to and/or in electronic communication with other circuitry of the example printing device, memory, such as, for example, random Access Memory (RAM) for storing computer program instructions, and/or the like.

In some examples, one or more of the programs described in fig. 118 may be embodied by computer program instructions that may be stored by a memory (such as a non-transitory memory) of a system employing embodiments of the present disclosure and executed by a processing circuit (such as a processor) of the system. These computer program instructions may direct a system to function in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the memory circuit produce an article of manufacture including instructions which implement the function specified in the flowchart step/operation. In addition, the system may include one or more other circuits. The various circuits of the system may be electrically coupled to and/or in each other to transmit and/or receive energy, data, and/or information.

The exemplary method 11800 begins at step/operation 11801. At step/operation 11801, a processing circuit, such as but not limited to a CPU or controller component (e.g., a PID controller), detects/monitors (e.g., via at least one sensing element, such as at least a first sensing element 11712 described above in connection with fig. 117) at least a first temperature value associated with a preheat component, such as but not limited to preheat component 11702 described above in connection with fig. 117.

After step/operation 11801, method 11800 proceeds to step/operation 11803. At step/operation 11803, the processing circuitry detects/monitors (e.g., via at least one sensing element, such as at least a second sensing element 11714 or at least a third sensing element 11716 described above in connection with fig. 117) at least a second temperature value associated with at least one heating component, such as, but not limited to, the primary heating component 11704 or the auxiliary heating component 11706 described above in connection with fig. 117.

After step/operation 11803, method 11800 proceeds to step/operation 11805. At step/operation 11805, the processing circuitry regulates (e.g., increases or decreases in real-time as needed) the output (e.g., a power value or a temperature value) of each of the pre-heating component and the at least one heating component based at least in part on the at least first temperature value and the at least second temperature value.

Thus, using the apparatus and techniques described herein, the overall system temperature may be effectively controlled in response to the detected parameters (e.g., by increasing or decreasing the output of one or more heating components).

In some examples, the method further includes traversing the first roller and the second roller in a third direction, wherein the first roller and the second roller traverse in the third direction such that the first roller and the second roller abut the print medium, and wherein the third direction is opposite the second direction.

In some examples, the method further includes determining a time period between the first time and the second time based on the media traverse speed.

In some examples, the method further includes receiving input from an operator regarding a desired print quality, and determining a media traverse speed based on the desired print quality.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus is provided. The printing apparatus may include: a first roller; a second roller positioned downstream of the first roller in the first direction, wherein the first roller and the second roller facilitate traversal of the print media in the first direction; a processor communicatively coupled to the first roller and the second roller; wherein the processor is configured to: actuating the first roller and the second roller to traverse the print medium in a first direction, stopping rotation of the first roller at a first time; and stopping the rotation of the second roller at a second time, wherein the second time is later in time than the first time.

In some examples, the printing device further includes a printhead communicatively coupled to the processor, wherein the processor is configured to cause the printhead to print the content after the second time.

In some examples, the first roller is positioned upstream of the printhead, and wherein the second roller is positioned downstream of the printhead.

In some examples, the printing device further includes a first actuation unit and a second actuation unit, wherein the first actuation unit and the second actuation unit are coupled to the processor, wherein the processor is configured to actuate the first actuation unit and the second actuation unit to rotate the first roller and the second roller, respectively.

In some examples, the printing device further includes a third actuation unit communicatively coupled to the processor, wherein the third actuation unit is further coupled to a roller of the first roller and the second roller, wherein the processor is configured to cause the third actuation unit to move the roller in a third direction, thereby spacing the first roller and the second roller from the print medium.

In some examples, each of the first roller and the second roller further includes a shaft coupled to the biasing member, wherein the shaft allows the first roller and the second roller to rotate about the shaft.

In some examples, the first roller and the second roller are rotatable about an axis between a first position and a second position.

In some examples, at the first position, the first roller and the second roller abut the print medium.

In some examples, at the second position, the first roller and the second roller are positioned away from the print medium.

In some examples, the first roller and the second roller are coupled to the printhead.

In some examples, rotation of the first roller and the second roller about the shaft traverses the printhead in the second direction.

In some examples, the printhead assembly further includes a top chassis portion removably coupled to the bottom chassis portion, wherein a bottom surface of the top chassis portion is positioned at a predetermined distance from a top surface of the bottom chassis portion.

In some examples, the frame is coupled to the top chassis portion such that the frame is extendable from a bottom surface of the top chassis portion.

In some examples, the frame is positioned between a bottom surface of the top chassis portion and a top surface of the bottom chassis portion.

In some examples, the printing device further comprises a housing, wherein the housing comprises a base and a back ridge section, wherein the back ridge section is coupled orthogonally to the base, and wherein the back ridge section extends along a vertical axis of the printing device.

In some examples, the printing device further includes at least one first rail coupled to the back section, wherein the frame is slidably coupled to the at least one first rail.

In some examples, the shape of the frame corresponds to concentric rectangles, and wherein the frame is configured to press against at least one edge of the print medium.

In some examples, the bottom chassis portion includes a top end portion and a bottom end portion, and wherein the top surface of the bottom chassis portion defines the top end portion of the bottom chassis portion, and wherein the bottom surface of the bottom chassis portion defines the bottom end portion of the bottom chassis portion.

In some examples, the bottom surface of the bottom chassis portion defines a plurality of apertures extending from a bottom end portion of the bottom chassis portion to a top end portion of the bottom chassis portion.

In some examples, the printing device further includes a fan configured to be received at a bottom end portion of the bottom chassis portion, wherein the fan is configured to generate a negative pressure at a top end portion of the bottom chassis portion through the plurality of apertures, wherein the print medium is pulled toward a top surface of the bottom chassis portion based on the negative pressure generated by the fan through the plurality of apertures.

In some examples, the frame is configured to further press the print medium against the top surface of the bottom chassis portion when the fan generates a negative pressure generated by the fan through the plurality of apertures.

In some examples, the bottom surface of the bottom chassis portion defines a cavity extending from a bottom end portion of the bottom chassis portion to a top end portion of the bottom chassis portion, wherein the cavity defines an inner surface of the bottom chassis portion, and wherein the inner surface of the bottom chassis portion defines a plurality of protruding grooves extending along a lateral axis of the printing device.

In some examples, the printing device further includes a modular platform configured to be removably received on the top end portion of the bottom chassis portion by the plurality of protruding channels, wherein the modular platform has a bottom surface and a top surface, and wherein the bottom surface of the modular platform faces the cavity and the top surface of the modular platform is positioned opposite the cavity.

In some examples, the bottom surface defines a plurality of apertures extending from the bottom surface of the modular platform to the top surface of the modular platform.

In some examples, the printing device further comprises a fan configured to be received at a bottom end portion of the bottom chassis portion, wherein the fan is configured to generate negative pressure at a top end portion of the bottom chassis portion through the plurality of apertures and cavities, wherein the print medium is pulled toward the top surface of the modular platform based on the negative pressure generated by the fan through the plurality of apertures and cavities.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a method is provided. The method may include: moving, by a processor in the printing device, a frame to a first position, the frame being movably positioned above the bottom chassis portion along a vertical axis of the printing device, wherein the frame is spaced apart from the bottom chassis portion in the first position; traversing, by the processor, the print medium along a print path to position the print medium on a top surface of the bottom chassis portion; and moving, by the processor, the frame to a second position, wherein the frame presses the print medium against the bottom chassis portion in the second position during printing of the content on the print medium.

In some examples, the method further includes activating an actuation unit that causes an external force to be applied to the frame, wherein the frame moves to the second position in response to the application of the external force.

In some examples, the method further includes activating a vacuum generating unit positioned at a bottom surface of the bottom chassis portion, wherein activation of the vacuum generating unit causes the print medium to adhere to the top surface of the bottom chassis portion.

In some examples, the combination of positioning the frame at the second position and activating the vacuum generating unit planarizes the print medium.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a computing device configured to operate a printing apparatus is provided. In some examples, the computing device includes: a memory device comprising one or more instructions; a processor configured to execute the one or more instructions to: moving a frame to a first position, the frame being movably positioned above the bottom chassis portion along a vertical axis of the printing device, wherein the frame is spaced apart from the bottom chassis portion in the first position; traversing the print medium along a print path to position the print medium on a top surface of the bottom chassis portion; and moving the frame to a second position, wherein the frame presses the print medium against the bottom chassis portion in the second position during printing of the content on the print medium.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a method is provided. The method may include: receiving, by a processor, one or more configuration parameters associated with a printing device, wherein the one or more configuration parameters include at least a resolution to be used for printing content on a print medium; determining, by a processor, one or more print head parameters based on the one or more configuration parameters associated with a print head in a printing device, wherein the one or more print head parameters include a rotational speed of a polygon mirror in the print head; receiving, by a processor, one or more updated configuration parameters, wherein the one or more updated configuration parameters include at least an updated resolution to be used for printing content on a print medium; updating, by the processor, the one or more print head parameters, wherein updating the one or more print head parameters includes updating at least a rotational speed of the polygon mirror.

In some examples, the method further includes determining, by the processor, a count of laser beams to be used to print the content.

In some examples, the method further includes modifying a count of laser beams to be used to print the content based on the updated resolution.

In some examples, the polygonal mirror includes a plurality of facets.

In some examples, the method further includes determining a count of facets of the plurality of facets to be used to print the content based on the updated resolution.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a method is provided. The method may include: receiving, by a processor, one or more configuration parameters associated with a printing device, wherein the one or more configuration parameters include at least a resolution and a media traverse speed to be used for printing content on a print medium; determining, by the processor, a measure of deflection based on the one or more configuration parameters, the one or more laser beams configured to sweep a width of the print medium with the measure;

in some examples, the method further comprises: receiving, by a processor, content to be printed on a print medium; modifying, by the processor, the content to introduce a second measure of skew in the content, wherein printing the modified content generates printed content having zero degree skew.

In some examples, the method further includes determining a dot size based on a resolution of the content to be printed.

In some examples, a measure of skew is determined based on a dot size.

In some examples, the method further includes determining, by the processor, a count of laser beams used to write the content.

In some examples, the method further includes determining an amount of content to be printed by each of the laser beams in the laser beam count.

In some examples, a measure of deflection is determined for each of the laser beams in the laser beam count, and wherein the measure of deflection for each laser beam is determined based on an amount of content printed by each of the laser beams in the laser beam count.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a printhead engine apparatus is provided. The print head engine apparatus may include: a top chassis portion; a bottom chassis portion pivotally coupled to the bottom chassis portion, wherein the bottom chassis portion is movable between a first position and a second position, and wherein in the first position the bottom chassis portion is coupled to the top chassis portion by a latch, and wherein in the second position the bottom chassis portion is positioned away from the top chassis portion.

In some examples, the top chassis portion includes a first top chassis portion and a second top chassis portion, and wherein the bottom chassis portion includes a first bottom chassis portion and a second bottom chassis portion.

In some examples, the first top chassis portion is fixedly coupled to a rear spine section of the printing device, wherein the second top chassis portion is pivotally coupled to the second bottom chassis portion.

In some examples, the second bottom chassis portion is fixedly coupled to the back spine section of the printing device, wherein the first bottom chassis portion is pivotally coupled to the second bottom chassis portion.

In some examples, the first bottom chassis portion is pivotally coupled to the first top chassis portion.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a method for synchronization between a printing device and a printhead is provided. The method may include: receiving a print head ready signal and a laser position signal from a print head; and traversing a print medium in the printing device a predetermined distance in response to receiving the print head ready signal and the laser position signal; and transmitting a ready-to-print signal to the printhead.

In some examples, the predetermined distance is determined based on a resolution to be used to print the content on the print medium.

In some examples, the print head ready signal indicates that a polygon mirror in the print head reaches a determined rotational speed.

In some examples, the laser position signal indicates a determined position of the writing laser on the polygonal mirror.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a method for synchronization between a printing device and a printhead is provided. The method may include: rotating a polygon mirror in a print head at a predetermined rotational speed; generating a print head ready signal in response to rotation of the polygon mirror at a predetermined rotational speed; receiving a SOL signal from a SOL detector; generating a laser position signal in response to receiving the SOL signal; transmitting the laser position signal and the print head ready signal to a control unit of the printing device; and receiving a ready-to-print signal from a control unit of the printing apparatus in response to the transmission of the laser position signal and the printhead ready signal.

In some examples, the ready-to-print signal indicates that the print medium traverses a predetermined distance.

In some examples, the laser position signal is a beginning of a blanking period, where the blanking period corresponds to a timer period in which the write laser is directed to a position other than the print medium.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a method is provided. The method may include: receiving, by a processor, one or more configuration parameters associated with a printing device, wherein the one or more configuration parameters include at least a resolution and a media traverse speed to be used for printing content on a print medium; determining, by the processor, a measure of deflection based on the one or more configuration parameters, the one or more laser beams configured to sweep a width of the print medium with the measure; receiving, by a processor, content to be printed on a print medium; modifying, by the processor, the content to introduce a second measure of skew in the content, wherein printing the modified content generates printed content having zero degree skew.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a computer-implemented method is provided. The computer-implemented method may include: triggering emission of Ultraviolet (UV) light from a UV light source onto a print medium associated with the printing device; detecting reflected light from the print medium; generating a red light intensity indication based on the reflected light; generating a green light intensity indication based on the reflected light;

Generating an indication of blue light intensity based on the reflected light; whether the printing device supports the print medium is determined based on whether at least one of the red light intensity indication, the green light intensity indication, and the blue light intensity indication satisfies a light intensity threshold.

In some examples, the computer-implemented method further comprises: determining that at least one of the red light intensity indication, the green light intensity indication, and the blue light intensity indication meets a light intensity threshold; in response to determining that at least one of the red light intensity indication, the green light intensity indication, and the blue light intensity indication satisfies a light intensity threshold, it is determined that the printing device supports printing the media.

In some examples, the computer-implemented method further comprises: determining that any of the red light intensity indication, the green light intensity indication, and the blue light intensity indication does not satisfy the light intensity threshold; and in response to determining that any of the red light intensity indication, the green light intensity indication, and the blue light intensity indication do not meet the light intensity threshold, determining that the printing device does not support the print medium.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a computer-implemented method is provided. The computer-implemented method may include: triggering emission of Ultraviolet (UV) light from a UV light source onto a print medium associated with the printing device; detecting reflected light from the print medium; generating a red light intensity indication based on the reflected light; generating a green light intensity indication based on the reflected light; generating an indication of blue light intensity based on the reflected light; a print medium characteristic associated with the print medium is determined based on the red light intensity indication, the green light intensity indication, and the blue light intensity indication.

In some examples, determining the print media characteristics associated with the print media further comprises: comparing the red light intensity indication to a light intensity threshold; comparing the green light intensity indication to a light intensity threshold; and comparing the blue light intensity indication to a light intensity threshold.

In some examples, determining the print media characteristics associated with the print media further comprises: comparing the red light intensity indication to a first light intensity threshold and a second light intensity threshold; comparing the green light intensity indication to a first light intensity threshold and a second light intensity threshold; and comparing the blue light intensity indication to a first light intensity threshold and a second light intensity threshold.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a computer-implemented method is provided. The computer-implemented method may include: triggering emission of Ultraviolet (UV) light from a UV light source onto a print medium associated with the printing device; detecting reflected light from the print medium; generating an indication of light intensity based on the reflected light; a print medium characteristic associated with the print medium is determined based on the light intensity indication.

In some examples, determining the print media characteristics associated with the print media further comprises: the light intensity indication is compared to a first light intensity threshold and a second light intensity threshold.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus is provided.

In some examples, the printing apparatus may include: a first media guard bar and a second media guard bar disposed on a top surface of the bottom chassis portion, wherein the print medium travels between the first media guard bar and the second media guard bar; a first media sensor retention bar disposed on a first side surface of the first media guard bar; a first media sensor slidably disposed on a first bottom surface of the first media guard bar and configured to emit first Ultraviolet (UV) light to the print media; a second media sensor retention bar disposed on a second side surface of the second media guard bar; a second media sensor slidably disposed on a second bottom surface of the second media guard bar and configured to emit second Ultraviolet (UV) light toward the print media.

In some examples, the first media sensor is configured to detect a first media edge of the print media, wherein the first media sensor is configured to detect a second media edge of the print media.

In some examples, the first media sensor is configured to detect a first reflected light from the print media when a first media edge of the print media is detected, wherein the second media sensor is configured to detect a second reflected light from the print media when a second media edge of the print media is detected.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a computer-implemented method is provided. The computer-implemented method may include: detecting a first media edge of a print medium associated with a printing device; determining a first media edge location based on the first media edge; detecting a second media edge of a print media associated with the printing device; determining a second media edge location based on the second media edge; determining whether a laser travel path associated with a laser subsystem of the printing device overlaps at least one of a first media edge position or a second media edge position; and responsive to determining that the laser travel path overlaps the first media edge position or the second media edge position, turning off the laser subsystem.

In some examples, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to determining that the laser travel path overlaps the first media edge position or the second media edge position, the laser travel path is adjusted.

In some examples, the printing apparatus may include: a bottom chassis portion comprising a height limiter panel, wherein at least one bottom rib element protrudes from a top surface of the height limiter panel; and a top chassis portion including a height limiter channel, wherein at least one top rib element protrudes from a bottom surface of the height limiter channel.

In some examples, the distance between the top surface of one of the at least one bottom rib element and the bottom surface of one of the at least one top rib element is 0.4 millimeters.

In some examples, the first bottom rib element and the second bottom rib element protrude from a top surface of the height limiter panel, wherein the print medium travels between the first bottom rib element and the second bottom rib element.

In some examples, the printing apparatus further comprises: a biasing mechanism disposed on a bottom surface of the height limiter panel, wherein the biasing mechanism comprises: a support beam disposed on a bottom surface of the height limiter panel; and a spring element, wherein a first end of the spring element is secured to the support beam and a second end of the spring element is secured to a bottom surface of the height limiter panel.

In some examples, the bottom chassis portion further comprises a securing panel, wherein the plurality of locking rib elements protrude from a side surface of the height limiter panel, wherein the plurality of locking groove elements are disposed on the side surface of the securing panel, wherein the height limiter panel is secured to the securing panel by the plurality of locking rib elements and the plurality of locking groove elements.

In some examples, the laser printhead is configured to generate at least one laser control signal to: the first laser source is caused to generate a first laser beam incident on a target position of the printing medium, and the second laser source is caused to generate a second laser beam incident on the target position of the printing medium, so that the content is irradiated on the printing medium.

In some examples, the target location includes a width of the print medium, and wherein the laser printhead is configured to cause the first laser beam and the second laser beam to simultaneously sweep the width of the print medium.

In some examples, the output of the first laser beam and the output of the second laser beam are superimposed on each other to irradiate content onto the print medium.

In some examples, the content includes one or more points.

In some examples, the first laser source and the second laser source are oriented in a perpendicular arrangement relative to each other.

In some examples, the first laser source and the second laser source each comprise a multimode laser.

In some examples, the laser printhead is configured to: the first laser source is caused to generate a first laser beam at a first power output and the second laser source is caused to generate a second laser beam at a second power output different from the first power output.

In some examples, the first power output and the second power output include configurable parameters.

In some examples, the configurable parameter corresponds to a print resolution.

In some examples, the laser printhead is configured to generate the first laser control signal to: causing the first laser source to generate a pre-excitation beam incident on a target location of the print medium; after the first laser source is caused to generate the pre-excitation beam, the second laser source is caused to generate a write beam incident on a target location of the print medium.

In some examples, the laser printhead is configured to cause the second laser source to generate the write beam in response to determining that a condition of the print medium satisfies the activation threshold.

In some examples: the first laser source comprises a single mode laser and the second laser source comprises a multimode laser.

In some examples, the pre-excitation beam irradiates a dashed line onto the print medium, and the write beam irradiates a spot that is superimposed on the dashed line.

In some examples, the laser printhead is configured to cause the second laser source to generate the write beam within milliseconds after causing the first laser source to generate the pre-excitation beam.

In some examples, the first laser source is configured to generate the pre-excitation beam at a first frequency and the second laser source is configured to generate the write beam at a second frequency.

In some examples, the first frequency is lower than the second frequency.

In some examples, the first laser source is configured to be in an off state when traversing a portion of the print medium where no content is to be printed.

In some examples, the high quality dimension of the pre-excitation beam is oriented to the line width of the print medium.

In some examples, the resolution band of the pre-excitation beam matches the resolution band of the write beam.

In some examples, one or more of the first laser source and the second laser source are in a deactivated state when the target area of the print medium is not targeted.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus is provided. In some examples, the printing apparatus may include: a laser print head; a laser printhead controller in electronic communication with the laser printhead, wherein the laser printhead controller is configured to: in response to receiving data associated with a print medium of the printing device, one or more operating parameters of the printing device are determined based at least in part on the analysis of the data.

In some examples, the laser printhead controller is further configured to determine the one or more operating parameters based at least in part on a stored correction look-up table.

In some examples, the laser printhead controller is further configured to: control signals are transmitted to cause the laser printhead to adjust one or more operating parameters of the printing apparatus.

In some examples, adjusting the one or more operating parameters includes adjusting one or more of timing or power output associated with the at least one laser source.

In some examples, the operating parameter is associated with a print resolution parameter.

In some examples, the printing device further includes a sensor in electronic communication with the laser printhead controller.

In some examples, the sensor is downstream relative to the print medium.

In some examples, the sensor is configured to: image data associated with a print medium having content printed thereon is acquired.

In some examples, the sensor includes a linear sensor or an image sensor.

In some examples, the sensor is configured to provide real-time feedback during a printing operation of the printing device.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus is provided. In some examples, the printing apparatus may include: a print media assembly; an optical assembly comprising one or more laser sources; and a laser printhead controller in electronic communication with the print media assembly and the optical assembly.

In some examples, the laser printhead controller is configured to determine a number of write cycles required.

In some examples, the number of write cycles required is based at least in part on the print media type, sweep rate, and print speed required.

In some examples, the laser printhead controller is configured to cause the one or more laser sources to perform a plurality of write cycles in order to impinge content onto the print medium.

In some examples, the laser printhead controller is further configured to: stopping the traversing of the print medium by the print medium assembly; and causing the one or more laser sources to perform the write-many cycle by generating one or more laser beams incident on the print medium.

In some examples, the laser printhead controller is configured to: after causing the one or more laser sources to perform the multiple write cycles, the print media assembly is caused to begin traversing the print media.

In some examples, performing the write-many cycle includes: the one or more laser sources are caused to generate one or more laser beams incident on the print medium as the print medium traverses the printing device.

In some examples, the laser printhead controller is further configured to cause the optical assembly to implement wobble correction optics.

In some examples, performing the write-many cycle includes: a first portion of the first print medium width is sequentially swept.

In some examples, performing the write-many cycle further comprises: after sweeping the first portion of the first print media width, a second portion of the second print media width is sequentially swept.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, an optical assembly is provided. In some examples, the optical assembly may include: a collimating component comprising at least a first plurality of lenses and a second plurality of lenses, wherein the collimating component is configured to collimate a laser beam generated by a laser source.

In some examples, the first plurality of lenses and the second plurality of lenses are configured to move independently relative to each other.

In some examples, the laser source comprises a multimode laser.

In some examples, the laser source comprises a single mode laser.

In some examples, the optical assembly further includes a focusing component configured to focus the output of the collimating component.

In some examples, the optical assembly further includes a beam control component configured to adjust an output of the collimating component.

In some examples, the beam steering component includes one or more prismatic elements.

In some examples, the one or more prism elements include anamorphic prism pairs.

In some examples, the beam control component is further configured to adjust the output of the collimating component by adjusting the relative position of the anamorphic prism pair.

In some examples, the optical assembly further includes a beam measurement element configured to detect one or more parameters of the laser beam, wherein the beam control component is configured to adjust the output of the collimation component based at least in part on the one or more parameters of the laser beam.

In some examples, the one or more parameters include a detected divergence of the laser beam.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a print medium is provided.

In some examples, the print medium may include: a laser markable coating defining a top layer of the print medium; and a reflective layer defining an intermediate layer of the print medium.

In some examples, the print medium further includes an absorber layer defining a second intermediate layer of the print medium.

In some examples, the laser markable coating includes at least one color former, at least one developer, and at least one light to heat converter.

In some examples, the at least one color former comprises a leuco dye.

In some examples, the at least one color developer includes a proton donor.

In some examples, the reflective layer includes a metal layer or metal particles.

In some examples, the metal layer or metal particles include one or more of aluminum, nickel, bronze, and steel.

In some examples, the reflective layer includes hexagonal boron nitride.

In some examples, the absorber layer includes titanium dioxide.

In some examples, the absorber layer comprises a ceramic material or a metal oxide.

In some examples, the computer-implemented method further comprises: receiving, by a processor of a printing device, raw print data; generating, by the processor, an image buffer based at least in part on the raw print data; an image buffer is provided by the processor to a controller of the printhead.

In some examples, when the first power level is adjusted to the second power level, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to receiving the darkness increase associated with the darkness setting input, the first power level is increased to a second power level.

In some examples, when the first power level is adjusted to the second power level, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to receiving the darkness reduction associated with the darkness setting input, the first power level is reduced to a second power level.

In some examples, the first power level is between 0% (inclusive) and 100% (inclusive).

In some examples, the darkness setting input is between-100% (inclusive) and 100% (inclusive).

In some examples, adjusting the first power level to the second power level is further based on a darkness step ratio.

In some examples, the darkness step ratio is 25%.

In some examples, adjusting the first power level to the second power level is further based on a darkness setting look-up table.

In some examples, when the first power level is adjusted to the second power level, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to receiving the contrast increase associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second power level meets a power level threshold, the second power level is increased to a third power level.

In some examples, when the first power level is adjusted to the second power level, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to receiving the contrast increase associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second power level does not meet the power level threshold, the second power level is reduced to a third power level.

In some examples, when the first power level is adjusted to the second power level, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to receiving the contrast reduction associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second power level meets a power level threshold, the second power level is reduced to a third power level.

In some examples, when the first power level is adjusted to the second power level, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to receiving the contrast reduction associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second power level does not meet the power level threshold, the second power level is increased to a third power level.

In some examples, adjusting the second power level to the third power level is further based on a contrast step ratio.

In some examples, the contrast step ratio is 25%.

In some examples, adjusting the second power level to the third power level is further based on the contrast setting look-up table.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a computer-implemented method is provided. The computer-implemented method may include: receiving, by a controller of a printhead of a printing apparatus, print data indicative of at least a first duty cycle; receiving, by a controller, a darkness setting input; adjusting, by the controller, the first duty cycle to a second duty cycle based at least in part on the darkness setting input; receiving, by a controller, a contrast setting input; adjusting, by the controller, the second duty cycle to a third duty cycle based at least in part on the contrast setting input; and a laser power control system that provides a third duty cycle to the printhead by the controller.

In some examples, the first duty cycle is associated with a first point to be printed on the print medium by the printhead.

In some examples, the laser power control system of the printhead is configured to cause the laser subsystem of the printhead to print the first dot at the third duty cycle.

In some examples, when the first duty cycle is adjusted to the second duty cycle, the computer-implemented method further comprises: the first duty cycle is increased to a second duty cycle in response to receiving a darkness increase associated with the darkness setting input.

In some examples, when the first duty cycle is adjusted to the second duty cycle, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to receiving the darkness reduction associated with the darkness setting input, the first duty cycle is reduced to a second duty cycle.

In some examples, the first duty cycle is between 0% (inclusive) and 100% (inclusive).

In some examples, adjusting the first duty cycle to the second duty cycle is further based on a darkness step ratio.

In some examples, the darkness step ratio is 25%.

In some examples, adjusting the first duty cycle to the second duty cycle further sets a look-up table based on the darkness.

In some examples, when the first duty cycle is adjusted to the second duty cycle, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to receiving the contrast increase associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second duty cycle satisfies the duty cycle threshold, the second duty cycle is increased to a third duty cycle.

In some examples, when the first duty cycle is adjusted to the second duty cycle, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to receiving the contrast increase associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second duty cycle does not meet the power level threshold, the second duty cycle is reduced to a third duty cycle.

In some examples, when the first duty cycle is adjusted to the second duty cycle, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to receiving the contrast reduction associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second duty cycle meets the power level threshold, the second duty cycle is reduced to a third duty cycle.

In some examples, when the first duty cycle is adjusted to the second duty cycle, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to receiving the contrast reduction associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second duty cycle does not meet the power level threshold, the second duty cycle is increased to a third duty cycle.

In some examples, adjusting the second duty cycle to the third duty cycle is further based on the contrast step ratio.

In some examples, the contrast step ratio is 25%.

In some examples, adjusting the second duty cycle to the third duty cycle further sets a look-up table based on the contrast.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a computer-implemented method is provided. The computer-implemented method may include: determining, by a controller of a printhead of the printing apparatus, a first point, a second point, and a third point from an image buffer, wherein the second point is between the first point and the third point; determining, by the controller, a first power level associated with the first point, a second power level associated with the second point, and a third power level associated with the third point; the second power level is adjusted based at least in part on the first power level and the third power level in response to receiving the smoothness setting input or the sharpness setting input.

In some examples, causing at least one laser of the printing apparatus to perform the power compensation operation includes: determining, by the controller and via one or more sensors, that the current media temperature is below a low threshold temperature value; and providing, by the controller, a second control indication to cause the at least one laser to increase the amount of output power.

In some examples, causing at least one laser of the printing apparatus to perform the power compensation operation includes: determining, by the controller and via one or more sensors, that the current media temperature is above a high threshold temperature value; and providing, by the controller, a second control indication to cause the at least one laser to reduce the amount of output power.

In some examples, the computer-implemented method further comprises: determining, by the controller and via the one or more sensors, a second predetermined range in which the current medium temperature is below the target medium temperature, the second predetermined range exceeding the power compensation range; and providing, by the controller, a control indication to raise the preheat laser temperature of the at least one preheat laser.

In some examples, the computer-implemented method further comprises: determining, by the controller and via the one or more sensors, a second predetermined range in which the current media temperature is above the target media temperature, the second predetermined range exceeding the power compensation range; and providing, by the controller, a control instruction to cause the printing apparatus to stop operating for a predetermined period of time.

In some examples, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to a determination by a controller of a printhead of the printing apparatus that no further printing operation is required, a control indication is provided by the controller to retract at least a portion of the unprinted media into the feed roller.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus is provided. In some examples, the printing apparatus may include: a preheating chamber having at least one movable heat sink element disposed at a first position relative to a portion of the print medium; and a printer control unit in electronic communication with the at least one movable heat sink element, the printer control unit configured to: in response to detecting that a portion of the print medium has moved from the laser-written position, a control indication is provided to move the at least one movable heat sink element relative to the print medium from the first position to the second position.

In some examples, the at least one movable heat sink element is driven by an actuator control unit that is operatively coupled to the printer control unit.

In some examples, at least one movable heat sink element is attached to/operatively coupled to the movable arm or movable component.

In some examples, the printing apparatus may include: a laser print head; and at least a first laser source in electronic communication with the laser print head, wherein the laser print head is configured to generate at least one laser control signal to generate the pre-emphasis drive signal in a time period less than a total dot time at the beginning of at least one print dot.

In some examples, the pre-emphasis drive signal is 10% to 50% higher than the laser drive signal after the period of time.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a method for automatically tuning a printing device is provided. The method may include: providing, by the at least one processing circuit, a control indication to disable one or more lasers of the printing device; driving, by at least one processing circuit, a digital-to-analog converter (DAC) output to full scale, wherein the DAC is configured to drive at least one laser of a printing device; and compensating, by the at least one processing circuit, the gain value as needed to increase or decrease the output from the differential amplifier operatively coupled to the DAC.

In some examples, the at least one processing circuit includes a microcontroller unit.

In some examples, the method further comprises: control instructions are provided by the at least one processing circuit to activate the printing device.

In some examples, the method further comprises: the re-compensation operation is periodically performed by the at least one processing circuit in the event that a threshold period of time has elapsed since the printing device has been power cycled, or in the event that an ambient temperature associated with the printing device is outside of a predetermined range.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus is provided. In some examples, the printing apparatus may include: a housing; at least one integrated laser component disposed at least partially within the housing, wherein the integrated laser component comprises a plurality of lasers; and a controller component in electronic communication with the integrated laser component.

In some examples, the plurality of lasers includes four multimode lasers arranged in a 2 x 2 array.

In some examples, the printing apparatus further comprises a polygonal mirror configured to direct an input beam of at least one integrated laser component; and a lens element configured to magnify the output beam of the polygonal mirror onto the print medium in the cross-scan dimension.

In some examples, the lens element includes a magnifying cylindrical lens.

In some examples, each of the plurality of lasers is simultaneously aligned using a beam shaping and steering system that includes at least one of a collimating lens, a cylindrical lens, a leveling prism, and a wedge prism.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, a method for scaling a print speed of a printing device is provided. The method may include: detecting, by at least one processing circuit, a warm-up state associated with the print medium; and automatically scaling, by the at least one processing circuit, the print speed based at least in part on the preheat state.

In some examples, the printing device may include a preheat assembly. The preheat assembly may include a first drive roller and a second drive roller positioned in direct contact with a top surface of the print medium; and a rotary preheat member configured to preheat the print medium, the rotary preheat member positioned in direct contact with a bottom surface of the print medium, wherein an aperture between the first drive roller, the second drive roller, and the rotary preheat member defines a print medium path through the preheat assembly.

In some examples, the rotary preheating assembly includes a substantially cylindrical member configured to rotate relative to a central axis thereof.

In some examples, the rotary preheating assembly further includes an infrared heating source or a conduction-based heating element defining an internal concentric member of the rotary preheating assembly.

In some examples, the printing device prints the line between the first drive roller and the second drive roller.

In some examples, the preheat assembly is at least partially mounted on the support bracket, and wherein the preheat assembly further includes at least one of a tear strip and a guide element.

According to various examples of the present disclosure, another printing apparatus is provided.

In some examples, the printing apparatus includes: a pre-heat component operatively coupled to at least a first sensing element; at least one heating component operatively coupled to at least a second sensing element; and a controller component in electronic communication with the preheating component, the at least first sensing element, the at least one heating component, and the at least second sensing element.

In some examples, the at least one heating component comprises: a primary heating element positioned adjacent a top surface of the print medium, and a secondary heating element positioned adjacent a bottom surface of the print medium.

In some examples, the controller component is configured to: detecting, via at least a first sensing element, at least a first temperature value associated with the pre-heating component; detecting, via at least a second sensing element, at least a second temperature value associated with the at least one heating component; and regulating an operating temperature or power output of the preheating component and the at least one heating component based at least in part on one or more of the first temperature value and the second temperature value.

In some examples, the controller component includes a proportional-integral-derivative (PID) controller.

In some examples, the at least first temperature value and the at least second temperature value each include one or more of an object temperature value, a surface temperature value, and an ambient temperature value.

In some examples, each of the preheating component and the at least one heating component includes one or more of a cartridge heater, a flexible heater, an Infrared (IR) light emitting diode heater, an IR lamp, and a heater heat sink.

In some examples, the printing device further includes at least an additional sensing element configured to detect a temperature value associated with a surface of the print medium.

In the present specification and drawings, exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure have been disclosed. The present disclosure is not limited to such exemplary embodiments. The use of the term "and/or" includes any and all combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. The figures are schematic representations and are not necessarily drawn to scale. Unless otherwise indicated, certain terminology is used in a generic and descriptive sense only and not for purposes of limitation.

The foregoing detailed description has set forth various embodiments of the devices and/or processes via the use of block diagrams, flowcharts, schematic diagrams, examples, and illustrations. Insofar as such block diagrams, flowcharts, schematics, and examples contain one or more functions and/or operations, each function and/or operation within such block diagrams, flowcharts, schematics, or examples can be implemented, individually and/or collectively, by a wide variety of hardware.

In one embodiment, examples of the present disclosure may be implemented via an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). However, the embodiments disclosed herein may be equivalently implemented in standard integrated circuits, in whole or in part, as one or more computer programs running on one or more computers (e.g., as one or more programs running on one or more computer systems), as one or more programs running on one or more processing circuits (e.g., as microprocessor), as one or more programs running on one or more processors (e.g., microprocessor), as firmware, or as virtually any combination thereof.

In addition, those skilled in the art will recognize that the exemplary mechanisms disclosed herein may be capable of being distributed as a program product in a variety of tangible forms, and that an exemplary embodiment applies equally regardless of the particular type of tangible instruction bearing media used to actually carry out the distribution. Examples of tangible instruction-bearing media include, but are not limited to, the following: recordable type media such as floppy disks, hard disk drives, CD ROMs, digital magnetic tape, flash memory drives, and computer memory.

The various embodiments described above may be combined with one another to provide further embodiments. For example, two or more of the above-described exemplary embodiments may be combined to, for example, improve the safety of laser printing and reduce the risk associated with laser-related accidents and injuries. These and other changes can be made to the systems and methods of the present invention in light of the above detailed description. Accordingly, the disclosure is not limited by the disclosure, but rather its scope is to be determined by the following claims.

Claims

1. A printing apparatus, comprising:

a preheating assembly, the preheating assembly comprising:

a first drive roller and a second drive roller positioned in direct contact with a top surface of the print medium; and

a rotary preheat member configured to preheat the print medium, the rotary preheat member positioned in direct contact with a bottom surface of the print medium, wherein an aperture between the first drive roller, the second drive roller, and the rotary preheat member defines a print medium path through the preheat assembly.

2. The printing apparatus of claim 1, wherein the rotary pre-heating assembly comprises a substantially cylindrical member configured to rotate relative to a central axis thereof.

3. The printing apparatus of claim 2, wherein the rotary pre-heat assembly further comprises an infrared heating source or a conduction-based heating element defining an internal concentric member of the rotary pre-heat assembly.

4. The printing device of claim 1, wherein a printing device print line is located between the first drive roller and the second drive roller.

5. The printing device of claim 1, wherein the preheat assembly is at least partially mounted on a support bracket, and wherein the preheat assembly further comprises at least one of a tear strip and a guide element.

6. The printing apparatus of claim 1, further comprising:

a pre-heating component operatively coupled to at least a first sensing element;

at least one heating component operatively coupled to at least a second sensing element; and

a controller component in electronic communication with the pre-heating component, the at least first sensing element, the at least one heating component, and the at least second sensing element.

7. The printing apparatus of claim 6, wherein the at least one heating component comprises:

A primary heating element positioned adjacent the top surface of the print medium, and

an auxiliary heating member positioned adjacent to the bottom surface of the print medium.

8. The printing apparatus of claim 6, wherein the controller component is configured to:

detecting at least a first temperature value associated with the pre-heating component via the at least a first sensing element;

detecting, via the at least second sensing element, at least a second temperature value associated with the at least one heating component; and

an operating temperature or power output of the preheating component and the at least one heating component is regulated based at least in part on one or more of the first temperature value and the second temperature value.

9. The printing apparatus of claim 6, wherein said controller means comprises a proportional-integral-derivative (PID) controller.

10. The printing device of claim 6, wherein the at least first temperature value and the at least second temperature value each comprise one or more of an object temperature value, a surface temperature value, and an ambient temperature value.